LG Electronics USA L03B PCS GSM Phone User Manual L 06A Sake Cover Press E

LG Electronics USA PCS GSM Phone L 06A Sake Cover Press E

UserManual.wiki >

LG Electronics USA >

L03B User Manual HTML Version

Users Manual

Part 15.21 statement

" Change or Modifications that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void

the user's authority to operate the equipment. “

Part 15.105 statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference

in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there

is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. if this equipment does cause harmful

interference or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is

encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This device is not intended for sale in the USA.

Part 15 Class B Compliance

This device and its accessories comply with part15 of FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device & its accessories may not cause harmful interference.

(2) This device & its accessories must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Body-worn Operation

This USB modem has been tested for typical body-worn operations

with the distance of 0.79inches (2.0cm) from the user’s body.

To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements, a minimum separation distance

of 0.79inches(2.05cm) must be maintained from the user's body.

Before Using the Handset

Part Names and Functions ･･････････････････････････ 28

Viewing Display ･････････････････････････････････････ 33

Illumination ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 36

Using Touch Panel ･･････････････････････････････････ 36

Selecting Menu ･････････････････････････････････････ 37

Using UIM (FOMA Card) ････････････････････････････ 43

Attaching/Removing Battery Pack ･････････････････ 46

Charging ････････････････････････････････････････････ 47

Checking Battery Level ･･･････････････ Battery level 50

Turning Power ON/OFF ･････････････Power ON/OFF 51

Changing Screen Display to English or Korean

･････････････････････････････････････Select language 52

Making Initial Settings ･･････････････････････････････ 52

Setting Date and Time ･･････････････Set Date&Time 53

Notifying the Other Party of Your Phone Number

････････････････････････････････ Caller ID notiﬁcation 54

Checking Your Own Phone Number ･･･ Own Number 54

Before Using the Handset

Part Names and Functions

* The FOMA antenna is inside the FOMA terminal. To communicate in better condition,

avoid covering the antenna part with your hands.

Front

Front with the FOMA

terminal closed

Rear

Left side

Right side

Before Using the Handset

Continue on the next page

Using earphones

Connect earphones compatible with the external connector

terminal (optional).

If you use the incompatible earphones, connect the conversion

plug adapter (optional) to the earphones.

Earphone

terminal

(Flat type)

Flat plug for the Flat-plug

Earphone/Microphone with

Switch

Plug

Example: Connecting the Flat-plug Earphone/

Microphone with Switch (optional)

Infrared Port

• When performing infrared communications, point this towards

the other device.→P328

Inner camera

• Capture your own image or moving picture.→P222, P227

• Show your own image during a videophone call.

Illumination sensor

• Detect surrounding brightness with the sensor and adjust the

display brightness automatically.→P110

• Do not cover this sensor with a hand or do not attach a sticker,

etc. The brightness may not be detected.

Earpiece/Speaker

• The other party's voice comes out from here.

• Ring tones, alarm tones, and melodies sound from here.

• The other party's voice comes out from here during a Hands-

free call.

Display→P33

GoogleTM service key

• Display the Google

service menu (P334). (If there is a

function in use, it may not be displayed.)

• Press this for 1+ seconds to exit each function and return to

the Stand-by display.

Mouthpiece

• During a call, transmit your voice through this.

• During a moving picture capture, this works as a microphone.

Navigation key

Used to move the cursor, scroll through the screen, or execute

the selected operation.

• Execute the selected operation.

• Press this for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to set/cancel the IC card

lock.→P292

• Move the cursor up.

• Press this in Stand-by to display Schedule.

• Press this while MUSIC player, etc. is running to increase the

volume.

• Move the cursor down.

• Press this in Stand-by to display the Phonebook list screen

(P91), and press for 1+ seconds to display the Add to

phonebook screen (P84).

•

Press this while MUSIC player, etc. is running to reduce the

volume.

• Move the cursor left. Also, return to the previous screen.

• Press this in Stand-by to display the Received calls list screen

(P62), and press for 1+ seconds to display the Received mail

list screen (P167).

• Move the cursor right. Also, go to the next screen.

•

Press this in Stand-by to display the Redial list screen (P60), and

press for 1+ seconds to display the Sent mail list screen (P167).

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

Menu key/Upper left soft key

• Press this in Stand-by to display the Main menu (P37).

•

Execute the operation indicated for the upper left soft key.→P32

Mail key/Lower left soft key

•

Press this in Stand-by to display the Mail menu screen (P137),

and press for 1+ seconds to check new messages.→P150, P173

•

Execute the operation indicated for the lower left soft key.→P32

Start key

• Make/answer a voice or videophone call.→P56, P72

• Press this in Stand-by to display the Phone number entry

screen (P56).

Dial keys

• Press to enter a phone number or characters.→P443

• Press

for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to enter "+".→P68

Public mode (Drive mode) key

• Enter "

"/"＊".

• Press this for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to set/cancel Public

mode (Drive mode).→P76

i-mode/i-αppli key/Upper right soft key

• Press this in Stand-by to display the i-mode menu screen

(P182), and press for 1+ seconds to display the i-αppli

Software list screen (P275).

•

Execute the operation indicated for the upper right soft key.→P32

•

During character entry, use this to switch the input mode

(Hiragana/Katakana/alphabetic and numeric characters).→P376

Camera/TV key

• Press this in Stand-by to display the Still image capture screen

(P222), and press for 1+ seconds to display the 1Seg watch

screen (P245).

• During character entry, use this to switch the input mode

(pictographs/symbols/emoticons).→P381

Clear/i-Channel key

• Return to the previous state or return to the Stand-by display.

•

Press this in Stand-by to display the Channel list screen (P203).

Power/Exit key

• Press this for 2+ seconds to turn the power on/oﬀ.→P51

• Used to end a call or terminate a function.

Manner mode key

• Enter "#".

• Press this for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to set/cancel Manner

mode.→P105

Strap hole

Illumination

• View the time with the FOMA terminal closed. Also, notify of

incoming calls or mails, the status of the FOMA terminal, etc. by

illumination patterns.→P36

External connector terminal

• The integrated terminal used for charging and connecting

earphones.

• Connect the AC adapter (optional), DC adapter (optional), FOMA

USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional), or Earphone

Plug Adapter for External connector terminal (optional).

Charger terminal

Terminal for charging with the desktop holder.

Multitask key

• Press this for 1+ seconds to display the New task screen.

→P349

• Display the Task list screen.→P350

Lock key

• Set/cancel the lock for the touch panel and keys.→P125

Outer camera

• Capture a still image or moving picture such as landscape, etc.

→P222, P227

• Capture surrounding image during a videophone call.

Photo light/Light

• Light up when capturing a still image/moving picture.

• You can light this up when using the camera.

Before Using the Handset

Continue on the next page

Back cover

• Remove this when inserting/removing the UIM or battery pack.

→P43, P46

• Do not remove the sticker attached at the back side of the

Back cover. If removing it, the IC card contents may not be read

or written.

mark

• The IC card is included (cannot be removed). Hold this on the

scanning device to use as Osaifu-Keitai.→P291

microSD card slot

• Insert a microSD card.→P318

DFE

Volume key

Use to adjust the volume, etc.

• Press these during a call to adjust the receiver volume.

• Press

for 1+ seconds to display the Record message list

screen (P79).

• Press these on the Playback screen of MUSIC player, etc. to

adjust the playback volume.

• Press these on the List screen to move the cursor or scroll the

screen to the next page.

Camera/TV key

• Press this in Stand-by to display the Still image capture screen

(P222), and press for 1+ seconds to display the 1Seg watch

screen (P245).

• Press this on the Still image/Moving picture capture screen to

work as shutter and capture images/moving pictures.

→P223, P228

1Seg antenna

• Receive 1Seg broadcasting.→P240

* This is not the FOMA antenna.

Opening the FOMA Terminal

You can use this FOMA terminal with the FOMA terminal

closed, opened, and in Turn View Style mode.

• It is recommended to keep the FOMA terminal closed when you

carry the terminal.

Turn View Style



Open the FOMA terminal up to the angle shown

below and rotate the display 180 degrees to

the right



Fold the display forward

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

Note

• When changing the FOMA

terminal in Turn View Style mode,

do not rotate the display to the

left or further than 180 degrees.

Also, do not hit the edge of the

display on the terminal body or

keys. Scratch or damage may

result.

• When changing in Turn View

Style mode, take care not to

pinch your ﬁngers.

When rotating the display

Soft Keys

Available operations on the currently opened screen

are displayed as Soft keys at the bottom of the screen.

To execute the soft key operation, press the following

corresponding keys or directly touch the soft key display.

• The Soft key description diﬀers depending on the function or display

status.

Operation performed using

appears.

Operation performed using

appears.

• The mark ( ) also appears to indicate the available direction

for scrolling or item selection.

Operation performed using

appears.

Operation performed using

appears.

Operation performed using

appears.

Note

• In Turn View Style mode, some Soft keys may not appear, or

descriptions may change compared to the state when the

FOMA terminal is opened.

Notation for Soft Key Operations

This manual describes the Soft key operations as follows.

[Menu]

Corresponding key

Soft key display

Before Using the Handset

Continue on the next page

Viewing Display

The descriptions of the icons appearing at the top of the screen are as follows.

Strong Weak

Signal strength→P51

Self mode set→P124

Out of service area or no signal reception→P51

Voice call in progress→P57

Videophone call in progress→P57

Reject all calls function set→P128

Infrared remote controller operation in progress

→P330

(Blinking) i-mode connection in progress→P183

(Blinking) i-mode communication/i-Channel message

reception in progress→P183

(Blinking) Full browser connection in progress

(Blinking) Full browser communication in progress

Full browser connection in progress (no

communication for a certain period of time)

(Blinking) Packet connection via PC, etc/disconnection in

progress

Packet communication via PC, etc. in progress

Packet reception via PC, etc. in progress

Packet transmission via PC, etc. in progress

Packet reception/transmission via PC, etc. in

progress

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

(White) i-mode mails stored at the i-mode center→P149

(Pink) i-mode center mailbox full

(White) MessageR stored at the i-mode center→P173

(Pink) MessageR at the i-mode center full

(White) MessageF stored at the i-mode center→P173

(Pink) MessageF at the i-mode center full

(White) i-mode mails and MessageR/F stored at the i-mode

center

(Pink) i-mode mails and MessageR/F at the i-mode center

full

(White) Unread i-mode mails→P147

(White) Unread SMS→P177

(White) Unread i-mode mails and SMS

(Pink) Inbox in the FOMA terminal full of unread mails and

protected mails.

SMS in the UIM full

Inbox in the FOMA terminal full of unread mails and

protected mails. SMS in the UIM full

(White) Unread MessageR→P174

(Pink) MessageR in the FOMA terminal full

(White) Unread MessageF→P174

(Pink) MessageF in the FOMA terminal full

SSL-compatible page displayed or loading→P185

i-αppli running→P275

i-α ppliDX running→P275

(Gray) i-αppli Stand-by display displayed→P285

(Gray) i-α ppliDX Stand-by display displayed→P285

A function (task) activated→P349

Multiple functions (tasks) activated

A function (task) and background playback

activated

Multiple functions (tasks) and background playback

activated

(Blinking) Alarm started when no tone sounds due to another

function (task) activated

− Battery level→P50

Lock all set→P121

(Pink) Manner mode set→P105

(White) Original manner mode set→P105

The ring tone for voice/videophone call muted, and

vibration active→P101, P102

The ring tone for voice/videophone call and

vibration active→P101, P102

The ring tone for voice/videophone call muted, and

vibration inactive→P101, P102

The ring tone for Mail or MessageR/F muted, and

vibration active→P101, P102

The ring tone for Mail or MessageR/F and vibration

active→P101, P102

The ring tone for Mail or MessageR/F muted, and

vibration inactive→P101, P102

Public mode (Drive mode) set→P76

Record message active→P78

Alarm set→P351

Before Using the Handset

Continue on the next page

Today's schedule/To do set→P353, P357

Today's schedule/To do with alarm set

→P353, P357

microSD card inserted→P318

Outgoing voice/videophone calls restricted→P123

Incoming voice/videophone calls restricted→P123

Incoming and outgoing voice/videophone calls

restricted→P123

Outgoing mails restricted→P123

Incoming mails restricted→P123

Incoming and outgoing mails restricted→P123

• "Data access lock" set to "ON"→P124

• "Secret mode" set to "Secret mode"→P127

• "Secret mode" set to "Secret data only"→P127

Communication mode set and USB cable

connected

UIM not inserted/error occurred in the UIM→P43

Terminal link applied

IC card lock set

i-αppli auto start failed→P286

i-αppli Stand-by display released due to security

error→P286

Call costs exceeded the limit→P363

Reserving Music&Video Channel program download

→P254

Music&Video Channel program download

completed →P254

Music&Video Channel program download failed

→P254

Downloading Music&Video Channel program

→P254

Pattern deﬁnition update completed→P462

Pattern deﬁnition update recommended

Pattern deﬁnition update failed

i-mode mail Auto send failed

The rewrite notice icon→P461

The update notice icon→P462

Reserving software update→P463

i-mode mail Auto send reserved→P139

Missed call (with the number of calls)

Unread mail (with the number of mails)

Voice mail message (with the number of

messages)→P392

Record message (with the number of messages)

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

Note

• Some characters or symbols appearing on the display may be

partially deformed or abbreviated.

• Icons appearing on the display are based on the default

settings. The display of the FOMA terminal may diﬀer from

the one in the manual depending on setting changes after

purchase.

• The display of the FOMA terminal employs high-precision

production technology, however, there may be instances where

some dots may not light up while others may constantly light

up. Note that this is not a failure.

Illumination

Pressing F or E when or while the FOMA terminal is closed displays

the clock for approximately 5 seconds.

Incoming calls or mails, the status of the FOMA terminal, etc. are

also notiﬁed by illumination patterns. (The following images are

examples of illumination.)

Clock display Incoming voice call/

videophone call Unread mail/

MessageR/F

Music playback Alarm sounding Missed call

Charging

Note

• While another illumination notifying of missed call or unread

mail, etc. is lighting up, the clock cannot be displayed.

• Illumination patterns can be changed depending on the item.

→P113

• Illumination lights up or blinks only with the FOMA terminal

closed.

• Illumination notifying of missed call or unread mail/message

lights up or blinks for up to approximately 1 hour at

approximately 10 seconds interval.

Using Touch Panel

The display of this FOMA terminal works as the touch panel.

Touch the screen directly to perform various operations.

• When the FOMA terminal opens, both touch and key operations

are available. However, depending on the functions, only either

operation may be possible.

• This manual describes procedures mainly with key operations.

• While the touch panel light is turned oﬀ, touch panel operations are

disabled. Turn the light on with the following operations.

- Press any key

- Open/close the FOMA terminal

Cautions on using the touch panel

• The touch panel may not function in the following cases. Also,

operations may not be performed correctly.

- Operations with a foreign object put on the panel

- Operations with the protective sheet or stickers attached

• Do not press the touch panel with a sharp-pointed object such

as nail, pen, pin, etc. or ﬁnger strongly.

Before Using the Handset

Continue on the next page

Touch the panel softly and

release your ﬁnger

Ex.: Select an item or execute

the selected operation

Keep touching the touch

panel and move your ﬁnger

Ex.: Adjust volume

• This operation is described as

"touch" in this manual. • This operation is described as

"slide" in this manual.

Touch the panel softly and sweep upward or downward

Ex: Scroll at high speed when there are too many items, etc.

to be displayed on a screen (This operation may be disabled

depending on the screen.)

Note

• Touch panel operations can be notiﬁed with sound or vibration.

→P104

• Touch operation is not available on sites which use Flash

movies, and i-Channel or i-αppli screens.

Selecting Menu

The FOMA terminal allows you to access or set a function,

and save items, etc. from the Main menu or sub menu.

• This FOMA terminal supports Kisekae Tool (P111). If the Menu

screen design is changed by using Kisekae Tool, menu structure

may change, depending on menu types, according to the frequency

of use.

Selecting Functions from Main Menu

You can select a function using the following 3 methods.

- Navigation key

- Dial keys

- Touch panel

Using steps for accessing the Main menu in Stand-by

and displaying the setting screen for "Color theme" as an

example, this section explains each operation method.

• This manual explains how to select functions using the navigation

keys.

Main menu

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

Functions and corresponding keys displayed on the

Main menu

Function Operation Function Operation Function Operation

Mail

i-mode

i-αppli

Phonebook

Data Box

MUSIC

LifeKit

Media

1Seg

Settings

Own

Number

Osaifu-

Keitai

• Depending on the Main menu design you use, the description of

menu name may diﬀer.

Using Navigation Key



Press

in Stand-by

Main menu appears.



In the Main menu, use

to move the cursor

to "Settings" and press

[Select]

Setting screen



On the Settings screen, use

to move the

cursor to "Display" and press

[Select]

Display screen



On the Display screen, use

to move the

cursor to "Color theme" and press

[Select]

Color theme

screen

Before Using the Handset

Continue on the next page

Using Dial Keys



Press

in Stand-by



On the Main menu screen, press

corresponding to "Settings"



On the Settings screen, press

corresponding to "Display"



On the Display screen, press

corresponding to "Color theme"

Using Touch Panel



Touch in Stand-by

• Alternatively, press

to display the Main menu.



On the Main menu screen, touch the icon for

"Settings"

The cursor is moved to "Settings".



Touch the icon for "Settings" again



On the Settings screen, touch "Display"

The cursor is moved to "Display".



Touch "Display" again



On the Display screen, touch "Color theme"

The cursor is moved to "Color theme".



Touch "Color theme" again

Selecting a Function from Sub Menu

When "Menu" appears on a soft key, you can access a sub

menu to perform various functions.

• The sub menu items vary depending on the function or the FOMA

terminal settings/saved items, etc.

Items with

second

hierarchy

[Menu]

Sub menu

Phone number

entry screen

■ List screen sub menu

The list screen sub menu contains options such as "Delete"

that apply only to the highlighted item and ones such as

"Delete all" that apply to all items. When performing the

operation that applies to only an item, move the cursor to

the relevant item, and then press

[Menu].

Note

• You can move the cursor using

while the sub menu

appears. Also, you can select an item by pressing the dial key

corresponding to the menu number.

• For an item with the second hierarchy, move the cursor and

press

[Select]/

to display the second hierarchy item.

• Press

[Close] to close the sub menu.

Before Using the Handset

Using Hot Keys to Access a Function

You can use each function by touching 4 hot keys displayed

in Stand-by.

Display the Main menu.

Display the Phone number entry screen. Touch for

1+ seconds to display the Recent call list screen.

Display the Mail menu screen (P137). Touch for 1+ seconds

to check new messages (P150, P173).

Display the Phonebook list screen (P91). Touch for

1+ seconds to display the Add to phonebook screen (P84).

Note

• Hot key operations are available only by touching the touch

panel directly.

Using Shortcuts to Access a Function

You can set shortcuts in Stand-by to access each function

quickly by selecting the shortcut icons.

• Setting shortcuts→P106



Stand-by display ▶

▶ Select a shortcut

icon

Shortcuts

Shortcut icons

Note

• You can perform operations by touching a shortcut icon twice

directly.

• To change the setting, touch a shortcut icon for 1+ seconds.

Select the icon with "×" to delete the function from the

shortcuts. Select "Edit shortcut" to display the Stand-by display

setting screen.→P106

Before Using the Handset

Continue on the next page

Basic Operations for Each Screen

Returning to the Previous Screen/Stand-by Display

If you selected undesired menu item and want to return to

the previous screen, or cancel/end the operation and return

to the Stand-by display, perform the following operations.

•

Q: Return to the previous screen. (Touch for touch panel operations.)

•

Z(for 1+ seconds)

(for 1+ seconds)/P

: Return to the

Stand-by display. If a conﬁrmation to exit appears, select "Yes" to

cancel the operation.

Note

• Depending on the current operation on the FOMA terminal,

pressing P/Z/O/Q may not return to the Stand-by

display/previous screen.

Operations for Setting Items

Each setting ﬁeld on a setting screen shows currently set item.

To change settings, perform any of the following operations.

Select the setting

ﬁeld to change and

select an item on

the list

Move the cursor to

the setting ﬁeld to

change and use

to change the setting

Move the cursor to

the setting ﬁeld to

change and use

to switch the setting

▶

Authentication

Depending on the function or service to

use, a password entry screen (P118)

may appear for the authentication

purpose. If the entry screen appears,

use dial keys to enter the password and

press

[OK]. If correctly entered, you

can complete the steps or continue to

the next step.

• The entered password appears as "＊"

(asterisk) marks.

Password entry

screen (Ex.:

Terminal security

code entry screen)

Note

•

To cancel the password entry and close the entry screen, touch .

Before Using the Handset

Notation for Menu Operations

This manual explains operations to be performed mainly from

the Stand-by display. Basically, descriptions of operations are

simpliﬁed as follows.

Example of Operation Description

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶ "Call & Mail image"

Key illustration to press for operation.

Function name for the main menu. Use

to move the cursor

to the function name and press

[Select] to select.

Menu item names. This manual also uses the phrase

"Perform the following operation" or "select XXX". Use

move the cursor to an item and press

[Select] to select.

Example of Sub Menu Description

Items displayed on the sub menu may vary depending on the

settings or saved items of the FOMA terminal.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort ﬁles.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc.

in "Data Box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc.

of the microSD card.

Item name. Press

to move the cursor to the item and

press

[Select] to select.

Functional description of the item.

Item names, functional description, and operation description of

items displayed when the items are selected.

Note

• If multiple sub menus such as the Redial list screen or Redial

detail screen are collectively described, some sub menus

that do not actually appear may be included depending on the

settings or screens.

Before Using the Handset

Continue on the next page

Notations

Description of operations starting from other than the

Stand-by display

At the beginning of the operation, the status of the FOMA

terminal or the screen to be displayed such as "Ringing" or

"List screen" is described.

Omitting

[Select] in the "Select" operation

As shown in

and

of "Example of Operation

Description" (P42), when selecting a target function from

icons or lists, operations such as

[Select] are omitted

from description.

Similarly, in the cases such as password entry or ﬁxing

entered characters, the operations such as

[OK] are

omitted.

Omitting

in the operation to make into

The operation to select items with and press

change to is described as "Mark" omitting the operation

Using UIM (FOMA Card)

The UIM is an IC card that contains subscription information

such as your phone number. You can use communication

functions such as calling, mail, and i-mode, etc. by inserting

the UIM into the FOMA terminal. You can insert the UIM into

other FOMA terminals to use for various purposes.

For details on how to handle the UIM, see the UIM instruction

manual.

Inserting/Removing

• After operations described in "Turning Power OFF" (P51), turn over

the FOMA terminal and remove the battery pack, then insert or

remove the UIM.→P47

Inserting

When inserting the UIM, close the FOMA terminal and hold it

with both hands.



With the IC side (gold) of the UIM down, while

pushing the UIM surface, insert the UIM slowly

until it is ﬁxed Notch

Note

• Do not use excessive force when inserting the UIM to avoid

damaging it.

Before Using the Handset

Removing

When removing the UIM, close the FOMA terminal and hold it

with both hands.



While sliding the UIM, pull it out slowly

Note

• Do not misplace the removed UIM.

Security Codes

You can set 2 security codes to the UIM: "PIN1 code" and

"PIN2 code".→P119

UIM Security Function

The FOMA terminal incorporates the UIM security function

(UIM operational restriction function) to protect your data

and ﬁles.

• When you download data or ﬁles from sites or acquire data

attached to mail with the UIM inserted into the FOMA terminal, the

UIM operational restriction function is automatically set to these

data or ﬁles.

• Data or ﬁles with the UIM operational restriction function set are

accessible only when the same UIM used when downloading data or

ﬁles is inserted.

• The following data/ﬁles are restricted:

- File attached to i-mode mail

- MessageR/F with ﬁle (melodies/images) attached

- Screen memo

- Images inserted in Deco-mail or signature

- i-motion

- i-αppli (including i-αppli Stand-by display)

- Image (including animation and Flash movie)

- Chaku-Uta

/Chaku-Uta Full

song

- Melody

- Kisekae Tool

- Mail template with motion-restricted data

- Music&Video Channel program

* "Chaku-Uta" is a registered trademark of Sony Music

Entertainment Inc.

Before Using the Handset

Continue on the next page

• Hereafter, the UIM that was inserted when you downloaded or

obtained data or ﬁles is referred to as "your UIM" and any other UIM

as "another UIM".

Replacing the UIM

Your UIM

Another UIM

If the UIM used for

obtaining data or mails

is inserted, you can

browse or play back UIM

restricted data.

If the UIM used for

obtaining data or mails is

not inserted, you cannot

browse or play. back UIM

restricted data.

Note

• When you set data/ﬁle restricted with this function to the

Stand-by display, etc., the setting will return to the default

if another UIM is inserted or if no UIM is inserted. When you

re-insert your UIM, the setting will revert to the original state

you set.

• Pre-installed i-αppli programs are not restricted. However, if you

delete i-αppli and download it, the newly-downloaded i-αppli will

be restricted.

• The following data/ﬁles are not restricted with this function:

- Data/ﬁles obtained via infrared communication, a microSD

card, or data communication

- Images captured/edited using this FOMA terminal

• Even if a UIM diﬀerent from the one used when data/ﬁles were

obtained is inserted, the data/ﬁles restricted with this function

can be deleted.

• Settings that are saved on the UIM are as follows:

- Phone number display - SMS Center settings

- PIN1 and PIN2 codes - Select language

- SMS Validity Period

• If the UIM is inserted into another i-Channel-compatible terminal,

the ticker will not appear. If you press

in Stand-by and

display the channel list, the latest information is downloaded

and the ticker appears.

UIM Types

Note that the speciﬁcations of the "UIM (blue)" diﬀer from

those of the "UIM (green/white)" as follows:

Function UIM

(blue) UIM

(green/white) Reference

Number of phone

number digits to be

saved to the UIM

Phonebook

Up to 20 digits Up to 26 digits P87

WORLD WING Not available Available P408

Service Numbers Not available Available P399

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

WORLD WING

WORLD WING is DOCOMO's FOMA international roaming

service that allows you to use the same mobile phone

number registered in Japan to make and receive calls

even overseas using the UIM (green/white) and supported

terminals.

• If you subscribed to the FOMA service after September 1,

2005, a separate subscription is not required. However,

if you declared that you did not require this service at the

FOMA service subscription or canceled this service, a

separate subscription is required.

• If you initially subscribed to the FOMA service before

August 31, 2005 and have not subscribed to "WORLD

WING", a separate subscription is required.

• This service is not available for some billing plans.

• If your UIM (green/white) is lost or stolen overseas,

contact DOCOMO immediately and temporarily

suspend your subscription. For contact information, see

General Inquiries at the back of this manual. Call and

communication charges after the FOMA terminal was lost

or stolen are still charged to you.

Attaching/Removing Battery

Pack

• Turn oﬀ the FOMA terminal and hold it in your hand with the terminal

closed.

Attaching



While pushing the

Back cover in the

direction of

, slide it

in the direction of

and hold it up in the

direction of



With "

" side up, align

the metal contacts of

the battery pack and

the FOMA terminal

in the direction of

, then insert the

battery pack in the

direction of

• When attaching the battery

pack, push it underneath the

tab and push it down.

Tabs

Before Using the Handset

Continue on the next page



With approx. 3mm

space kept to the

Back cover, align

it to the ditch of

the FOMA terminal,

and while pushing

it in the direction

, slide it in

the direction of

and insert it until it

clicks

Back cover

Approx. 3mm

Note

• Attaching the battery pack forcibly with the UIM not properly

inserted may damage the UIM.

• Attaching the battery pack forcibly may damage the FOMA

terminal.

Removing



While pushing the

Back cover in the

direction of

, slide it

in the direction of

and hold it up in the

direction of

and

remove



Hold the battery

pack with a ﬁnger

by the recess of

the FOMA terminal,

and while pushing

the battery pack

in the direction

of a, hold it up in

the direction of b

and remove in the

direction of c

Recess

Charging

Use the speciﬁed AC adapter (optional) or DC adapter

(optional) to charge the FOMA terminal. Use the exclusive

battery pack L05 for the FOMA terminal.

■ Battery pack life

• The battery pack is a consumable. The available usage time

decreases every time the battery pack is recharged.

• When the usable time after each recharging shortens by

approximately half compared to a new battery pack, it is

recommended that the battery pack be replaced with a new one

as soon as possible. The battery pack may swell as the battery

life is near its end depending on the battery pack condition, but

it is not a malfunction.

• If you use i-αppli or videophone, etc., or watch 1Seg for long

periods of time while the battery pack is being charged, the

battery life may be shortened.

For environmental protection, be sure to

bring the exhausted battery pack to NTT

DOCOMO, the sales agent, or recycle shop.

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

■ Charging

• For details, see the instruction manuals for the FOMA AC

Adapter 01/02 (optional), FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use

(optional), and FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 (optional).

• The FOMA AC Adapter 01 can be used only for 100V AC. The

FOMA AC Adapter 02 and the FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global

use support the voltage from 100V to 240V AC.

• The adapter plug shape is for 100V AC (for domestic use).

To use an AC adapter that supports from 100V to 240V AC

overseas, the compatible conversion plug adapter is required.

Do not charge the battery pack with a transformer designed for

overseas trips.

• To charge the battery pack with the AC or DC adapter, make

sure that the battery pack is inserted into the FOMA terminal.

• Plug or unplug the connector slowly and securely avoiding

excessive force.

• If you start charging the fully drained battery pack, the FOMA

terminal may not be turned on for a while.

• If you make a call or packet communication while charging, the

inside of the FOMA terminal may become hot and charging may

stop. In this case, end the functions in use and wait until the

FOMA terminal becomes cool down, and then try charging again.

■ Do not charge the battery pack for a long time (several

days) with the FOMA terminal power on.

• If the FOMA terminal is left with the power on for long periods

of time during charging, you may not be able to use the FOMA

terminal for long duration as expected and the low battery

alarm may sound, because the FOMA terminal receives the

power from the battery pack after charging is completed. In this

case, recharge the battery pack properly. Before recharging the

battery pack, disconnect the AC adapter or DC adapter from the

FOMA terminal and reconnect it.

■ Approximate battery pack usage time

The usage time may vary depending on the operating

environment and the battery pack deterioration.

Continuous

stand-by

time

FOMA/

3G 3G/GSM

setting:

Moving: Approx. 280 hours

3G/GSM

setting:

AUTO

Stationary: Approx. 320 hours

Moving: Approx. 210 hours

GSM 3G/GSM

setting:

AUTO

Stationary: Approx. 220 hours

Continuous

call time FOMA/3G Voice call: Approx. 220 minutes

Videophone call: Approx. 80 minutes

GSM Voice call: Approx. 180 minutes

1Seg watching time Approx. 140 minutes

• Continuous call time is approximate duration for calling with

normal radio wave reception level.

•

Continuous stand-by time is approximate usage time when

moving with normal radio wave reception level. Depending on

the battery level, set functions, operating environment such as

ambient temperature, or radio wave reception level (poor or weak

radio wave reception level), stand-by time may be reduced by

half. During i-mode communication, the call (communication)/

stand-by time becomes shorter. Even if you do not make calls or

i-mode communications, the call (communication)/stand-by time

shortens when you compose i-mode mail, start i-αppli or i-αppli

Stand-by display, perform data communications or Multiaccess,

use the camera, play back moving picture or music, or watch

1Seg, etc.

• Depending on network conditions at your location, usage time

may become shorter than the described values.

• Continuous stand-by time in a stationary is the average usage

time in stationary state with normal radio wave reception level

with the FOMA terminal closed.

• Continuous stand-by time in a moving state is the average

usage time in a state combining "stand still", "in motion", and

"out of service area" in an area with normal radio wave reception

level with the FOMA terminal closed.

• 1Seg watching time is approximate time when watching with

normal radio wave reception level and using the Flat-plug Stereo

Earphone Set P01 (optional).

Before Using the Handset

Continue on the next page

• The call/communication or stand-by time may be reduced to

about half, or 1Seg watching time may shorten depending on

the battery level, set functions, operating environment such as

ambient temperature, or radio wave reception level (poor or weak

radio wave reception level).

■ Estimated battery pack charging time

FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 Approx. 180 minutes

FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 Approx. 180 minutes

•

The estimated charging time is the duration of time to charge a fully

drained battery pack with the FOMA terminal turned oﬀ.

The charging time becomes longer with the FOMA terminal turned on.

Charging with AC Adapter and Desktop Holder

Insert the AC adapter connecter, with the inscribed arrow

side up, straight into the desktop holder.

Insert the power plug of the AC adapter into an outlet.

Align charger terminals of the desktop holder and FOMA

terminal (

), then insert in the direction of the allow

• The illumination lights up and charging starts. When charging

completes, the illumination turns oﬀ. (If unread mails or missed

calls exist, the illumination lights up according to "Lighting LED"

settings.)

After charging completes, grasp the head of the FOMA

terminal and lift it out while holding the desktop holder with

ﬁngers.

Power plug

Charger

terminal

Desktop

holder

100V AC

outlet

Release buttons

Illumination

Connector

Inscription

Charging only with AC Adapter

Open the external connector terminal cover (

) and ﬂip it

over (

). Then, insert the AC adapter connector, with the

inscribed arrow side up, straight into the FOMA terminal

external connector.

Insert the power plug of the AC adapter into an outlet.

• The illumination lights up and charging starts. When charging

completes, the illumination turns oﬀ. (If unread mails or missed

calls exist, the illumination lights up according to "Lighting LED"

settings.)

After charging completes, pull the AC adapter connector

straight out while pressing the release buttons.

Illumination

External

connector

terminal

cover Release buttons

Inscription Connector

• Make sure to insert/pull out the AC adapter connector straight

with the correct side up. Forcibly trying to remove the adapter may

cause damage.

DC adapter (optional)

The DC adapter supplies power to the FOMA terminal from

a cigarette lighter socket (12V/24V) of a car with the

battery pack inserted in the FOMA terminal.

For details, see the FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 instruction

manual.

Continued on next page

Before Using the Handset

Note

• When the power is turned on, you can set the FOMA terminal

to sound the charge start tone or charge complete tone. The

setting of "Popup tone" is applied.→P101

• You can set the FOMA terminal to charge with the Display

backlight on.→P110

• While charging, the battery level icon changes in the order of

→ → → in an animation display. After charging

completes, lights up.

• A fuse (2A) is a consumable item. Purchase a replacement fuse

from a car parts shop.

Battery level

Checking Battery Level

An icon indicating the battery level (appears at the top of the

screen).

: The battery is full.

: The battery is getting low.

: The battery is almost running out.

Charge the battery.

: The battery is almost running out. The

FOMA terminal will automatically turn oﬀ

in a moment. Charge the battery.

Note

• When an icon indicating battery level is or , camera

functions (including the bar code reader) and infrared

communication functions are unavailable.

• When the color of the icon indicating battery level is other

than and you activate 1Seg/MUSIC player, the notiﬁcation

indicating the low battery level appears (may not appear when

the battery level is ).

Checking Battery Level with Sound and

Display

The battery level can be checked with display and sound.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Battery level"

A conﬁrmation appears and a tone sounds

according to the battery level. The battery

level screen disappears in approximately

3 seconds.

Three beeps : The battery is full.

Two beeps : The battery is getting low.

One beep : The battery is almost running

out. Charge the battery.

Note

• When "Dial sound" is set to (Silent) or "Manner mode" is

activated, you will not hear the beep.

When the battery is running out

A message, "Low battery. Charge or change

battery" appears and the battery alert tone

sounds. (Depending on the settings, the tone

may not sound.) at the top the screen

blinks. After a little while, the FOMA terminal

turns oﬀ automatically.

Before Using the Handset

Continue on the next page

Power ON/OFF

Turning Power ON/OFF

Turning Power ON



When the FOMA terminal is turned oﬀ,

(for 2+ seconds)

After the wake-up screen appears, the Stand-

by display appears.

Stand-by display

Note

• If the UIM is not inserted, the message, "Insert UIM" appears.

• When replacing the UIM, enter 4- to 8-digit Terminal security

code after turning the power on. When entered the correct

Terminal security code, the Stand-by display appears. If failed

to enter the code 5 times in a row, the power is turned oﬀ. (You

can turn the power on again.)

When "PIN1 code request" is set to "ON"

The PIN1 code entry screen appears. When

the PIN1 (P119) code is entered, the Wake-up

screen and then the Stand-by display appear.

You can make emergency calls (to 110, 119,

or 118) even while the PIN1 entry screen

appears.→P120

When "Lock all" is activated

The Terminal security code entry is required.

When "圏外" appears at the top of the screen

The FOMA terminal is out of service area or in a poor signal area.

Move to a location where the icon indicating the signal strength

appears. The signal strength is indicated in 4 levels as follows:

→ → →

Strong Weak

Viewing the Welcome mail

By default, " Welcome Mail " "Welcome ドコモ動画 " is saved.

Press

repeatedly to display the mail. Alternatively, perform

operations in "Displaying Received Mail" (P154) to display the

mail.

Turning Power OFF



When the FOMA terminal is turned on,

(for 2+ seconds) in Stand-by

The exit screen appears and the power is turned oﬀ.

Before Using the Handset

Select language

Changing Screen Display to

English or Korean

You can switch the display language on the FOMA terminal to

Japanese, English, or Korean.



▶ "設定(Settings)" ▶ "Select language" ▶

"日本語(Japanese)"/"English"/"ഡӵৰ(Korean)"

Note

• When the language is switched to English or Korean, "Select

language" is displayed as "マルチリンガル".

• The setting of this function is stored on the FOMA terminal

and UIM in use. If another UIM is inserted, the setting on the

inserted UIM takes priority. If the UIM with Korean language set

is inserted into the Korean-incompatible FOMA terminal, the

display language is set to Japanese or English.

Making Initial Settings

After the FOMA terminal is turned on, make initial settings

of "Set Date&Time", "Change security code", "KeyPad Sound

(Keypad tone)", and "Calibration".



Turn the power on ▶ "Yes"



Set the date&time (P53)



Set the Terminal Security code (P120)



Set the keypad tone (Select "ON" or "OFF")

• If "OFF" is selected, the keypad tone volume is set to

(Silent).→P101



Adjust the touch panel (P115)

• When initial settings complete, the software update

conﬁrmation may appear. Perform operations according to

on-screen instructions.

Note

• While All lock, etc. is activated, the initial settings function is

not activated.

• To cancel the initial settings, press

. When the power

is turned on next time, the rest of the settings resumes.

Before Using the Handset

Continue on the next page

Set Date&Time

Setting Date and Time

You can set the FOMA terminal to update the time

automatically. Also, you can set the local time zone, daylight

saving, and date&time.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Date&Time" ▶ "Set

Date&Time"

Date&Time

settings screen



Perform the following operations

[Auto time adjust]

Set whether to adjust the time on the FOMA terminal based on the

time information from the network.

ON : Adjust the date and time automatically.

OFF : Does not adjust the date and time automatically.

[Local time zone]

Set the time zone for the date and time.

Press

[<Prev.] or

[Next>] to switch the list by page.

[Daylight saving]

Set the daylight saving time.

[Set date&time]

Set date and time manually.

• You can set the date between 1980/01/01 and 2099/12/31.

* Available when "Auto time adjust" is set to "OFF".

I

[Done]

Note

• Time or time diﬀerences can be adjusted when the power is

turned on.

• If time is not adjusted for a while after the power is turned on,

turn the power on again.

• Time may not be adjusted depending on the signal strength,

etc.

• When using the FOMA terminal overseas, the time or time zone

may not be adjusted depending on the network service to use.

Also, the time may not be properly displayed. Set the time of

the location where you stay with the World time.→P364

• An error of a few seconds may occur.

Before Using the Handset

Caller ID notiﬁcation

Notifying the Other Party of

Your Phone Number

You can set the FOMA terminal to show/hide your caller ID

on the network in advance.

• Your caller ID (phone number) is important information. Please take

care when sending your caller ID.

• Caller ID notiﬁcation cannot be set when "圏外" appears.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶ "Caller ID

notiﬁcation" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Activate/Deactivate]

Set to show/hide the caller ID.

[Check setting]

Check the current setting status.

Note

• Your caller ID is displayed only when the other party's phone

allows the display of caller ID.

• You can set the Caller ID notiﬁcation for each call.→P66

Own Number

Checking Your Own Phone

Number

You can check your phone number (own number) saved on

the UIM.

M

▶ "Own Number"

To display the saved detail information

Pressing

[Detail] and entering

the Terminal security code on the

Own number screen displays the Own

number detail screen. You can also

save information other than the own

number.→P361

• If a phone number other than your own

number, mail address, or URL is saved,

you can make a call, create i-mode mail,

or access a site by moving the cursor

and pressing

Own number

screen

Voice/Videophone Calls

Making Calls/Videophone Calls

Videophone Calls ････････････････････････････････････ 56

Making a Call/Videophone Call ･･････････････････････ 56

Making a Call Using Redial/Received Calls ･････････ 60

Making a Call Using Recent Calls ･･････Recent calls 64

Using Chaku-moji ･･･････････････････････ Chaku-moji 64

Setting Caller ID to Send/Not to Send for Each Call

････････････････････････････････････････････184/186

Sending Touch-tone Signals ･････････････････ Pause 67

Making International Calls ･･･････････ WORLD CALL 67

Setting Preﬁx to Be Added to a Phone Number

･･･････････････････････････････････････････ Preﬁx dial 70

Making a Call Specifying a Sub Address

････････････････････････････････ Sub address setting 71

Setting an Alarm until Connection is Reestablished

････････････････････････････････････ Reconnect alarm 71

Reducing Surrounding Noise to Make Voice Clear

･････････････････････････････････････ Noise reduction 72

Receiving Calls/Videophone Calls

Receiving a Call/Videophone Call ･･･････････････････ 72

Setting How to Answer Incoming Voice Calls

･･･････････････････････････････････････ Answer mode 74

Ending/Holding Call by Closing the FOMA Terminal

････････････････････････････････････････Close setting 74

Adjusting Earpiece Volume ･･･････ Receiver volume 74

When You Can/Could not Answer a

Voice/Videophone Call

Putting a Call on Hold when You Cannot Answer

Immediately ･････････････････････････････････ Holding 75

Setting Answer Holding Tone ･･････････On hold tone 75

Setting Holding Tone･･･････････････････Holding tone 75

Using Public Mode ･･････････････････････････････････ 76

Checking Missed Calls ･･････････････････ Missed call 77

Recording Voice Messages when You Cannot

Answer the Call ･･･････････････････ Record message 77

Recording a Message when You Cannot Answer

Incoming Call ･･････････････ Quick Record Message 79

Playing/Deleting Record Message

････････････････････････Play/Delete record message 79

Videophone Settings

Setting Image to Send ･･････････････････････････････ 80

Changing Videophone Settings ･････Videophone set 80

Setting Answer Method of Videophone Call during

i-mode ････････････････････････ V-phone while packet 81

Voice/Videophone Calls

Videophone Calls

The videophone call can be used with a mobile phone that

supports DOCOMO's videophone call.

• DOCOMO's videophone call complies with "ISO 3GPP

standardized

3G-324M

". DOCOMO's videophone calls cannot connect with

mobile phones that support a diﬀerent videophone call system.

*1 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project)

The regional standards organization for developing common

technical speciﬁcations for the third generation mobile

communication systems (IMT-2000).

*2 3Ｇ-324M

The international standard of 3rd Generation Mobile

Videophone.

• There are 2 diﬀerent videophone call communication rates, 64K

(64kbps) and 32K (32kbps), this FOMA terminal cannot use

videophone call at 32K.

• This FOMA terminal does not support remote monitoring.

• The battery pack life may shorten if you make a videophone call

for a long time while charging. The power may turn oﬀ during a

videophone call, if you make the call with the charging adapter

connected when the battery level is low.

Videophone Call Screen Components

Main window

The other party's image appears by

default.

Sub window

Your image appears by default.

Call duration

Displayed in the format of minutes:

seconds.

Settings icons

/ Zoom adjustment→P59

/ Display Hands-free ON/OFF

state→P57

/ Picture mode (Camera image/Substitute image)→P59

Making a Call/Videophone Call



Enter a phone number

• Up to 80 digits can be entered and

displayed.

• Enter a number from "0" to "99" to

view the Phonebook entry of the

corresponding memory number.→P97

• Start from the area code even for a

local call.

•

[Save]: Add a new or extra phone

number to the Phonebook.→P89 Phone number

entry screen

Voice/Videophone Calls

Continue on the next page



To make a voice call

[Call]

To make a videophone call

[V. phone]

A ringing tone sounds

from the earpiece, and the

"Calling..." dialing screen is

displayed until the other

party answers the call.

•

[Spk ON/Spk OFF]:

Switch Hands-free ON

and OFF.

• Pressing a dial key,

during a call

allows you to send touch-

tone signals. Voice call screen Videophone call

screen

During a video call

The following icons show the state of the settings on the

Voice call screen.

• / Display Hands-free ON/OFF State

• / Mute/Unmute→P59

• / Receiver volume→P74

During a videophone call

•

[Image/Camera]: Switch the image to send between the

substitute image and the camera image.



To terminate the call,

Note

• If you hear the voice guidance for the Caller ID request, make

the call again sending your caller ID.

• You cannot switch between a voice/videophone call during a

call using this FOMA terminal.

• Closing the FOMA terminal during a call terminates the call

when "Close setting" is set to "End the call", and holds the call

when set to "On Hold". However, if the Flat-plug Earphone/

Microphone with Switch (optional) is connected, closing the

FOMA terminal does not terminate the call or place the call on

hold.

• The low battery alert sounds from the earpiece if the battery

becomes low during a call. You can continue the call; however,

the call will be terminated momentarily and the power is

automatically turned oﬀ.

• This FOMA terminal does not support Hands-free devices via a

USB connection (such as In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01).

• A call cannot be connected if you make a videophone call to a

mobile phone that does not support videophone calls, or if the

other party's mobile phone is out of service area or turned oﬀ.

If you make a videophone call to a phone that does not support

videophone calls when you have set "Auto redial as voice"

to "ON", the call will be disconnected before the connection

is established, and the FOMA terminal automatically redials

the number as a voice call. However, if the other party uses

an ISDN 64K connection, or ISDN videophone that does not

support the 3G-324M standard (as of June, 2009), or you

dialed a wrong number, the above action may not be taken.

Note that communication charges may apply.

• If you make a videophone call to an emergency number such as

"110", "119", or "118", a voice call will be made automatically.

• Incoming i-mode mail or MessageR/F during a videophone call is

stored at the i-mode center. SMS can be received even during a

videophone call.

• Digital call charge applies for sending the substitute image.

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

Correcting an entered phone number

To delete an entered digit, use

to move the cursor to a digit

to delete, and press

Screen display during dialing

The other party's name is displayed if the other party's phone

number is saved in the Phonebook.

If a videophone call could not be made

The following messages appear if a videophone call could not

be made (depending on the other party's mobile phone model or

subscribed network services, the displayed messages may not

describe the actual situation).

Message Description

Check number,

then redial The phone number is not valid.

Busy The other party is on a call (this message

may appear when the other party's

mobile phone is performing packet

communication depending on the mobile

phone).

The other party is in packet

communication.

Out of service

area/power oﬀ The other party's mobile phone is either

out of service area or turned oﬀ.

Set Caller ID to ON The caller ID was not sent (when the call

is made to the number for visualnet, etc.).

Your call is being

forwarded The call is being forwarded.

Redial using voice

call The Call forwarding service is activated,

and the forwarding destination does not

support videophone calls.

Upper limit has

been exceeded.

Connection failed

Your usage fees have exceeded the limit

of your plan (Type limit or Family Wide

limit).

Message Description

Please make your

call from i-mode The videophone call was not dialed

from the oﬃcial i-mode site information

provider (when the call is made to V-live).

Failed to connect Set "Caller ID notiﬁcation" to "Notify" and

redial.

• This message may appear for other

reasons, as well.

Phone Number Entry Screen Sub Menu



Phone number entry screen (P56) ▶

[Menu]

▶ Perform the following operations

[Add to phonebook]

Add an entry to the Phonebook.→P88

[Video phone call]

Make a videophone call.

[Caller ID]

Set whether to notify your caller ID when you make a call.→P66

[Int. call]

After selecting the country code to make a call, "009130010"

(WORLD CALL) and the country code are inserted at the beginning of

the phone number.→P67

[Select preﬁx]

Add preﬁx number at the beginning of the entered phone number.

This can be added only once.→P68

[Multi number]

If you subscribe to Multi Number, select the number to use when

making a call.→P401

Voice/Videophone Calls

Continue on the next page

[Chaku-moji]

Send Chaku-moji.→P65

Voice Call Screen Sub Menu



Voice call screen (P57) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[New call]

Place the active call on hold, and dial another party.

[End active call]

Terminate the call.

[Hold]

Place the active call on hold. To cancel, press

[Active].

[Mute/Unmute]

Enable/Disable to mute your voice on the other party's mobile phone.

[Send my info]

Create i-mode mail with your number (Own number) entered in the

message text.→P138

[Search phonebook]

Search for a Phonebook entry.→P92

*1 Not available if you do not subscribe to Call waiting service.

*2 Not available when the Phonebook is accessed. To use this

function, terminate applicable functions from the Task list

screen.→P350

Videophone Call Screen Sub Menu



Videophone call screen (P57) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[End call]

Terminate the call.

[Hold]

Place the active call on hold. To cancel, press

[Active].

If you press

[Image] to cancel the hold, the substitute image is

sent to the other party.

[Substitute image/Camera image]

Switch the image to send between the substitute image and the

camera image.

[Camera settings]

Conﬁgure the camera for videophone calls. Use

to select an icon,

and use

to select an item. After setting, press

[Close].

Zoom : Zoom the camera image (×1/×2).

Brightness : Adjust the brightness (High/Medium/Low) of the

camera image.

Night mode : Set this when using the camera in a dark place, etc.

[Videophone set]

Set the display and lighting for videophone calls. After setting, press

to return to the Videophone call screen.

Display setting

Other - Me : Display the other party's image on the main window

and your image on the sub window.

Me - Other : Display your image on the main window and the other

party's image on the sub window.

Other only : Display only the other party's image.

Me only : Display only your image.

Light

Always ON : Always light up during a call.

Terminal setting : Use "Backlight" settings.→P110

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

[Screen size]

Set the display size of the main window.

[Visual preference]

Set quality of the image sent to the other party.

Prefer img qual : The image with maximized image quality is

sent. This option is eﬀective when there is little

motion.

Normal : Set standard quality and motion for the sent

image.

Prefer motion spd : Set priority to motion for the sent image.

This option is eﬀective when there is a lot of

motions.

[Switch camera]

Switch the camera to send the image to the other party between the

Inner camera and the Outer camera.

[Search phonebook]

Search for a Phonebook entry.→P92

[Own number]

Display your phone number (Own number).

* Not available when the Phonebook is accessed. To use this

function, terminate applicable functions from the Task list

screen.→P350

Making a Call Using Redial/

Received Calls

Redial and the Received call logs can be used to make calls.

Also, the Recent calls (both sent and received) can be used

to make calls.

Redial calls

Calling the Same Party Again

Redial maintains a list of the last 30 voice or videophone

calls. The phone number and the calling date and time are

recorded in the call logs.

• If more than 30 calls are made, the log is deleted from the oldest.

• If you call the same phone number repeatedly, only the latest one

is recorded.



Stand-by display ▶

Name saved in the Phonebook

If the caller's name is not saved

in the Phonebook, the phone

number is displayed.

Outgoing phone call type

Make a voice call

Make a videophone call

Call date and time

Dialing an international call

Make a call overseas from

Japan Redial list screen

Make a call from overseas during international roaming

Make an international call from overseas during

international roaming

Voice/Videophone Calls

Continue on the next page



Move the cursor to the number to redial ▶

[Detail]

Outgoing phone call type

The name saved in the Phonebook

If the number is not saved in the

Phonebook, "Unregistered" is

displayed.

The other party's phone number

"Caller ID" setting when dialing

Appear when you make a call with

the caller ID (P58) set to "Notify".

Multi Number used for dialing

Display the Multi Number used

to dial by the registered name in

"Number setting" (P401).

* Appear when you subscribe to the

Multi Number service.

Redial detail

screen

Call date and time

Call duration

Outgoing international call

Make a call overseas from Japan

Make a call from overseas during international roaming

Make an international call from overseas during

international roaming



To make a voice call

[Call]

To make a videophone call

[V. phone]

Note

• You can make a voice call by selecting an entry on the Redial

list screen and pressing

, and make a videophone call by

pressing

[V. phone].

•

If the same phone number is saved repeatedly in the Phonebook,

the name found ﬁrst in the Reading search is displayed.

• A call dialed with "184" or "186" is recorded as a separate

Redial entry.

• Press

[Mail] on the Redial list screen/Redial detail screen to

create i-mode mail to the phone number on the selected Redial

entry.

Redial List Screen/Redial Detail Screen Sub Menu



Redial list screen (P60)/Redial detail screen

(P61) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Call function]

Voice call : Make a voice call.

Videophone call : Make a videophone call.

Customize call : Change the redial phone number and make a call.

[Mail]

Compose mail : Create i-mode mail addressed to the redial phone

number.→P138

• If the mail address is saved in the Phonebook, the

saved mail address is used as a recipient.

Compose SMS : Create SMS addressed to the redial phone number.

[Add to phonebook]

Add the redial phone number to the Phonebook.→P88

[Change list]

Switch logs to display.

Recent mails : Display the Recent mail list screen.→P166

Recent calls : Display the Recent call list screen.→P64

Received mail : Display the Received mail list screen.→P166

Received calls : Display the Received call list screen.→P62

Sent mail : Display the Sent mail list screen.→P166

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

[Delete]

Delete the selected redial log.

• Multiple redial logs can be deleted on the list screen.

Delete one* : Delete the selected redial log.

Selected* : Select and delete multiple logs.

▶ Mark logs to delete ▶

[Delete]

• Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Delete all* : Delete all redial logs.

* Not displayed on the detail screen.

Received calls

Making a Call Using Received Calls

The Received call logs maintains a list of the last 30

incoming calls and videophone calls. Phone numbers and

received dates/times are stored in a call log.

• If more than 30 calls are received, the most recent 30 calls are

retained.



Stand-by display ▶

Received calls

list screen

The party's name saved in the Phonebook

If the caller's name is not saved, the phone number is

displayed. If the caller did not send the caller ID, the reason

for no caller ID is displayed.

Incoming phone call type

/ Answered/Missed voice call (including rejected calls)

/ Answered/Missed videophone call (including rejected

calls)

Received date and time

Incoming international call

Incoming international call from overseas

Incoming call during international roaming overseas

Incoming international call during international roaming

overseas

Received Chaku-moji



Move the cursor to a log entry ▶

[Detail]

Incoming phone call type

The name saved in the Phonebook

If the phone number is not in

the Phonebook, "Unregistered"

is displayed, and if the caller ID

was not received, "User unset" is

displayed.

The other party's phone number

Multi Number received

Display the received Multi Number

as the registered name in "Number

setting" (P401).

* Appear when you subscribe to the

Multi Number service.

Received calls

detail screen

Received date and time

Call duration/Ring time (Missed call)

Received message with Chaku-moji

Incoming international call

Incoming international call from overseas

Incoming call during international roaming overseas

Incoming international call during international roaming

overseas

Voice/Videophone Calls

Continue on the next page



To make a voice call

[Call]

To make a videophone call

[V. phone]

Note

• You can make a voice call by selecting an entry on the

Received calls list screen and pressing

, and make a

videophone call by pressing

[V. phone].

• The reason for no caller ID is displayed in the log entry of the

call without caller ID.→P129

• If the same phone number is saved repeatedly in the

Phonebook, the name found ﬁrst in the Reading search is

displayed.

• A call log for the number that used dial-in service may be

displayed diﬀerently from the actual number.

• Press

[Mail] on the Received calls list/detail screen to

create i-mode mail to the phone number in the selected

received call log entry.

Received Calls List Screen/Received Calls Detail

Screen Sub Menu

Received calls list screen (P62)/Received

call detail screen (P62) ▶ M[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Call function]

Voice call : Make a voice call.

Videophone call : Make a videophone call.

Customize call : Change the phone number in Received calls and

make a call.

[Mail]

Compose mail : Create i-mode mail addressed to the phone number

in Received calls.→P138

• If the mail address is saved in Phonebook, the

saved mail address is used as a recipient.

Compose SMS : Crease SMS addressed to the phone number in

Received calls.

[Add to phonebook]

Add the phone number in Received calls to the Phonebook.→P88

[Change list]

Switch logs to display.

Recent mails : Display the Recent mail list screen.→P166

Recent calls : Display the Recent call list screen.→P64

Received mail : Display the Received mail list screen.→P166

Redial : Display the Redial list screen.→P60

Sent mail : Display the Sent mail list screen.→P166

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

[Delete]

Delete the selected received call log.

• Multiple redial logs can be deleted on the list screen.

Delete one* : Delete the selected received call log.

Selected* : Select and delete multiple logs.

▶ Mark logs to delete ▶

[Delete]

• Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Delete all* : Delete all received call logs.

* Not displayed on the detail screen.

Recent calls

Making a Call Using Recent Calls

Up to 60 incoming and outgoing calls can be recorded in

"Recent".

• If more than 60 calls are recorded, the most recent 60 calls are

retained.



Stand-by display ▶ Use

to display "Recent"

For further operations and the descriptions of screen components,

refer to Redial calls (P60) and Received calls (P62) sections.

Note

• The Recent call list screen/detail screen sub menu operations

are the same as the Redial and Received call list screen/detail

screen.→P61, P63

Chaku-moji

Using Chaku-moji

Send a message at the same time when making a voice or

videophone call to tell the other party the point to talk.

• Up to 10 full-pitch/half-pitch characters, pictographs and symbols

can be sent.

•

Charges apply on the sender side, and not apply on the receiver side.

• For details about Chaku-moji or its compatible model, visit the

DOCOMO's web site or see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [Network

Services]".

Chaku-moji

• While All lock is activated or Phonebook function is locked with

Data access lock, Chaku-moji is not displayed even if it is received.

After canceling the lock, the message is displayed on the Received

call detail screen.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Continue on the next page

Editing and Setting Message

Saving Message

• Up to 10 messages can be saved.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶

"Chaku-moji" ▶ "Create message"



Move the cursor to the number to save or edit

▶

[Edit] ▶ Enter or edit a message

• To delete the saved Chaku-moji, move the cursor to Chaku-moji

to delete ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Delete"/"Delete all" ▶ "Yes".

Setting whether to Display Received Chaku-moji

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "NW Services" ▶

"Chaku-moji" ▶ "Message display set" ▶

Select an item

Display all messages : Display Chaku-moji from all senders.

Only number in PB : Display Chaku-moji only from senders

saved in the Phonebook.

Calls with caller ID : Display Chaku-moji only from senders

with caller ID.

Hide all messages : Do not display Chaku-moji.

Dialing with Message



Enter a phone number ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Chaku-moji" ▶ Perform the following

operations

• You can send Chaku-moji to the party saved on the Phonebook

by entering a memory number with Quick dial (P97) ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Chaku-moji".

[Create message]

Enter a message.

[Select message]

Select from saved messages.

[Sent message]

Select from sent messages. Up to latest 10 messages are saved.

A

[Call]

To make a videophone call

Press g[V. phone].

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

Note

• When the recipient received Chaku-moji, "Transmission

completed" appears and transmission charge applies.

• Under the following conditions on the receiver side,

"Transmission failed" appears and transmission charge does

not apply.

- Chaku-moji incompatible terminal

- Chaku-moji restricting to be sent in Message display setting

- Staying overseas

- While Public mode (Drive mode) is set

- When the answer time of Record message is set to 0 sec

- Out of service area or the power is turned oﬀ

* The sent result does not appear.

• Depending on the signal conditions, the sent result may not

appear even when Chaku-moji arrived at the other party's

terminal. In this case, transmission charges apply.

• Chaku-moji cannot be sent/received for overseas usage.

184/186

Setting Caller ID to Send/

Not to Send for Each Call

There are 2 ways to show/hide the caller ID for each call:

adding "184"/"186", and using the sub menu on the Phone

number entry screen.

Adding 184/186 to Send/Not to Send

Caller ID



Enter "184" (Do not notify)/"186" (Notify) ▶

Enter the phone number



To make a voice call

To make a videophone call

[V. phone]

Using Sub Menu to Send/Not to Send

Caller ID

Example: To use the Phone number entry screen sub menu



Enter the phone number ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Caller ID" ▶ "Not notify"/"Notify"/"Cancel"



To make a voice call

[Call]

To make a videophone call

[V. phone]

Note

• You can set to show/hide the caller ID to the network in

advance.→P54

Voice/Videophone Calls

Continue on the next page

Pause

Sending Touch-tone Signals

Enter "P" and a number after the phone number and make a

voice call to send the number after "P" as touch tone signal

(DTMF). You can use this for services such as online ticket

reservation or bank balance inquiry.

• The signal may not be received depending on the device on the

receiving side.



Enter the phone number ▶ Press

3 times

and enter "P" ▶ Enter the number to send ▶

After the call is connected, the number after "P" is displayed and

press

to send the displayed number.

WORLD CALL

Making International Calls

WORLD CALL is an international call service available on

DOCOMO mobile phones.

If you subscribe to FOMA service, also subscribe "WORLD

CALL" together. (However a customer who subscribe to the

service without "WORLD CALL" is the exception.)

• This service is available in approximately 240 countries and regions

around the world.

• Charges for "WORLD CALL" are added to the monthly FOMA service

call charges.

• No initial fee nor ﬁxed monthly charges apply.

• This service is not available with some billing plans.

• Even if the caller ID notiﬁcation is set, the caller ID may not be

notiﬁed or phone number is not displayed correctly, depending on

the telecommunication carrier. In this case, you cannot make a call

from the Received calls screen.

• For details on WORLD CALL, contact "General Inquiries" at the back

of this manual.

• When using international carriers other than DOCOMO, please

contact the carrier directly.

You can make an "International videophone call" to parties who

use a videophone call-compatible terminal of an international

carrier that supports FOMA's videophone call by pressing

[Menu] ▶ "Video phone call" after the following dialing

procedures.

• For information on the countries where connection can be made

and telecommunication carriers, visit the DOCOMO International

Services website.

• The other party's image displayed on the FOMA terminal may

blur, or the call may not be connected depending on the other

party's terminal.

Making an International Call by Entering

the Phone Number

Enter a phone number in the following order.



Enter "010 - Country code - Area code (City

code) - Other party's phone number"

• If the Area code (City code) starts with "0", remove "0". (In a few

countries/regions such as Italy, "0" must not be removed).

• Alternatively, enter 009130 - 010 - Country code - Area code

(City code) - Other party's phone number.

A

To make an international videophone call

Press

[V. phone].

Voice/Videophone Calls

Making an International Call Using "+"

Entering "+" at the beginning of a phone number replaces "+"

with an international access code automatically.

• The WORLD CALL (009130010) is set to be added automatically

by default.→P69



Press

(for 1+ seconds) to enter "+" ▶

Enter "Country code - Area code (City code)

- Phone Number"

• You can also press

twice to input "+".

• If the Area code (City code) starts with "0", remove "0". (In a few

countries/regions such as Italy, "0" must not be removed).

A

Dial : Make an international call

after converting "+" into an

international access code.

Original number : Make an international call

to the number entered on

the terminal.

Cancel : Cancel dialing.

Dialed call

conﬁrmation

screen

To make an international videophone call

Press

[V. phone].



Select a dialing method

Note

• This option is available only inside the FOMA network service

area.

• If the phone number starts with "+81", "+" will not be converted

into an international access code.

Making an International Call Adding

International Access Code

You can select an international access code from the sub

menu and add it to the entered phone number.



Enter "Country code - Area code (City code) -

Other party's phone number"

• If the Area code (City code) starts with "0", remove "0". (In a few

countries/regions such as Italy, "0" must not be removed.)

M

[Menu] ▶ "Select preﬁx" ▶ Select an

international access code

The selected international access code is inserted at the

beginning of the entered phone number.

A

To make an international videophone call

Press

[V. phone].

Note

• By default, WORLD CALL (009130010) is registered to

"Preﬁx 1".→P70

Voice/Videophone Calls

Continue on the next page

Making an International Call Easily

The International dial settings can be changed.

• Even if the caller ID notiﬁcation is set, the caller ID may not be

notiﬁed or phone number is not displayed correctly, depending on

the telecommunication carrier. In this case, you cannot make a call

using the Received calls.

Setting to Add the International Access Code

Automatically <Auto assist>

You can set whether to add an international access code

automatically instead of "+" when you make a call by entering

"+" at the beginning of the phone number.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International dial" ▶

"Auto assist" ▶ "Auto"/"OFF"

Auto : Convert "+" automatically to the number speciﬁed in

IDD preﬁx.

OFF : "+" is not converted.

Setting International Access Codes <IDD preﬁx>

When "Auto assist" is set to "Auto", specify the international

access code to be added automatically. Save 1 country code

required when you make an international call.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International dial" ▶ "IDD

preﬁx" ▶ Perform the following operations

[IDD preﬁx name]

Enter IDD preﬁx name of International call used for Auto assist.

[IDD preﬁx code]

Enter IDD preﬁx code of International call used for Auto assist.

Setting to Add Assist of Country Code Automatically

Set whether to automatically replace leading "0", if entered,

of a phone number with "+ Country code" during international

roaming. Also, you can specify the Country code to be added

automatically.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International dial" ▶

"Auto Int'l dial" ▶ Perform the following

operations

Auto international

dial screen

[Auto Int'l dial]

Set whether to add a Country code automatically.

[Country code]

Set a Country code to add.

Continued on next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

Note

• Country code is not added automatically in the following cases.

- When entered "+" at the beginning of the phone number

- When selecting a phone number from a message body or site,

etc. and dialing

- When dialing from i-αppli

Registering a Country Code <Country code list>

Up to 50 Country codes required to make an international

call can be saved.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International dial" ▶

"Country code list"

Country code list

screen



Select unregistered item ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Country name]

Save a name of the Country code. Up to 7 full-pitch or 14 half-pitch

characters can be entered.

[Country code]

Save up to 5 digits.

I

[Done]

• The newly saved Country code is displayed ﬁrst, and the

already saved codes are displayed after the second entry.

Editing Country code

Select the Country code to edit on the Country code list screen

▶ "Edit" ▶

[Done].

Deleting Country code

Select the Country code to delete on the Country code list

screen ▶ "Delete" ▶ "Yes".

Note

• You can also edit the pre-installed Country codes.

• When "Auto Int'l dial" is set in "Auto Int'l dial" (P69), you cannot

delete the Country code speciﬁed in "Country code".

Preﬁx dial

Setting Preﬁx to Be Added to a

Phone Number

Up to 3 numbers (preﬁxes) to be added to the beginning

of the phone number such as an international access code,

"184", or "186" can be saved.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Preﬁx dial"



Select a Preﬁx entry ﬁeld ▶ Enter the number

▶

[Set]

• Up to 10 digits can be entered as a preﬁx.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Continue on the next page

Note

• Do not include pauses, etc. to the preﬁx. If they are present, the

call cannot be connected with preﬁx.

Sub address setting

Making a Call Specifying a Sub

Address

You can set whether digits after "

" is identiﬁed as a sub

address when entering a phone number with "

". A sub

address is used to access a speciﬁc device connected to an

ISDN line or to select contents on "V-live".

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

Move the cursor to "Sub address setting" ▶

[ON/OFF]

ON : Identify the address after "

" as a sub address.

OFF : The address after "

" is not identiﬁed as a sub address.

Note

• "

" is not identiﬁed as a delimiter of a sub address if:

- "

" is entered at the beginning of the phone number.

- A speciﬁc number such as "184" or "186" is entered at the

beginning of the phone number and "

" is entered right after it.

Reconnect alarm

Setting an Alarm until

Connection is Reestablished

You can set an alarm that keeps sounding until a voice

or videophone call is reconnected when the call was

disconnected due to weak signals.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶ "Call

feature" ▶ "Reconnect alarm" ▶ Select an

Alarm

Alarm OFF : Mute an alarm.

Low alarm : Set to low alarm.

High alarm : Set to high alarm.

Note

• Available duration for reconnection varies depending on the

status of usage and signal.

• If the signal suddenly worsens, the call may be disconnected

without the alarm sounding.

• The call charge applies during the reconnection attempt.

• While the call is disconnected, the other party hears nothing.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Noise reduction

Reducing Surrounding Noise to

Make Voice Clear

Noise reduction suppresses background noises. The other

party can hear your voice clearer even in a noisy place.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶ "Call

feature" ▶ Move the cursor to "Noise reduction"

▶

[ON/OFF]

ON : Activate Noise reduction.

OFF : Deactivate Noise reduction.

Receiving a Call/Videophone Call



An incoming call arrives

The ring tone sounds.

•

: Place the call on

hold.→P75

During a videophone

call

•

[Image]: Answer

the call using the

substitute image.

Videophone call

incoming call

screen

Voice call

incoming call

screen

A

Answer the call.

•

[Spk ON/Spk OFF]: Switch Hands-free ON and OFF.

• Press a dial key,

, or

during a call to send touch-tone

signals.

During a videophone call

•

[Image/Camera]: Switch the image to send between the

alternate image and the camera image.



To terminate the call,

When the caller sent the caller ID

If the caller is registered in the Phonebook, the phone number and

registered name are displayed.

When the caller did not send the caller ID

The reason for no caller ID is displayed instead of a phone

number.→P129

Note

• The incoming call actions such as a ring tone or vibration vary

depending on the settings or the saved information in the

Phonebook.→P84, P100, P102

• When "Manner mode" is activated, the ring tone does not sound.

However, if "Original manner" is activated, incoming call is

notiﬁed according to the settings.→P105

• Closing the FOMA terminal during a call terminates the call

when "Close setting" is set to "End the call", and holds the call

when it is set to "On hold". However, if the Flat-plug Earphone/

Microphone with Switch (optional) is connected, closing the

FOMA terminal does not terminate the call or place the call on

hold.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Continue on the next page

• If you subscribe to the Voice mail, Call waiting or Call forwarding

service, and set "Arrival call act" to "Answer" and "Set in-call

arrival act" to "Activate", in-call arrival tone sounds when a call

arrives during another call. If the tone sounds during a call, the

network services are available.→P400

However, the tone does not sound while a call is placed on

response hold, or a message is being recorded (P78) because

calls cannot arrive under these situations.

• When the Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, an incoming

call is not indicated (the ring tone does not sound, either).

Also, even if a call arrives when the display is turned oﬀ, the

display backlight will not be turned on.

• If you subscribe to Multi Number, the name registered in

"Number setting" (P401) appears according to the number

received.

• You can enable "Set mute ring(sec.)" to delay the incoming call

actions for a call made from the other party not saved in the

Phonebook or without the caller ID.→P130

• Use the following functions to reject incoming calls from a

caller not saved in the Phonebook or from a speciﬁc caller.

- Reject unknown→P130

- Reject on List→P127

• You cannot switch between a voice/videophone call during a

call using this FOMA terminal.

• The low battery alert sounds from the earpiece if the battery

becomes low during a call. You can continue the call; however,

the call will be terminated momentarily and the power is

automatically turned oﬀ.

• This FOMA terminal does not support Hands-free devices via a

USB connection (such as In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01).

• When "Answer mode" is set to "Open ﬂip", you can answer a call

by opening the FOMA terminal. If set to "Any key answer", you

can answer a call by pressing a dial key,

, or

.→P74

• When the Voice mail service is activated with a videophone call,

an SMS notiﬁes you of a new record message.

• Even if the Call forwarding service is activated, an incoming

videophone call is not forwarded if the forwarding destination

is not a videophone device supporting 3G-324M. Check the

capabilities of the forwarding destination device before setting

Call forwarding.

• Incoming i-mode mail or MessageR/F during a videophone call is

stored at the i-mode center. SMS can be received even during a

videophone call.

• You cannot receive videophone calls of the communication

speed of 32K (32kbps).

Incoming Call Screen Sub Menu

M

[Menu] on the Incoming call screen (P72) ▶

Perform the following operations

[Voice mail]

Connect the incoming call to the Voice mail service center.

[Call rejection]

Reject an incoming call and hang up.

[Call forwarding]

Forward an incoming call to the speciﬁed number.

[Silent]

Stop the ring tone or vibration.

Press

to answer the call.

*1 Not available if you do not subscribe to the Voice mail service.

*2 Not available if you do not subscribe to the Call forwarding

service or you have not speciﬁed a forwarding number.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Answer mode

Setting How to Answer Incoming

Voice Calls

You can set to answer an incoming call by opening the FOMA

terminal (Open ﬂip) or pressing a dial key (Any key answer)

other than

[Answer].

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ "Answer mode" ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Open ﬂip]

Answer a call by opening the FOMA terminal.

[Any key answer]

Answer a call by pressing a dial key,

, or

in addition to

[Answer].

[Send key only]

Answer a call by pressing

[Answer].

Close setting

Ending/Holding Call by Closing

the FOMA Terminal

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶ "Call

feature" ▶ "Close setting" ▶ Select a condition

when the terminal is closed

End the call : Terminate the call.

On hold : Place the active call on hold.

Mute :

Continue the call. The other party cannot hear

your voice.

Receiver volume

Adjusting Earpiece Volume

The receiver volume can be adjusted in 7 levels from 1 to 7.



Voice/Videophone call screen (P57) ▶

•

: Increase the volume.

•

: Decrease the volume.

Note

• The adjusted receiver volume will be retained even after the call.

• "Receiver volume" in "Volume" (P102) is also changed.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Continue on the next page

Holding

Putting a Call on Hold when You

Cannot Answer Immediately



Incoming call screen (P72) ▶

The tone set in "On hold

tone" (P75) is played. The

image set in "Response

hold image" (P80) appears

for videophone calls.

Videophone call

response hold

screen

Voice call

response hold

screen



When you can resume the call,

• You can also cancel the hold on a videophone call by pressing

[Answer]. If you press

[Image] to cancel the hold, the

alternate image will be sent to the other party.

To terminate a voice call/videophone call

Press

Note

• The other party is charged during a hold.

• If you subscribe to the Voice mail service/Call forwarding

service, you can connect the incoming call to the Voice mail

service center/forward the incoming call to the speciﬁed phone

number.→P392, P396

On hold tone

Setting Answer Holding Tone

You can select one of the 3 answer holding tones (guidance)

to play to the caller when you place the incoming call on hold.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ "On hold tone" ▶

"Hold tone 1"/"Hold tone 2"/"Hold tone 3"

•

[Play]: Play back the hold tone.

Holding tone

Setting Holding Tone

You can select one of the 3 holding tones to play to the caller

when you place the call on hold.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Call feature" ▶ "Holding tone" ▶

"Hold tone 1"/"Hold tone 2"/"Hold tone 3"

•

[Play]: Play the hold tone.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Using Public Mode

Public mode is an automatic response service to assist in

observing manners in public locations.

• Public mode includes the following 2 types.

- Drive mode

- Power Oﬀ

• Voice mail service (*1), Call forwarding service (*1), and Caller ID

request service (*2) take priority over Public mode.

*1 For voice calls with the ring time set to other than "0 Sec." the

service is activated after the guidance for Public mode.

*2 If the other party sends the caller ID, Public mode is activated.

• Public mode is not activated for calls you reject using Nuisance call

blocking service.

Public mode (Drive mode)

Using Public Mode (Drive Mode)

The voice guidance is played to the caller indicating that

you cannot answer the call as you are driving or at a place

where you cannot talk (such as on a train, bus, or in a movie

theater), and the call is disconnected.

• You can set or cancel Public mode (Drive mode) only in Stand-by

(even when "圏外" is displayed).

• This option is not available during data communication.

*

(for 1+ seconds)

When a call arrives, the voice guidance is played in Japanese

saying that "The person you are calling is currently driving or in

the area where mobile phones should not be used. Please call

again later".

When activating Public mode (Drive mode)

When a call arrives to your FOMA terminal, the ring tone does

not sound. appears on the Stand-by display, and the call is

recorded in the Received call log.

The voice guidance indicating that you are driving or you are at

a location where you cannot use mobile phones is played to the

caller, and the call is disconnected.

Deactivating Public mode (Drive mode)

Press

(for 1+ seconds) in Stand-by.

Note

• appears at the top of the screen when Public mode (Drive

mode) is activated.

• Even when Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, you can make

calls as usual.

• If Manner mode is activated concurrently, Public mode (Drive

mode) settings take precedence.

• Tones other than from operations (ring tones or alarms, etc.) do

not sound when Public mode (Drive mode) is activated.

• If mail arrives when Public mode (Drive mode) is activated,

incoming mail actions such as sounding the ring tone, or

vibrating the FOMA terminal will not take place.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Continue on the next page

Public mode (Power OFF)

Using Public Mode (Power OFF)

When a call arrives while the power is turned oﬀ, the voice

guidance is played to the caller indicating that you are at a

place where mobile phones must be turned oﬀ (such as in

hospitals, in aircraft, or near priority seats on a train) and

cannot answer the call, and the call is disconnected.



Enter "

25251" ▶

Public mode (Power OFF) is activated (there is no change for the

Stand-by display).

After Public mode (Power OFF) is activated, when a call arrives

while the power is turned oﬀ, the voice guidance is played in

Japanese saying that "The person you are calling is currently

in the area where mobile phone use is prohibited and cannot

answer the call. Please call again later".

When activating Public mode (Power OFF)

Public mode (Power OFF) is activated until it is deactivated by dialing

":25250". Turning the power on does not deactivate the mode.

Public mode (Power OFF) voice guidance is played even when

you are out of service area or in a place with weak signals. The

voice guidance indicating that you are at a location where you

must turn the terminal oﬀ is played to the caller, and the call is

disconnected.

Deactivating Public mode (Power OFF)

Enter "

25250" and press

Checking the status of Public mode (Power OFF)

Enter "

25259" and press

Missed call

Checking Missed Calls

If you could not answer a call, the Missed call notiﬁcation

screen appears on the Stand-by display. The Received calls

list screen can be accessed from the icon to check the caller.



An incoming call terminates

The Missed call icon appears on the Stand-by

display. The number of the icon indicates

number of missed calls.

Missed call icon

(The number

indicates the

number of calls)

C

▶ Use

to select

The Received calls list screen (P62) appears.

Note

• After displaying the Received calls list screen, disappears.

You can also select and press

for 1+ seconds to

clear the icon.

Record message

Recording Voice Messages when

You Cannot Answer the Call

When Record message is activated and if you cannot answer

a voice call, the voice guidance is played and the caller's

message is recorded.

• Up to 5 messages and approximately 15 seconds per message

can be recorded.

• Record message does not start when a videophone call arrives. The

FOMA terminal answers the call in the normal way.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Setting Record Message

M

▶ "Media" ▶ "Record message" ▶

"Record msg. setting" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Activate record msg.]

When activate Record message, set to "ON".

[To answer]

Enter the time after a call arrives and before Record message starts

between 0 and 120 seconds.

[Answer message]

Select an answer message.

•

[Play]: Check the answer message.

* Available when "Activate record msg." is set to "ON".

I

[Done]

Note

• appears at the top of the screen when the Record message

is activated.

• If the set response time is longer than the ring time set for the

Voice mail/Call forwarding services, a network service takes

precedence.

•

If the response time is set shorter than the time set in "Set mute

ring(sec.)" (P130), Record message starts without ringing.

When Record Message is Activated

When a voice call arrives, the caller's voice is recorded.

Recording a

message Stand-by display

appears

The set time

has elapsed

Recorded

A new Record message

icon appears

(The number indicates

the number of calls)

A call arriving Playing a

response message

■ To talk with the caller while the response message is

played or a message is being recorded

Press

[Active].

■ To play a recorded message

In Stand-by, press

▶ use

to select or press

for 1+ seconds to display the Record message list screen

(P79).

• Press

[Play] to play a recorded message.

• will disappear after the recorded message is deleted.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Continue on the next page

Note

• "Record message" is disabled when "圏外" is displayed, the

power is turned oﬀ or Public mode (Drive mode) is activated.

• If a call arrives when the response message is being played or

when a message is being recorded in Record message, the call

is rejected.

Quick Record Message

Recording a Message when You

Cannot Answer Incoming Call

Even when Record message is disabled, you can record the

caller's message with easy operation.



Incoming call screen (P72) ▶

(for 1+seconds)

Caller's voice will be recorded after streaming a guidance.

Note

• If 5 messages are already recorded, Record message will not

start and the caller's message cannot be recorded.

Play/Delete record message

Playing/Deleting Record

Message

M

▶ "Media" ▶ "Record message" ▶

"Record msg. list"

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected recorded

message.

To delete all recorded messages

On the Record message list screen,

press

[Menu] ▶ "Delete all".

Record msg. list

screen



Move the cursor to the recorded message ▶

[Play]

The recorded message is played.

•

[Stop]: Stop playing the message.

•

: Return to the Record message list screen.

• Use

to adjust the volume.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Setting Image to Send

Substitute image

Setting Substitute Image

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Videophone" ▶ "Substitute image" ▶ "Default"/

"Select image"

• When "Select image" is selected, select from the images saved

in "My picture" of "Data Box".→P296

Response hold image

Setting Response Hold Image

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Videophone" ▶ "Response hold image" ▶

"Default"/"Select image"

• When "Select image" is selected, select from the images saved

in "My picture" of "Data Box".→P296

Holding image

Setting Holding Image

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Videophone" ▶ "Holding image" ▶ "Default"/

"Select image"

• When "Select image" is selected, select from the images saved

in "My picture" of "Data Box".→P296

Videophone set

Changing Videophone Settings

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Videophone" ▶ "Videophone set" ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Display setting]

Set images to be displayed on the main window and sub window for

videophone calls.

Other - Me : The other party's image is displayed on the main

window, and your image on the sub window.

Me - Other : Your image is displayed on the main window, and the

other party's image on the sub window.

Other only : Display only the other party's image.

Me only : Display only your image.

[Send camera image]

Set whether to send your image to the other party. When "OFF" is

set, the other party receives the substitute image.

[Screen size]

Set the display size of the main window.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Continue on the next page

[Visual preference]

Set quality of the image sent to the other party.

Prefer img qual : Send image with maximized image quality. This

option is eﬀective when there is little motion.

Normal : Set standard quality and motion for the sent

image.

Prefer motion spd : Set priority to motion for the sent image.

This option is eﬀective when there is a lot of

motions.

[Light]

Set light setting for the screen during a call.

Always ON : Always light up on during a call.

Terminal setting : Use "Backlight" settings.→P110

[Auto redial as voice]

Set whether to automatically redial with voice call if the mobile phone

of the other party does not support videophone call.

[Hand-free switch]

Set whether to use Hands-free during a videophone call.

[V-phone while packet]

Set the answer method when a videophone call arrives during i-mode

connection.→P81

V-phone while packet

Setting Answer Method of

Videophone Call during i-mode

When a videophone call arrives while connecting to i-mode

or sending/receiving mails, the setting of this function is

applied.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Videophone" ▶ "Videophone set" ▶

"V-phone while packet" ▶ Select an item

V-phone priority : The videophone incoming call

screen appears. When answering

the call, i-mode communication is

disconnected.

Packet download priority : Reject an incoming videophone call.

V-phone answerphone : Connect to the Voice mail service

automatically.

Call forwarding : Connect to the Call forwarding

service automatically.

Note

• If you do not subscribe to the Voice mail or Call forwarding

service, "Packet download priority" setting is applied even if

"V-phone answerphone" or "Call forwarding" is set.

Phonebook

Phonebook Available for the FOMA Terminal ･･･････ 84

Adding Entries to the FOMA Terminal Phonebook

･･･ 84

Adding Entries to UIM (FOMA Card) Phonebook ････ 87

Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received

Calls etc. ････････････････････････････････････････････ 88

Changing a Group Name ････････････････････････････ 89

Making a Call from Phonebook

･･･ Search phonebook 91

Editing Phonebook Entries ･･････････････････････････ 96

Deleting Phonebook Entries ････････････････････････ 96

Checking Phonebook Storage Status

････････････････････････････････････No. of phonebook 97

Setting Phonebook ･･････････････････････････････････ 97

Making a Call with a Few Key Operation

････････････････････････････････････････････Quick dial 97

Displaying Call/Mail History･････････････････････････ 98

Phonebook

Phonebook Available for the

FOMA Terminal

The FOMA terminal contains 2 types of Phonebooks: The

Phonebook saved on the FOMA terminal and the UIM

Phonebook saved on the UIM. The following items can be

saved/set for each Phonebook.

Item FOMA terminal

Phonebook UIM Phonebook

Number of entries Up to 1,000 entries

Up to 50 entries

Entry

details Name

(Reading) 1 entry 1 entry

Phone number 5 entries 1 entry

Mail Address 3 entries 1 entry

Group 31 groups 11 groups

Image 1 entry None

Other settings Secret code, Ring

tone, Mail tone, etc. None

* Depending on the saved details, 1,000 entries may not be saved.

Note

• If you insert your UIM into another FOMA terminal, you can use

your Phonebook data on the UIM.

Adding Entries to the FOMA

Terminal Phonebook

• Note that the service counter such as the docomo Shop may not

be able to copy Phonebook data from your existing FOMA terminal

to the new one, depending on the speciﬁcations.



Stand-by display ▶

(for 1+ seconds)

Add to phonebook

screen

(FOMA terminal)



Perform the following operations

[ (Save to)]

Select the save location. This section explains the case where

"Phone" is selected as the save location. When "UIM" is selected as

the save location, the Add to UIM Phonebook screen appears.→P87

[ (Memory No.)]

The smallest un-assigned number is allocated automatically. You can

also change it to your favorite number from 000 to 999 manually.

[ Name]

Enter up to 16 full-pitch or 32 half-pitch characters. Enter with

Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or

Katakana, etc.

Phonebook

Continue on the next page

[ Reading]

Enter or edit as required. Enter up to 32 half-pitch characters.

Enter with Katakana, alphanumeric characters, or symbols.

[ Phone number]

Enter up to 26 digits.

▶ Enter a phone number ▶ Select an icon

• On the Phone number entry screen, you can press

[Menu] to

select "Int. call", "Select preﬁx", or "Cancel". Press

[Cancel] to

cancel the entry.

[ Mail address]

Enter up to 50 half-pitch characters. Enter with alphanumeric

characters or symbols.

▶ Enter a mail address ▶ Select an icon

[ Secret code]

Set the secret code.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Select an icon for the phone

number/mail address ▶ Enter the secret code

• On the Secret code screen, press

[Release] to cancel the

setting.

[ (Select a group)]

Select one from "No group" or "グループ1 (Group 1)" to "グループ30

(Group 30)". Groups can be used for the Group search (P92), etc.

[ Image]

Set an image or i-motion to be displayed when making/receiving calls

or when checking a Phonebook entry.

My picture : Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data

Box".→P296

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in

"i-motion" of "Data Box".→P307

Take picture : Activate the camera, and set the captured still

image.→P222

Terminal setting

: Use "Call & Mail image" settings.→P109

[ Ringtone]

Select a ring tone for incoming voice/videophone call from the caller

saved in the Phonebook.

Music : Select a Chaku-Uta Full

song saved in "Music"

of "Data Box".→P270

Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song

as a Ring Tone" (P266).

Melody : Select a melody saved in "Melody" of "Data Box".

→P314

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in

"i-motion" of "Data Box".→P307

Terminal setting

: Use "Select ring tone" settings.→P100

[ Mail image]

Select an image or i-motion to be displayed when a mail arrives.

• Available items are the same as for " Image".

[ Mail ringtone]

Select a ring tone for incoming mail from the sender saved in the

Phonebook.

• Available items are the same as for " Ringtone".

[ URL]

Enter up to 256 half-pitch characters.

[ Zip code]

Enter up to 7 half-pitch characters.

[ Home address]

Enter up to 100 full-pitch or 200 half-pitch characters. Enter with

Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or

Katakana, etc.

[ Company name]

Enter up to 50 full-pitch or 100 half-pitch characters. Enter with

Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or

Katakana, etc.

Continued on next page

Phonebook

[ Job title]

Enter up to 50 full-pitch or 100 half-pitch characters. Enter with

Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or

Katakana, etc.

[ Co. zip code]

Enter up to 7 half-pitch characters.

[ Co. address]

Enter up to 100 full-pitch or 200 half-pitch characters. Enter with

Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or

Katakana, etc.

[ Memo]

Enter up to 100 full-pitch or 200 half-pitch characters. Enter with

Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or

Katakana, etc.

[ Birthday]

Enter birthday.

[ Substitute image]

Set the substitute image for a videophone call.

Data box : Select an image saved in "My picture" of

"Data Box".→P296

Terminal setting : Use "Substitute image" settings.→P80

[ Secret]

This option appears when "Secret mode" (P127) is set to "Secret

mode".

Select "ON" if you save the Phonebook entry to be created as secret

data.

[ (Select Live Character)]

Select a Live Character used in Live Character Park.→P86

*1 For details about the Secret code, see "Mobile Phone User's

Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

*2 If you change any one of " Image", " Ringtone", " Mail

image", or " Mail ringtone" of the Phonebook while a moving

picture/i-motion with video/sound is set for "Select ring tone"

(P100) and "Call & Mail image" (P109), the default sound or

image is set to "Image" or "Ringtone" that is not changed.

*3 If you set a moving picture/i-motion with video/sound either for

the image or ring tone, the same moving picture/i-motion is set

for the other item automatically.

I

[Done]

Changing Live Character of the entry saved on the

Phonebook

• To select a character type displayed in Live Character Park, set

in "Setting Live Character Park Theme"→P338

• Only touch operation is available.

* The screenshot is an example

when the character type is set to

"Animal".

Selected Live Character

Character type

Change a character type to set.

Live Character list

Scroll bar

Slide to scroll the Live Character list display.

Change color to the one displayed on the Live Character list

Restore the changed color of Live Character.

Change color

Change the color of the clothes (or hair) of the selected Live

Character in random order each time this item is touched.

Phonebook

Continue on the next page

Note

• If the mail address is saved to the Phonebook in the format of

"Phone number + secret code@docomo.ne.jp", you may not send

mail or reply to that contact. Change the mail address format

to "Phone number@docomo.ne.jp" ﬁrst, then register the Secret

code.

• When "Secret mode" (P127) is set to "Secret data only", the

Phonebook entry is saved as secret data.

• The secret entry is displayed only when "Secret mode" is set to

"Secret mode" or "Secret data only".

• Secret entries cannot be saved to the UIM Phonebook.

• The names saved in the secret entries are displayed in the

Redial log, history, or mail list/detail screen only when "Secret

mode" is set to "Secret mode" or "Secret data only". The phone

numbers and mail addresses are displayed when "Secret mode"

is set to "OFF".

• When "Secret mode" is set to "OFF" and you receive a call or

mail from the secret contact, the name or image saved to the

Phonebook is not displayed and the set ring tone does not

sound.

Adding Entries to UIM

(FOMA Card) Phonebook



Add to phonebook screen (P84) ▶

(Save to) ﬁeld ▶ "UIM"

Add to phonebook

screen (UIM)



Perform the following operations

[ (Save to)]

Select the save location. When "Phone" is selected as the save

location, the FOMA terminal Phonebook entry screen appears.→P87

[ Name]

Enter up to 10 full-pitch or 21 half-pitch characters. Enter with

Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or

Katakana, etc.

[ Reading]

Enter or edit as required. Enter up to 12 full-pitch or 25 half-pitch

characters. Enter with full-pitch Katakana, half-pitch alphanumeric

characters, or half-pitch symbols.

Continued on next page

Phonebook

[ Phone number]

For a green/white UIM, up to 26 digits can be entered. For a blue

UIM, up to 20 digits can be entered.

• On the Phone number entry screen, you can press

[Menu] to

select "Int. call", "Select preﬁx", or "Cancel". To cancel the entry,

press

[Cancel].

[ Mail address]

Enter up to 50 half-pitch characters. Enter with alphanumeric

characters or symbols.

[ (Select a group)]

Select one from "No group" or "グループ1 (Group 1)" to "グループ10

(Group 10)". Groups can be used for the Group search (P92).

I

[Done]

Adding Phonebook Entries from

Redial/Received Calls etc.

You can save entries to the Phonebook from the list or detail

screen of the call history, mail, or message that contains a

phone number or mail address records. You can also save a

currently entered/displayed phone number, etc. on the Phone

number entry screen or site, etc.



Display the screen containing items to save

To save phone numbers from the Redial list screen

(P60)/Redial detail screen (P61)/Received calls list

screen (P62)/Received calls detail screen (P62)

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Add to phonebook".

• To save phone numbers from the Redial list screen/

Received calls list screen, select the target number ﬁrst.

• If the phone number is already saved in the Phonebook, "Add

to phonebook" is not available.

To save phone numbers from the Phone number entry

screen

Press

[Save].

To save a sender or recipient mail address

On the Mail detail screen, press

[Menu] ▶ "Save" ▶

"Address".

• If there are several mail addresses, select the one to save

ﬁrst.

To save addresses/phone numbers included in the

body text in a mail

Move the cursor to the address/phone number to save

to the Phonebook ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Save" ▶ "No./addr.

in body".

Phonebook

Continue on the next page

To save addresses/phone numbers displayed on a

site/Screen memo

Move the cursor to the address/phone number to save

to the Phonebook ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Add to Phonebook"

▶ "Yes".



Perform the following operations

[New registration]

Add a new entry to the Phonebook. Go to Step 3.

• The Add to phonebook screen appears with the new entry entered.

[Add registration]

Save additional items to the saved entry. Press

[Srch by]

on the

Phonebook entry screen to change the Phonebook search mode.→P92

▶ Select a Phonebook entry to which the item is to be added

• The Add to phonebook screen appears with the item added.

• If you add an item to the UIM Phonebook, the Add to phonebook

screen appears with the items overwritten when the above step is

performed.



Modify/save the Phonebook entry ▶

[Done]

• For saving procedure, refer to Step 2 in "Adding Entries to the

FOMA Terminal Phonebook" (P84).

• When saving additional data to an entry, the conﬁrmation

whether to overwrite appears. Select "Yes" to overwrite.

Note

•

The data can also be saved to the Phonebook from the Scanned

data screen with the bar code reader or Live Character Park

screen.→P235, P337

• If you attempt to save characters longer than the maximum

number of characters allowed, a warning screen notifying of the

problem appears, then, the truncated string will be displayed on

the Add to phonebook screen.

Changing a Group Name

You can group the entries on the FOMA terminal Phonebook

and the UIM Phonebook. Up to 31 groups can be saved on

the FOMA terminal Phonebook, and up to 11 groups can be

saved on the UIM Phonebook (including "No group").

• "No group" cannot be edited.

• Only a name can be edited on the UIM Phonebook.

M

▶ "Phonebook" ▶ "Group settings"

•

[Phone/UIM]: Switch between the

FOMA terminal and the UIM group setting

list screens.

•

: View the settings of the selected

group.

Group setting list

screen

Continued on next page

Phonebook



Move the cursor to the target group

▶

[Set]

Group settings

screen



Perform the following operations

[ (Group name)]

Enter up to 10 full-pitch or 21 half-pitch characters. Enter with Kanji,

Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, or Katakana, etc.

[ Ringtone]

Set the ring tone for a call.

Music : Select a Chaku-Uta Full

song saved in "Music"

of "Data Box".→P270

Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song

as a Ring Tone" (P266).

Melody : Select a melody saved in "Melody" of "Data Box".

→P314

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in

"i-motion" of "Data Box".→P307

Terminal setting

: Use "Select ring tone" settings.→P100

[ Mail ringtone]

Set the ring tone for incoming mail.

• Available items are the same as for " Ringtone".

[ Image]

Add an image to a group. The image is displayed when making/

receiving calls or checking Phonebook data.

My picture : Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data

Box".→P296

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in

"i-motion" of "Data Box".→P307

Take picture : Activate the camera and set the captured

image. →P222

Terminal setting

: Use "Call & Mail image" settings.→P109

[ Mail image]

Select an image or i-motion to be displayed when a mail arrives.

• Available items are the same as for " Image".

[ Accept/Reject]

Set whether to accept/reject calls for groups.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Not set"/"Reject call"/

"Accept call"

*1 If you change any one of " Image", " Ringtone", " Mail

image", or " Mail ringtone" of the Phonebook while a moving

picture/i-motion with video/sound is set for "Select ring tone"

(P100) and "Call & Mail image" (P109), the default sound or

image is set to "Image" or "Ringtone" that is not changed.

*2 If you set a moving picture/i-motion with video/sound either for

the image or ring tone, the same moving picture/i-motion is set

for the other item automatically.

I

[Done]

Note

• The setting in "Accept/Reject call" (P95) in the Phonebook

takes priority.

Phonebook

Continue on the next page

Group Setting List Screen Sub Menu



Group setting list screen (P89) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Set]

Change the selected group settings.→P90

[Move]

Change the display position of the selected group.

▶ Select the new display position ▶

[OK]

[Reset]

Reset the selected group settings. The group name is restored to

default.

[Reset all]

Reset all group settings and group order.

Search phonebook

Making a Call from Phonebook

• To search Phonebook entries set as secret, set "Secret mode" to

"Secret mode" beforehand.→P127

Making a Call from Phonebook

You can make a call by invoking the Phonebook.



Stand-by display ▶

The entries searched by the default search

mode appear on the Phonebook entry list

screen.→P97

Phonebook list

screen (Ex.: When

searching all

entries)



Move the cursor to a party to call

▶

To make a videophone call

Press

[V. Phone].

Phonebook

Operations on Phonebook Detail Screen

When selecting a party on the Phonebook list screen, the

Phonebook detail screen is displayed.

Select a phone number and press

[Call] to make a call.

• You can make a call after selecting a phone number and use

[Disp.] to display the phone number.

When multiple phone numbers are saved

• Use

to select a phone number and press

[Call].

• Press

to display the saved phone numbers on the

Phone number selection screen in a list. Alternatively, use

to select a phone number and press

[Call] to make

a call.

Note

• If "Secret mode" is set to "Secret data only" (P127), only secret

Phonebook entries (P86) can be searched/displayed.

Searching Phonebook

You can use various ways to search Phonebook entries.

M

▶ "Phonebook" ▶ "Search phonebook"

•

[Default]: Set the

highlighted option as

the search mode for the

Phonebook list screen

displayed when you press

, etc. in Stand-by.

phonebook screen

The default

mode is

indicated.



Perform the following operations

[Show all data]

Display all Phonebook entries divided into reading lines (あ-わ lines,

A-Z) and "他 (others)" (for readings other than the Japanese Kana

syllables).

• Use

to switch the reading line.

• Press the keys

(あ-わ lines) to switch the display to

"Reading search" mode. Operations are same as "Reading search".

[Group?]

Search and display Phonebook entries by group (Group list screen).

Use

[UIM/Phone] to switch between the FOMA terminal

Phonebook and the UIM Phonebook. Use

▶

[Select] to select

a group and display Phonebook entries saved in the group.

[Reading?]

Enter part of "Reading" and search all Phonebook entries. Enter up to

32 half-pitch characters for reading.

• All Phonebook entries are displayed when a reading is not entered.

• You can also search readings using other than the leading

character.

• Press

[Chara] to switch the input mode.

[Memory No?]

Display Phonebook entries on the FOMA terminal by every 50 entries

from memory no. "0" in order.

• Use

to switch the memory number.

• The UIM Phonebook cannot be displayed.

• Phonebook entries can also be displayed by entering memory

numbers with dial keys.

[Phone number?]

Enter part of the saved phone number and search all Phonebook

entries. Enter up to 26 digits.

• All Phonebook entries are displayed when a phone number is not

entered.

• You can search phone numbers using other than the leading digit.

Phonebook

Continue on the next page

[Domain?]

Display Phonebook entries that contain mail addresses by domain.

• Use

to switch the domain.

• Register a domain to search beforehand.→P97

Viewing Phonebook Entries



Stand-by display ▶

Save locations on the Phonebook

• If saved on the FOMA terminal

Phonebook, the icon assigned to

"Phone number1" appears.

• If saved on the UIM Phonebook,

appears.

Phonebook

list screen



Select a Phonebook entry

• When an image is set to the phonebook

entry, the set image is displayed.

• Icons displayed for each item are same as

those for the Add to phonebook screen.

→P84

Phonebook

detail screen

Note

• During background playback, moving pictures/i-motion saved on

the Phonebook are not played.

Operations on the Phonebook list screen

Select the Phonebook entry in which a phone number and a

mail address are saved and press

to make a call, and

press

[Mail] to create mail. If multiple phone numbers or

mail addresses are saved, the Phone number or mail address

selection screen appears.

Operations on the Phonebook detail screen

When selecting a saved phone number, mail address, etc., you

can perform the following operations.

[Call] : Make a voice call to the selected phone number.

[Mail] : Create an i-mode mail addressed to the selected

mail address.→P138

[Connect] : Connect to the site of the selected URL.

[Play] : Play the selected ring tone.

[Disp.] : Display the selected videophone substitute image.

Phonebook

Phonebook List Screen Sub Menu



Phonebook list screen (P93) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Mail/URL]

Create mail or access URL.

Compose mail : Create an i-mode mail addressed to the mail

address or phone number of the selected

Phonebook entry.→P138

Attach to mail : Create an i-mode mail with the selected

Phonebook entry attached.→P138

Compose SMS : Create an SMS message addressed to the phone

number saved in the selected Phonebook entry.

→P176

Connect to URL : Connect to the site of the URL saved in the

selected Phonebook entry.

[Call function]

Select the calling method. If multiple phone numbers are saved, after

selecting the calling method, select the number to call on the Phone

number selection screen.

Video phone call : Make a videophone call.

Customize call : Change the saved phone number and make a call.

Int. call(Japan) : Add the country code for Japan "+81"

automatically at the beginning of the phone

number when you make a call from overseas to a

phone number in Japan saved in the Phonebook.

• If the beginning of the phone number is "0", it is

automatically deleted.

[Add new]

Create a new Phonebook entry.→P84

[Edit]

Edit the selected Phonebook entry.→P96

[Copy]

Copy or back up the selected entry.

to the UIM

: Copy the selected Phonebook entry to the UIM.

to the phone

: Copy the selected Phonebook entry to the

FOMA terminal.

to microSD : Copy the selected Phonebook entry to a

microSD card.

Multiple choice : Select multiple entries from the FOMA terminal

or UIM and copy to other locations (FOMA

terminal/UIM/microSD).

▶ Select a copy source ▶ Mark entries to copy

▶

[Copy] ▶ Select a copy destination

Backup : Back up all Phonebook data saved on the FOMA

terminal to a microSD card.

• Images saved in the Phonebook cannot be

copied.

Connect to center : Save Phonebook entries on the FOMA terminal

to the Data Storage Center.→P131

[Search by]

Search the Phonebook in another search mode.→P92

[Send Ir data]

Send a Phonebook entry to an external device via infrared

communication.→P328

Focused data : Send the selected Phonebook entry.

all in phone : Send all data saved on the FOMA terminal

Phonebook.

all in UIM : Send all data saved on the UIM Phonebook.

Phonebook

Continue on the next page

[Delete]

Delete saved data from the Phonebook.→P96

[Create domain list]

Create the domain to be searched by domain search.→P97

*1 Appear for the FOMA terminal Phonebook.

*2 Appear for the UIM Phonebook.

*3 Appear only for the domain search.

Phonebook Detail Screen Sub Menu



Phonebook detail screen (P93) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Mail/URL]

Create mail or access URL.

Compose mail : Create an i-mode mail addressed to the mail

address or phone number saved in the displayed

Phonebook entry.→P138

Attach to mail : Create an i-mode mail with the displayed

Phonebook entry attached.→P138

Compose SMS : Create an SMS message addressed to the phone

number in the displayed Phonebook entry.→P176

Connect to URL : Access the site of the URL saved in the

displayed Phonebook entry.

[Call function]

Select the calling method.

Video phone call : Make a videophone call.

Customize call : Change the saved phone number and make a call.

Int. call(Japan) : Add the country code for Japan "+81"

automatically at the beginning of the phone

number when you make a call from overseas to a

phone number in Japan saved in the Phonebook.

• If the beginning of the phone number is "0", it is

automatically deleted.

[Edit]

Edit the displayed Phonebook entry.→P96

[Copy]

Copy the displayed Phonebook entry.

Copy item : Select and copy items from the saved Phonebook

entry displayed.

to the UIM

: Copy the displayed Phonebook entry to the UIM.

to the phone

: Copy the displayed Phonebook entry to the FOMA

terminal.

to microSD : Copy the displayed Phonebook entry to a microSD

card.

[Send Ir data]

Send the displayed Phonebook entry via infrared communication.

→P328

[Accept/Reject call]

Set to accept or reject calls per phone number saved on the FOMA

terminal Phonebook.

You can select this only when you move the cursor to a phone

number beforehand.

• A phone number saved in "Reject on list" (P128) cannot be set to

"Accept call".

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Not set"/"Reject call"/

"Accept call"

[Delete]

Delete the displayed Phonebook entry.

*1 Appear for the FOMA terminal Phonebook.

*2 Appear for the UIM phonebook.

Phonebook

Editing Phonebook Entries



Phonebook detail screen (P93) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Edit" ▶ Edit each item

Use the same steps in "Adding Entries to the FOMA Terminal

Phonebook" (P84) or "Adding Entries to UIM (FOMA Card)

Phonebook" (P87) to edit items.

To change the memory number and save the entry

If you change the memory number and save the entry,

the original entry remains with the original memory

number and the edited entry is saved with a new

memory number.

(Memory No.) ▶ enter any un-assigned memory

number (000-999).



After editing,

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

Deleting Phonebook Entries

Example: To delete an entry from the Phonebook entry list

screen



Move the cursor to an entry to delete on the

Phonebook list screen (P93) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Delete]

One : Delete the selected Phonebook entry.

Selected : Select multiple entries from the FOMA terminal

or UIM.

▶ "Phone"/"UIM" ▶ Mark entries to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

all in phone : Delete all Phonebook entries saved on the FOMA

terminal.

The Terminal security code is required to delete.

all in UIM : Delete all Phonebook entries saved on the UIM.

The Terminal security code is required to delete.



"Yes"

The selected/displayed Phonebook entry is deleted.

To delete a Phonebook entry from the Phonebook

detail screen

You can delete only one Phonebook entry at a time

from the Phonebook detail screen. On the Phonebook

detail screen, press

[Menu] ▶ "Delete" ▶ "Yes".

Phonebook

Continue on the next page

No. of phonebook

Checking Phonebook Storage

Status

You can check the memory status on the FOMA terminal/UIM

Phonebook.

M

▶ "Phonebook" ▶ "No. of phonebook"

• "Secret entry" is displayed when "Secret mode" is set to

"Secret mode" or "Secret data only".

Setting Phonebook

You can set Phonebook entries or images to be invoked from

the Stand-by display.

M

▶

"Phonebook"

▶

"Phonebook settings"

▶

Perform the following operations

[Default mode]

Set the search mode for the Phonebook list screen displayed when

you press

in Stand-by.

[Create domain list]

Create a domain to be searched by the domain search.

▶ Move the cursor to unregistered item ▶

[Add] ▶ Enter a

domain name

[Accept/Reject list]

Phone numbers saved on the Accept/reject call list in "Accept/reject

call" are displayed.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Accept list"/"Reject list"

• Press

[Menu] to perform "Add", "Delete", or "Delete all" operation.

Editing the entered domain name

Move the cursor to the domain to edit on the domain list ▶

[Edit] ▶ edit the domain name.

"@docomo.ne.jp" on the domain list cannot be edited.

Deleting the entered domain name

Move the cursor to the domain to delete on the domain list ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes".

Quick dial

Making a Call with a Few Key

Operation

In Stand-by, enter a 1- to 2-digit number with the dial keys

to quickly make a call to the phone number corresponding

to the memory number of "0" to "99" on the FOMA terminal

Phonebook.



Enter a 1- to 2-digit number

• Use

to display Quick

dial numbers in turn.

The content of the

entry of the memory

no. corresponding

to the entered

number appears.

A

To make a videophone call

Press

[V. phone].

Continued on next page

Phonebook

Note

• If "Quick dial" is set to "OFF", this function does not work.

→P109

• If you use a 3-digit memory number with the ﬁrst or second digit

started with "0" such as "001" or "011", "0" is not necessary to

be entered.

• This function does not work for the UIM Phonebook.

Displaying Call/Mail History

M

▶ "Phonebook" ▶ "Call/Mail history" ▶

Select a log to display

Received calls : Display received logs for voice/videophone

calls.→P62

Redial : Display redial logs for voice/videophone calls.

→P60

Received mails : Display received mail logs.→P166

Sent mails : Display sent mail logs.→P166

Note

• Received calls can also be displayed by pressing

in Stand-

by.

• Redial can also be displayed by pressing

in Stand-by.

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Sound Settings

Changing Ring Tone ･･･････････････ Select ring tone 100

Setting Volume of Ring Tone, Alarm, etc. ･･･ Volume 101

Informing You of Incoming Calls and Alarms by

Vibration ･･･････････････････････････････････ Vibrator 102

Changing Ringing Tone ･････････Melody Call setting 102

Setting Eﬀect Tone ･･････････････Select eﬀect tone 103

Informing You of Touch Panel Operation by Sound or

Vibration ････････････････････････････Touch settings 104

Sounding Alarm when a Line is Likely to be

Disconnected ･････････････････････････Quality alarm 104

Setting Ring Time for Incoming Mail

････････････････････････････････････Mail ring duration 104

Sounding Ring Tone only from Earphones

･･････････････････････････････Headset usage setting 105

Muting Ring Tone from the FOMA Terminal

････････････････････････････････････････Manner mode 105

Changing Manner Mode Settings

････････････････････････････････････Manner mode set 105

Screen/Light Settings

Changing Stand-by Display ･･･････ Stand-by display 106

Setting Image for Incoming Calls

････････････････････････････････････Call & Mail image 109

Setting Dialing Screen Display ････････････Quick dial 109

Setting Wake-up Display ･･･････････Wake-up display 110

Displaying Image Set to Phonebook on Incoming

Call Screen ･････････････････････ Show ph. book img 110

Setting Display Backlight ･････････････････Backlight 110

Displaying in Power Save Mode

･･････････････････････････････････ Power saver mode 111

Setting a Color Theme for Display ･････ Color theme 111

Using Kisekae Tool ･･･････････････････ Kisekae Tool 111

Changing Display of Main Menu ･･････Menu settings 112

Setting Incoming Illumination Patterns

････････････････････････････････････････ Lighting LED 113

Setting Clock Display ･･･････････ Date&Time format 115

Adjusting Touch Panel ･･･････････････････Calibration 115

100

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Select ring tone

Changing Ring Tone

You can change the ring tone for voice/videophone calls,

mail, etc.

• In addition to the pre-installed ring tones and melodies, i-motion,

melodies and Chaku-Uta

songs, Chaku-Uta Full

songs downloaded

from i-mode sites or the Internet web sites can be set as ring

tones.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Select ring tone" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Voice call]

Select the ring tone for a voice call.

Music : Select from Chaku-Uta Full

songs saved in "Music" of

"Data Box".→P270

Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song as a Ring

Tone" (P266).

i-motion : Select from moving pictures/i-motion saved in "i-motion"

of "Data Box".→P307

Melody : Select from melodies saved in "Melody" of "Data Box".

→P314

[Video call]

Select the ring tone for a videophone call.

• Available items are the same as for "Voice call".

[Mail]

Select the ring tone for i-mode mail.

• Available items are the same as for "Voice call".

[MessageR]

Select the ring tone for MessageR.

• Available items are the same as for "Voice call".

[MessageF]

Select the ring tone for MessageF.

• Available items are the same as for "Voice call".

[SMS]

Select the ring tone for a SMS.

• Available items are the same as for "Voice call".

• When Stand-by i-αppli is set, the Receive results screen for SMS

does not appear, and the ring tone and vibrator for SMS do not

work.

I

[Done]

Note

• The following ﬁle formats can be set for a ring tone (however,

some ﬁles such as restricted ﬁles or ﬁles that contain only

video or sound may not be set).

SMF, MFi, and MP4 (Mobile MP4)

• When moving pictures/i-motion is set for ring tones (Chaku-

motion), "Call & Mail image" (P109) is also changed to the

same.

• If you set a moving picture/i-motion with video for "Mail",

"MessageR", "MessageF", or "SMS", the same moving picture/

i-motion is set for all these items. You cannot set each item

individually.

• If music, melody or moving pictures/i-motion with video are

set as a ring tone, the incoming screen will be reset to default

screen when you change the ring tone to moving pictures/

i-motion without video.

• Image only moving pictures/i-motion cannot be set as ring

tones.

101

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Continue on the next page

Pre-installed Ring Tone List

i-motion

Alarm 01-04 映画｢ATOM｣予告

編第一弾 Message 01-08

Ring 20-25

Melody

Alarm 05 Message 09-10 Power oﬀ 01-02

Power on 01-02 Ring 01-19

Volume

Setting Volume of Ring Tone,

Alarm, etc.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Volume"



Perform the following operations

•

: Adjust the volume of the selected item. When the volume

level is set to the lowest, (Silent) is displayed and the tone

does not sound. Every time the volume is adjusted, the tone for

the item sounds at the new volume (except "Receiver volume").

• For "Incoming call", the ring tone/eﬀect tone set in "Voice call"

sounds; for "Mail/Message/SMS", the tone set in "Mail" sounds;

for "Power ON/OFF", the tone set in "Power ON" sounds.

* The default ring tone sounds for "Alarm/Schedule".

[Incoming call]

Adjust the ring tone volume for incoming voice/videophone calls.

[Mail/Message/SMS]

Adjust the ring tone volume for Mail or MessageR/F.

[Alarm/Schedule]

Adjust the alarm tone volume for Alarm/Schedule.

[Keypad tone]

Adjust the volume of keypad tone except dial tone.

[Flip tone]

Adjust the volume when the FOMA terminal is opened/closed.

[Dial sound]

Adjust the dial sound volume.

Continued on next page

102

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

[Power ON/OFF]

Adjust the sound volume when the FOMA terminal is turned on/oﬀ.

[Popup tone]

Adjust the sound volume when the popup window is displayed.

[Receiver volume]

Adjust the receiver volume. The sound cannot be muted.

* When the volume level is set to the highest, → (Step up) is

displayed to increase the sound progressively.

I

[Done]

Note

• Adjusting the receiver volume during a call→P74

Vibrator

Informing You of Incoming Calls

and Alarms by Vibration

You can set the FOMA terminal to vibrate when a call or mail

arrives or at a schedule alarm time.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Vibrator" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Incoming call]

Set the vibration pattern for an incoming voice/videophone call.

[Mail/Message/SMS]

Set the vibration pattern when mail/MessageR/F is received.

[Alarm/Schedule]

Set the vibration pattern for the Alarm/Schedule alert.

[Pop-up]

Set whether to vibrate the FOMA terminal when the Popup screen

appears.

[Power ON/OFF]

Set the vibration pattern when the FOMA terminal is turned on/oﬀ.

I

[Done]

Melody Call setting

Changing Ringing Tone

This service enables you to play a melody to the other party

when a voice call arrives.

• Melody Call is not played for videophone calls.

• Melody Call is a fee-based service that requires subscription.

• For details about Melody Call, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[Network Services]".

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ "Melody Call setting" ▶ "Yes"

The FOMA terminal connects to the Melody Call setting site.

• Packet communication charges do not apply for the setting

site. However, the charges apply for connecting to other sites.

103

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Continue on the next page

Select eﬀect tone

Setting Eﬀect Tone

You can set the eﬀect tone when a key is pressed or

operation is performed.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Select eﬀect tone"

Eﬀect tone

selection screen



Perform the following operations

[Keypad tone]

Select an eﬀect tone when a key is pressed except Dial sound.

[Flip tone]

Select an eﬀect tone when the FOMA terminal is opened/closed.

[Dial sound]

Select an eﬀect tone when a dial key,

, or

is pressed in the

Stand-by display or the Phone number entry screen (P56). If set to

"Japanese", "English", or "Korean", the numbers entered with dial keys

will be read out.

[Power ON]

Select an eﬀect tone when the terminal is turned on.

Music : Select from Chaku-Uta Full

songs saved in "Music" of

"Data Box".→P270

Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song as a Ring

Tone" (P266).

Melody : Select from melodies saved in "Melody" of "Data Box".

→P314

[Power OFF]

Select an eﬀect tone when the terminal is turned oﬀ.

• Available items are the same as for "Power ON".

[Low battery alert]

Set whether to sound an alarm when the battery level becomes low.

* On the selection screen of the setting item, press

[Play] to

check the sound each time an eﬀect tone is selected. To mute the

sound, press

[Mute]. If "Silent" is set for "Volume", an eﬀect tone

cannot be checked.

I

[Done]

104

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Touch settings

Informing You of Touch Panel

Operation by Sound or Vibration

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Touch settings" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Touch type]

Select an action when the touch panel is touched.

OFF : Does not perform actions.

Sound : Sound the tone selected for "Touch sound".

Vibration : Vibrate at the pattern selected for "Touch vibration".

Sound + Vib. : Perform actions with the sound selected for "Touch

sound" and vibration selected for "Touch vibration".

[Touch sound]

Select an eﬀect tone when the touch panel is touched.

[Touch vibration]

Select a vibration pattern when the touch panel is touched.

[Touch sound level]

Adjust the sound level.

[Touch vib. level]

Adjust the vibration level when the touch panel is touched.

I

[Done]

Quality alarm

Sounding Alarm when a Line is

Likely to be Disconnected

The FOMA terminal notiﬁes you of a call almost disconnected

due to poor signal quality with an alarm tone.

• If the signal rapidly deteriorates, the call may be disconnected

without sounding an alarm tone.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶ "Call

feature" ▶ "Quality alarm" ▶ "Alarm OFF"/"Low

alarm"/"High alarm"

Mail ring duration

Setting Ring Time for Incoming Mail

You can set how many times or how long the ring tone

sounds when mail arrives.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Mail ring duration" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Mail ring]

Select an eﬀect tone sounded when the terminal is turned on.

OFF : Set to mute a ring tone.

1 cycle : Set to sound a ring tone once for up to approximately

30 seconds according to the set ring tone length

such as music or melodies.

Select time : Set a ring tone duration.

▶

▶ Enter a ring tone duration

I

[Done]

105

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Continue on the next page

Headset usage setting

Sounding Ring Tone only from

Earphones

You can set the ring tone or alarm tone to sound only from

the earphones when the earphone/microphone (optional), etc.

is connected.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Headset usage setting"

C

[Select]

▶

"Headset only"/"Headset+speaker"

I

[Done]

Note

• While Manner mode is activated, ring tone, etc. sounds only

from the earphones.

Manner mode

Muting Ring Tone from the

FOMA Terminal

Turn oﬀ the tones that sound from the FOMA terminal so as

not to disturb others.

#

(for 1+ seconds)

Canceling Manner mode

In Stand-by, press

(for 1+ seconds).

Note

• 2 types of Manner mode are equipped: "General manner" and

"Original manner".→P105

• appears at the top of the screen when manner mode is

activated.

• A playback conﬁrmation screen appears when you attempt to

play a melody, moving picture/i-motion while Manner mode is

activated.

• Even when Manner mode is activated, the camera shutter tone

sounds.

•

The vibration pattern while "General manner" is active follows

"Vibrator". If "Vibrator" is set to "OFF", "Incoming call" is notiﬁed

with the vibration "Pattern 1", "Mail/Message/SMS" is notiﬁed

with "Message 1", and "Alarm/Schedule" is notiﬁed with "Alarm 1".

Manner mode set

Changing Manner Mode Settings

Select the Manner mode action from "General manner" or

"Original manner". Original manner enables you to change the

each setting of Manner mode.

Example: To change the settings of Original manner

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Manner mode set" ▶ Move the cursor to

"Original manner" ▶

[Edit]

To select the Manner mode type

Move the cursor to "General manner"/"Original manner"

▶ press

[Select].

The Manner mode setting is ended.

Continued on next page

106

Sound/Screen/Light Settings



Perform the following operations

•

: Select the vibration pattern or volume of the selected

item. When the volume level is the lowest, (Silent) is

displayed and the sound is muted.

[Vibration]

Use

[ON/OFF] to set.

ON : As same as "General manner", the vibration pattern follows

"Vibrator", and incoming voice, videophone calls, mails, or

messages are notiﬁed with vibration. If "Vibrator" is set to

"OFF", "Incoming call" is notiﬁed with the vibration "Pattern

1", "Mail/Message/SMS" is notiﬁed with "Message 1", and

"Alarm/Schedule" is notiﬁed with "Alarm 1".

OFF : The FOMA terminal does not vibrate.

[Incoming call vol.]

Adjust the ring tone volume for incoming voice/videophone calls.

[Mail/SMS vol.]

Adjust the ring tone volume for Mail/MessageR/F/SMS.

[Alarm/Schedule vol.]

Adjust the alarm tone volume for Alarm/Schedule.

[Eﬀect/Popup tone]

Adjust the eﬀect tone or volume when the popup is displayed.

[Low battery alert]

Set whether to sound an alarm when the battery level becomes low.

* When the volume level is set to the highest, →(Step up) is

displayed to increase the sound progressively.

I

[Done]

Stand-by display

Changing Stand-by Display

You can set the items (wallpaper, clock, calendar, schedule,

shortcut, etc.) to be shown on the Stand-by display.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶

"Stand-by display"

Stand-by display

setting screen



Perform the following operations

•

[Preview]: The selected preview screen is displayed. Press

to return to the Stand-by display setting screen.

107

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Continue on the next page

[Wallpaper]

TOUCH : Select an image to change when the Stand-by display is

touched.

• Press I[Backgnd] to set a slideshow in background.

→P107

Image : Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data Box".

→P296

• A slideshow created from My picture cannot be selected

with this operation. Make the Stand-by display setting

from the Slideshow list screen (P305).

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in "i-motion" of

"Data Box".→P307

i-αppli : Select a Stand-by i-αppli saved on the FOMA terminal.

→P285

[Display items]

Set the display such as clock, calendar, shortcut, etc. in the Stand-

by display.

• If "TOUCH" is selected for "Wallpaper", this item is unavailable.

Do not show : Items such as clock, calendar, etc. are not displayed.

Analog clock : Select an item from Analog clock.

Digital clock : Select an item from Digital clock.

Calendar : Select to display only "Calendar" or "Calendar +

Schedule".

Shortcut : Display shortcuts.

▶ Select a registration ﬁeld ▶

[Add] ▶ Select a

function ▶

[Done]

• Up to 8 functions can be saved as a shortcut.

• Press

[Menu] to delete saved function or reset

to default settings.

[Battery icon]

Select a battery icon.

[Antenna icon]

Select an antenna icon.

I

[Done]

Note

• After changing to the option other than "Kisekae settings" for

"Battery icon" and "Antenna icon, these icons return to "Kisekae

settings" by setting all in "Kisekae Tool" (P111).

Setting Slideshow of Touch Image

If "TOUCH" is selected for "Wallpaper", up to other 10 images

can be displayed as slideshow in background of the touch

image.

• If "Splash clock" or "Game" is selected for the touch image, a

slideshow cannot be set.



Stand-by display setting screen (P106)

▶ "Wallpaper" ▶ "TOUCH" ▶

I[Backgnd]

▶ Perform the following operations

[Slideshow image]

Select a background image.

▶ Move the cursor to a list number ▶

[Add] ▶ Move the cursor

to a folder ▶

[Open] ▶ Select an image ▶ Repeat the operation

to add an image ▶

[Done]

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected image.

•

[Change]: Change the selected image.

[Slideshow speed]

Select a slideshow speed.

[Random slideshow]

Set whether to display slideshow images in random order.

Continued on next page

108

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

I

[Done]

Setting "Dual clock"

Selecting "Dual clock" in "Digital clock" displays the dates and

times of 2 countries or areas, and cities.

Select the country or area, and city of the clock displayed at the

bottom of the dual clock.

▶ Use

to move to the target area ▶

[Zoom in] ▶ Use

to move to the target city ▶

[Set]

• Press

[Search] to display the city name list. You can also

enter the city name with dial keys and search for a target city.

• Press

[Menu] to search for a city or set Daylight Saving to

ON/OFF.

Note

• Some data may not be displayed in the Stand-by display.

• The moving picture/i-motion or Flash movie set as the Stand-

by display starts when the FOMA terminal is opened and the

moving picture/i-motion stops when the terminal is closed. Also,

press

to play or stop it.

• Web To function is not available from a moving picture/i-motion

set as the Stand-by display.

• When displaying the Stand-by display, a Flash movie such as a

clock, or GIF animation stops after played for a certain period

of time.

• Under the setting of "4 season", "SAKURA", "SummerBeach",

"MOMIJI", and "Yuki" are automatically switched depending on

the month.

• Under the setting of "4 season", "SAKURA", "SummerBeach",

"MOMIJI", or "Yuki", part of touch image disappears and the

clock appears when the display is touched once. The entire

touch image and the clock disappear and only the background

image appears when the display is touched once again.

• If the background image and the text color of the clock

are overlapped, the clock becomes invisible. Change the

background setting or touch image.

• Under the setting of "Splash clock", the clock moves to the

position you touch.

• Under the setting of "Game", you can play game on the Stand-

by display such as concentration or hidden catch, etc.

• If the time zone is set to other than GMT+9 in "Auto time

adjust" (P53) or "Local time zone" (P53), the clock is

automatically changed to "Dual clock".

•

After this option is set, press

in Stand-by ▶ move the cursor

to the clock display ▶

to display the following screen.

- "Dual clock"

The Date&Time settings screen (P53) appears when the

Home clock (the upper clock) is selected, and the Stand-by

display setting screen appears when the Sub clock (the lower

clock) is selected.

- Other clocks

The Alarm list screen (P351) is displayed. (If the date is

selected, the Calendar screen of the schedule (P354) is

displayed.)

•

After this option is set, press

in Stand-by ▶ move the

cursor to the calendar display ▶

to display the Calendar

screen of the schedule (P354).

• After "Calendar + Schedule" is set, press

in Stand-by ▶

move the cursor to the schedule ▶

to display the Schedule

list screen (P355).

109

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Continue on the next page

Call & Mail image

Setting Image for Incoming Calls

Set an image displayed on the screen for incoming calls, etc.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶ "Call & Mail

image"



Perform the following operations

•

[Preview]: The preview screen of the selected image is

displayed, and press

to stop the preview.

[Incoming voice call]

Set an image displayed on the screen when a voice call arrives.

Image : Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data Box".

→P296

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in "i-motion" of

"Data Box".→P307

[Incoming video call]

Set an image displayed on the incoming videophone call screen.

• Available items are the same as for "Incoming voice call".

[Mail sending]

Select an image displayed when sending a mail from "My picture" of

"Data Box".→P296

[Mail receiving]

Select an image displayed when receiving a mail and MessageR/F

from "My picture" of "Data Box".→P296

[Mail complete]

Set an image displayed on the completion of receiving a mail and

MessageR/F.

• Available items are the same as for "Incoming voice call".

[Check new messages]

Select an image displayed on the completion of checking new

message from "My picture" of "Data Box".→P296

I

[Done]

Note

• A sound only moving picture/i-motion cannot be set to the

incoming call screen.

•

If a moving picture/i-motion with sound is set to the incoming

call screen, the "Select ring tone" (P100) is also changed to the

same.

• If a moving picture/i-motion with sound is set as an incoming

image, the ring tone settings are automatically reset to the

default when you change it to a still image or moving picture/

i-motion without sound.

Quick dial

Setting Dialing Screen Display

Set whether to search and display the Phonebook entry

corresponding to the memory number when entered between

a 1-digit and 2-digit number in Stand-by.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶ Move the

cursor to "Quick dial" ▶

[ON/OFF]

110

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Wake-up display

Setting Wake-up Display

Set an image displayed on the screen when the FOMA

terminal is started up.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶ "Wake-up

display"

•

[Preview]: The preview screen of the selected image is

displayed, and press to stop

the preview.

C

[Select] ▶ Select an image

• To select from other folders, press Q and then select an

image.

I

[Done]

Note

• Flash movies cannot be set as a wake-up screen.

Show ph. book img

Displaying Image Set to Phonebook

on Incoming Call Screen

Display the image set to the Phonebook entry when a call

arrives from the number saved in the Phonebook with caller

ID shown.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ Move the cursor to "Show ph.

book img" ▶

[ON/OFF]

Note

• The image display priority for an incoming call is as follows:

Image set to a Phonebook entry

Image set to a Group in the Phonebook

Image set for the Call & Mail image

Backlight

Setting Display Backlight

You can set the Display backlight.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶ "Backlight" ▶

Perform the following operations

[Display duration]

Set the backlight duration of the display from between 10 seconds

and 10 minutes, or Always ON.

• When the set time elapsed after the last operation, the screen

becomes dark. When approximately more 5 seconds elapsed, the

backlight turns oﬀ completely. (While i-Channel ticker is displayed,

the backlight does not turn oﬀ completely until at least 1 minute

elapsed after the last operation.)

[Display brightness]

Set the backlight level of the display.

• If "Auto brightness" is set, the illumination sensor detects

surrounding brightness and adjusts the display brightness

automatically.

111

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Continue on the next page

[AC connected]

Set the lighting when the AC charger is connected.

Display setting : Use the settings in "Display duration" and "Display

brightness".

Always ON : Light is always on.

I

[Done]

Note

• During the voice call, the backlight turns oﬀ after approximately

5 seconds, regardless of the "Display duration" setting.

Power saver mode

Displaying in Power Save Mode

You can set the backlight brightness of the display to the

lowest power saving level.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶

"Power saver mode" ▶ "ON"/"OFF"

Color theme

Setting a Color Theme for Display

You can select a color theme.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶ "Color theme"



Select a color

•

[Preview]: The preview screen is displayed.

Kisekae Tool

Using Kisekae Tool

If you use "Kisekae Tool", items such as ring tone, Stand-by

display, icon menu can be changed at a time.

• Downloading Kisekae Tool→P195

• Available items vary depending on Kisekae Tool.

- Stand-by display

- Custom menu

- Incoming voice call image

- Incoming vt call image

- Mail sending image

- Mail receiving image

- Mail complete image

- Check new message (Image)

- Antenna icon

- Battery icon

- Color theme

- Voice call

- Video call

- Mail/Message/SMS

- MessageR

- MessageF

- SMS

- Alarm

• If the Menu screen design is changed by using Kisekae Tool, menu

structure may change, depending on menu types, according to the

frequency of use. In addition, numbers assigned to menu items

(item numbers) may not be applied.

• Pre-installed Kisekae Tool can display menu items in Japanese,

English, and Korean (except for "L03B-direct"). Downloaded Kisekae

Tool may not display menu items in English and Korean.

M

▶ "Data Box" ▶ "Kisekae Tool"

Continued on next page

112

Sound/Screen/Light Settings



"i-mode"/"Preinstalled"

i-mode : Select from Kisekae Tool

downloaded from the site.

Preinstalled : Select from preinstalled

Kisekae Tool.

• Select "Search by i-mode" and connect to

the i-mode site to search Kisekae Tool.

Kisekae Tool

list screen



Select Kisekae Tool ▶ I[Set all] ▶ "Yes"

•

[View]: View the contents of the selected Kisekae Tool by

item.

Resetting the settings

Press

[Menu] on the Kisekae Tool list screen ▶ "Reset screen

display / sound setting" ▶ enter the Terminal security code.

Kisekae Tool List Screen Sub Menu



Kisekae Tool list screen (P112) ▶ Move the

cursor to Kisekae Tool ▶

[Menu]

• The Kisekae Tool list screen sub menu is the same as for "Still

Image File List Screen Sub Menu" (P298) except for "Set all"

and "Reset screen display / sound setting". However, "Send

via", "Set as", and "Store in center" are not displayed.

Menu settings

Changing Display of Main Menu

You can switch between the following 2 types of the Main

menu.

• Custom menu: Menu items can be changed.

• Basic menu: Menu items cannot be changed, but icons or

background images can be changed.

Changing Menu Items of Custom Menu

You can change the menu items of the Custom menu

depending on Kisekae Tool.

You can call up the function with a few steps by changing

menu items to frequently used ones.

• Menu items cannot be changed from the default Custom menu.

M

▶ Move the cursor to the function to

change ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Assign function" ▶

Select a function ▶ "Yes"

Resetting the Custom Menu to the default

▶

[Menu] ▶ "Reset function assignment" ▶ "Yes"

Deleting the Menu operation log

Depending on Kisekae Tool, Custom menu items are

automatically sorted according to the menu operation log.

Perform the following operations to delete menu operation log.

▶

[Menu] ▶ "Reset menu operation log" ▶ "Yes"

113

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Continue on the next page

Changing Icons or Background Images of

Basic Menu

M

▶

[Basic]



Move the cursor to an icon to change ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Icon settings" ▶ Select a new

icon

• To select other folders, press Q and then select an icon.

To change the background image

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Set background" ▶ select an

image.

Note

• JPEG or GIF images in 130×130 dots or smaller can be used

as an icon. The image size larger than this size is automatically

reduced. The image of the ﬁrst frame is displayed for an image

in animation GIF format.

Setting Preferentially Displayed Menu

You can set Menu displayed when pressing

in Stand-by.

M

▶

[Menu] ▶ "Menu priority" ▶

"Custom menu"/"Basic menu" ▶ "Yes"

Switching Menu

While displaying Menu, press

[Basic/Custom].

Lighting LED

Setting Incoming Illumination

Patterns

You can set the incoming or alarm illumination to ON/OFF, or

set illumination patterns for each item.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Display" ▶ "Lighting LED"

▶ Perform the following operations

• M[Preview]: Check the illumination set to the selected item.

[Lighting LED]

Set whether to light/blink the illumination light.

[Incoming voice call]

Set an illumination pattern for an incoming voice call.

[Incoming video call]

Set an illumination pattern for an incoming video call.

[New mail]

Set an illumination pattern for incoming mail/MessageR/F.

Continued on next page

114

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

[New Voice mail]

Set an illumination pattern to indicate that a new message is

recorded at the Voice mail center.

• This option is valid only when "Tone/Vibration message notiﬁcation"

is set to "Yes".→P393

[New Record message]

Set an illumination pattern to indicate that a new message is

recorded.

[Alarm]

Set an illumination pattern at Alarm time.

[IC card(Felica)]

Set whether to light or blink an illumination when using the IC card.

[Missed call]

Set whether to light or blink an illumination when you missed a call.

[Unread message]

Set whether to light or blink an illumination when unread mails, SMS,

or messages exist.

[Low battery]

Set whether to light or blink an illumination when the battery level

becomes low.

* Available when "Lighting LED" is set to "ON"

I

[Done]

Note

• The illuminations for "Missed call" and "Unread message"

light/blink for up to 1 hour at 10 seconds interval, and other

illuminations light/blink for up to 30 seconds.

115

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Continue on the next page

Date&Time format

Setting Clock Display

You can set the display format for date and time.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Date&Time" ▶ "Date&Time

format" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Date format]

Set the display format for the date.

[Time format]

Set the display format for the time.

I

[Done]

Note

• YYYY=year, MM=month, and DD=day in the display.

Calibration

Adjusting Touch Panel

You can set the display format for date and time.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Calibration"



Touch the center of "+" at the upper left, upper

right, lower left, lower right, and middle



"Yes" ▶ Check the calibration with the same

operation as Step 2 ▶ "OK"

• If "No" is selected, go to Step 4 without checking the

calibration.



"Yes"

117

Security Settings

Security Code

Security Codes Used on the FOMA Terminal ･･･････ 118

Changing Terminal Security Code

･･･････････････････････････････Change security code 120

Setting PIN Codes ････････････････････････ PIN code 120

Unblocking a Blocked PIN ･･･････････････････････････ 121

Restricting Operations and Functions

on Mobile Phone

Various Lock Functions ･････････････････････････････ 121

Restricting Others from Using ･･････････････Lock all 121

Restricting Making/Receiving Calls ･････････････････ 123

Restricting Display of Phonebook and Schedule etc.

････････････････････････････････････Data access lock 124

Restricting Display of Live Character Park

････････････････････････････Live Character Park lock 125

Preventing the Touch Panel/Key Misoperations

･･････････････････････････････････････････ Touch lock 125

Restricting Outgoing/Incoming Calls

and Messages

Automatically Setting Touch Lock

･････････････････････････････････････ Auto touch lock 126

Setting Display for Redial and Received Calls

･･･････････････････････････････ Display Call/Mail logs 126

Displaying Information Set as Secret

････････････････････････････････････････ Secret mode 127

Rejecting a Call from Speciﬁed Number

････････････････････････････････････････Reject on list 127

Rejecting All Incoming Calls ･････････Reject all calls 128

Setting Actions when Calls Arrive from Anonymous

Callers ･･･････････････････････････ Anonymous caller 129

Muting Ring Tone for a Caller Unset in Phonebook

･････････････････････････････････ Set mute ring(sec.) 130

Rejecting a Call from a Caller Unset in Phonebook

･････････････････････････････････････Reject unknown 130

Using Data Security Service

･･･････････････････････････････Data Security Service 131

Resetting Various Functions ････････Reset Settings 132

Deleting Saved Data All at Once ･････ Clear memory 132

Other Security Settings

Other Security Settings ････････････････････････････ 133

118

Security Settings

Security Codes Used on the

FOMA Terminal

Some functions of the FOMA terminal require a password.

In addition to the Terminal security code, the Network

security code, the i-mode password, etc. are oﬀered. These

passwords help you utilize your FOMA terminal.

• The entered passwords such as the Terminal security code, Network

security code, and i-mode password are displayed as "＊".

Cautions on security codes

• Avoid setting a password using your birthday, part of your phone

number, your address or room number, "1111" or "1234", which

can be easily guessed by others. Be sure to write down the set

passwords and store them in a separate location.

• Do not reveal your passwords to others. DOCOMO is not

responsible for damage caused by misuse of your security codes

by others.

• If you forget your passwords, you need to bring your ID (driver's

license, etc.), the FOMA terminal and UIM to the docomo Shop.

For details, contact "General Inquiries" at the back of this manual.

Terminal Security Code

The Terminal security code is set to "0000" by default; you

can change the code yourself.→P120

If the Terminal security code entry screen

appears, enter the 4- to 8- digit code and

press

[OK].

Terminal security

code entry

screen

Network Security Code

The Network security code is a 4-digit number to be used for

conﬁrming subscriber's identity at an acceptance of order at

the docomo Shop, docomo Information Center, or "お客様サポー

ト (user support)" and accessing network services. You can

set any number at subscription, and can change the number

yourself.

If you have "docomo ID/Password" for "My docomo" which

is a total support site for a PC, you can change the Network

security code from a PC. From i-mode, you can change the

Network security code by accessing "お客様サポート (user

support)" then "各種設定(確認・変更・利用) (subscriptions &

procedures)".

• For "My docomo" and "お客様サポート (user support)", see the

backside of the back of this manual.

119

Security Settings

Continue on the next page

i-mode Password

The 4-digit "i-mode password" is required to register/remove

contents in My Menu, or subscribe to/cancel message

service, fee-based i-mode services. (Some other information

service providers may set individual passwords.)

The i-mode password is set to "0000" by default; you

can change it yourself. From i-mode, you can change the

password by accessing "iMenu" ▶ "English" ▶ "Options" ▶

"Change i-mode Password".

PIN1/PIN2 Codes

You can set PIN1 and PIN2 codes to the UIM. These

codes are set to "0000" by default. You can change them

yourself.→P120

The PIN1 code is a 4- to 8- digit number (code) required

to identify the user every time the UIM is inserted into the

FOMA terminal or the terminal power is turned on in order to

prevent unauthorized use.

The PIN1 code entry is required to make or receive calls, and

operate the terminal. The PIN2 code is a 4- to 8- digit number

used to reset accumulated call charges, etc.

If the PIN1/PIN2 code entry screen

appears, enter the 4- to 8- digit PIN1/PIN2

code and press

[OK].

• Use the PIN1 and PIN2 codes you set

previously if you purchase a new FOMA terminal

and use the current UIM.

PIN1 code entry

screen (Ex.: For

PIN1 code)

PUK Code (PIN Unblock Code)

The PUK code is an 8-digit number used to unblock the PIN1

or PIN2 code.→P121

You cannot change it yourself.

• If you fail to enter the correct PUK code 10 times in a row, the UIM

is locked.

Enter PUK

code (PIN

Unblock Code)

Enter

PIN1 code

Enter

PIN2 code

Set new

PIN1/PIN2 code

Contact the

docomo Shop

Failed 10

times in a row

Failed 3 times

in a row

120

Security Settings

Change security code

Changing Terminal Security Code

You can change the Terminal security code.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶

"Change security code"



Enter the current Terminal security code

The Change security code screen appears.



Enter a new Terminal security code



Re-enter the Terminal security code entered in

Step 3

PIN code

Setting PIN Codes

PIN1 code request

Requiring the PIN1 Code when the

Terminal is Turned On

Set to display the PIN1 code entry screen when the FOMA

terminal is turned on, and reject the use of the FOMA

terminal unless entering the PIN1 code.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶

"PIN code" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

▶ "PIN1 code request" ▶ "ON"/"OFF" ▶

Enter PIN1 code

Making emergency calls (110, 119, or 118) when the

PIN1 entry screen is open

You can make emergency calls (110, 119, or 118) even when

the PIN1 code entry screen appears right after the FOMA

terminal is turned on.

▶

[ER. call] ▶ Select an emergency number ▶

[OK]

Change PIN1/PIN2 code

Changing PIN1/PIN2 Code

• Set "PIN1 code request" to "ON" before changing the PIN1 code.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶ "PIN

code" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code



"Change PIN1 code"/"Change PIN2 code" ▶

Enter the current PIN1/PIN2 code

The new PIN1/PIN2 code entry screen appears.



Enter the new PIN1/PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits)

The new PIN1/PIN2 code re-entry screen appears.



Re-enter the PIN1/PIN2 code entered in Step 3

121

Security Settings

Continue on the next page

Unblocking a Blocked PIN

If you enter an incorrect PIN1/PIN2 code 3 times in a row

and the PIN lock screen appears, enter the PUK code to

release the lock.

• You need to set a new PIN1/PIN2 code after unblocking the PIN

code.



PIN lock screen

▶

Enter the PUK code (8 digits)

The new PIN1/PIN2 code entry screen appears.



Enter the new PIN1/PIN2 (4 to 8 digits)

The re-entry screen for conﬁrmation appears.



Re-enter the PIN1/PIN2 code entered in Step 2

Various Lock Functions

Lock

function Description

Reference

Lock all You can lock the FOMA terminal to

prevent unauthorized use. P121

Omakase

Lock If you lost the FOMA terminal, you can

lock the terminal by remote control. P122

Call/Mail

lock To prevent unauthorized use of the FOMA

terminal, you can disable outgoing calls,

address entries with dial keys, incoming

calls or display of mail messages.

P123

Self mode You can disable all network functions,

such as making/receiving calls, using

i-mode, or sending/receiving mails.

P124

Lock

function Description

Reference

Data

access lock You can specify certain functions to lock. P124

Live

Character

Park lock

You can hide Live Character Park. P125

Auto touch

lock

You can set the FOMA terminal to

automatically lock the touch operations

and Keypad to avoid being used in Turn

View Style mode and leave the FOMA

terminal for a certain seconds without any

operations.

P126

Display Call/

Mail logs You can hide redialed call, received call,

sent mail, received mail logs. P126

Secret

mode You can hide secret Phonebook entries or

schedule events. P127

Lock all

Restricting Others from Using

You can lock the FOMA terminal to prevent anyone from

using it.

• When Lock all is activated, any operations other than turning power

ON/OFF, making emergency calls, answering incoming voice/

videophone calls, and canceling Lock all are disabled.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶ "Lock" ▶

"Lock all" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶

"Yes"/"No"

Continued on next page

122

Security Settings

Note

• Even if mail or MessageR/F arrives while Lock all is activated,

the Receive results screen or icon is not displayed.

• While Lock all is activated, the i-Channel ticker does not appear.

Calling emergency numbers (110, 119, or 118) during

Lock all

Emergency numbers (110, 119, or 118) can be called during Lock all.

▶

[Emergency]

▶

Select an emergency number

▶

[OK]

Canceling Lock all

▶

Touch "Unlock"/Press any key ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

If you fail to enter the correct Terminal security code 5 times in a

row, the terminal automatically turns power oﬀ.

Omakase Lock

Using Omakase Lock

You can lock your personal information such as Phonebook

entries and the IC card functions of Osaifu-Keitai by contacting

DOCOMO when you lost the FOMA terminal and other cases.

Your important privacy and Osaifu-Keitai will be protected.

If Omakase Lock cannot be set at the subscription and

communication becomes available within a year, the lock is

automatically activated. However if you cancel or halt the

contract, change your phone number, or issue a new UIM due

to loss (only when locked the terminal by specifying numbers),

the lock will not be automatically activated even within a year.

The FOMA terminal can be unlocked upon your request.

If you are the docomo Premier Club member, no charges apply to use

this service as many times as you want. If you are not the docomo

Premier Club member, charges apply (however, if you subscribe to

this service upon or during suspension of the FOMA terminal, no

charges apply.) Also, if you subscribe to Keitai Anshin Pack (Mobile

Phone Security Package), you can use this service within the Keitai

Anshin Pack ﬂat rate fee.

Setting/canceling Omakase Lock

0120−524−360 Available 24 hours a day

(In Japanese only)

* Setting/canceling the lock is available from the My docomo site

using a PC.

* For details about Omakase Lock, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version".

When Omakase Lock is set, "Omakase Lock activated" appears.

• During Omakase Lock, operations except answering voice/

videophone calls or turning power ON/OFF are unavailable and each

function (including the IC card functions) cannot be used.

• Receiving voice/videophone calls is available. However, only phone

number appears and the name or image saved in the Phonebook

does not appear.

• The received mails during Omakase Lock are stored in the i-mode

center.

• Turning power ON/OFF is available. However, turning power OFF

does not cancel the lock.

• The UIM or microSD card cannot be locked.

123

Security Settings

Continue on the next page

Note

• Even when other functions are activated, relevant functions are

ended and the lock is activated.

• Even while other lock function is set, Omakase Lock can be

used. However, if Omakase Lock is set during Public mode

(Drive mode), voice/videophone calls also cannot be received.

• When the FOMA terminal is out of service area, turned OFF, or

used overseas, the lock cannot be activated nor deactivated.

Also, depending on the usage status of the FOMA terminal, the

lock may not be activated.

• If you subscribe to Dual Network Service and the mova service

is in use, the lock cannot be activated.

•

Even when the subscriber is diﬀerent from the user of the

FOMA terminal, the lock is activated upon the request from the

subscriber.

• Omakase Lock can be canceled only if the UIM phone number

that is the same as the one used when Omakase Lock is

activated is inserted in the FOMA terminal. If the lock cannot be

canceled, contact "General Inquiries" at the back of this manual.

Restricting Making/Receiving

Calls

Call/Mail lock

Disabling Outgoing or Incoming

Communications

You can disable making calls, entering an address with dial

keys, answering calls, or displaying mails.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶ "Lock" ▶

"Call/Mail lock" ▶ Enter the Terminal security

code ▶ Perform the following operations

[Call/Mail lock set]

Set whether to activate the Call/Mail lock.

[Dialing call]*

Disable the following operations.

• Making calls by entering numbers with dial keys

• Making calls via the received call logs

• Making calls to redial phone numbers (making a call to a number

saved in the Phonebook or an emergency number such as "110",

"119", or "118" is available)

• Saving, editing, or deleting a Phonebook entry (including

exchanging data via infrared communication, or copying/moving to

the microSD card)

[Send mail]*

Disable the following operations.

• Entering a mail address with dial keys.

• Sending mail to an address in the redial or received mail logs

(sending mails to an address saved in the Phonebook is available).

• Performing data communications connecting to a PC, etc.

• Saving, editing, or deleting a Phonebook entry (including

exchanging data via infrared communication, or copying/moving to

the microSD card).

[Incoming call]*

Disable incoming calls. While this function is activated, a missed call

icon does not appear and the received call log cannot be viewed.

[Rcv. mail display]*

Disable viewing sent/received mails and MessageR/F. While this

function is activated, an icon indicating incoming mail does not

appear, and mails and received mail log in the FOMA terminal cannot

be viewed.

* Can be set when "Call/Mail lock set" is set to "ON".

I

[Done]

124

Security Settings

Self mode

Stopping All Incoming/Outgoing

Transmissions

You can disable all network functions, such as making/

receiving calls, using i-mode, or sending/receiving mails.

Infrared data communication is also unavailable.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶ "Self

mode" ▶ "Yes"/"No"

Note

• Self mode is deactivated if you call an emergency number

("110", "119", or "118").

• While Self mode is activated, callers will hear a message

indicating that the FOMA terminal is turned oﬀ or out of service

area.

• The Voice mail service and the Call forwarding service still work

in Self mode.

• All mails and MessageR/F received while in Self mode are

stored at the i-mode center and SMS is stored at the SMS

center. To receive them, deactivate Self mode and check new

messages/SMS.

• If a call arrives while Self mode is activated, a missed call icon

does not appear on the Stand-by display after the Self mode is

deactivated.

Data access lock

Restricting Display of

Phonebook and Schedule etc.

You can lock speciﬁed functions to reject the use unless the

Terminal security code is entered, or restrict the use of the

FOMA terminal.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶ "Lock"

▶ "Data access lock" ▶ Enter the Terminal

security code ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Data access lock]

Set whether to activate the Data access lock.

[Phonebook]*

Set to disable the Phonebook until the Terminal security code is

entered.

• In the Redial list or logs, the phone number or mail address of the

caller/sender will be displayed instead of the name saved in the

Phonebook.

• Receiving Phonebook entries using infrared communication

becomes unavailable.

[Data Box]*

Set to disable the ﬁles in Data Box until the Terminal security code

is entered.

• Receiving data such as images or melodies to be saved in Data

Box using infrared communication becomes unavailable.

[Record message]*

Set to disable the Record message until the Terminal security code

is entered.

• If the Record message is set to "ON" and locked, does not

appear in the Stand-by display even when a message is recorded.

125

Security Settings

Continue on the next page

[Schedule]*

Set to disable the Schedule function until the Terminal security code

is entered.

• An alarm set for a Schedule event does not sound.

• Receiving schedule events using infrared communication becomes

unavailable.

[i-mode]*

Set to disable the i-mode function until the Terminal security code is

entered.

• i-mode connections from other than the i-mode menu screen, such

as "Web To" become unavailable.

• i-Channel ticker is not displayed.

• Pattern deﬁnition for the scanning function becomes unavailable.

• Receiving bookmarks using infrared communication becomes

unavailable.

• Communication from i-αppli is available.

• i-αppli update is available from i-αppli menu.

[i-αppli]*

Set to disable the i-αppli until the Terminal security code is entered.

• Receiving i-αppli data using infrared communication becomes

unavailable.

• If i-αppli is set as the Stand-by display, it will disappear from the

Stand-by display.

* Can be set when "Data access lock" is set to "ON".

I

[Done]

Note

• You can access the functions by entering the Terminal security

code when:

- You access a function from the Main menu or Custom menu.

- You press a key assigned to access the function in Stand-by.

- You access a function from the New task screen (P349) or

Task list screen (P350).

Live Character Park lock

Restricting Display of Live

Character Park

You can restrict the display of Live Character Park unless

the Terminal security code is entered.

• Only available to display the Live Character Park screen from the

Stand-by display. If performed from the Live Character Park screen,

the screen returns straight to the Live Character Park screen.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶ "Lock" ▶

"Live Character Park lock" ▶ Enter the Terminal

security code

Perform this operation to switch ON and OFF.

Touch lock

Preventing the Touch Panel/Key

Misoperations

Disable the use by locking touch panel and keys at the time

of the FOMA terminal in Turn View Style mode.

Setting Touch Lock



While the FOMA terminal is in Turn View Style

mode ▶

Releasing Touch Lock



While the FOMA terminal is in Turn View Style

mode ▶ Touch

(for 1+ seconds)/ (for

1+ seconds)

• You can also release the Touch lock by opening the FOMA

terminal.

Continued on next page

126

Security Settings

Note

• While 1Seg, Camera, or music playback function (except BGM),

etc. is in use, Touch lock is not applied.

• If a call arrives during Touch lock, the Incoming call screen, etc.

appears and operations become available temporarily.

• During background playback, you can adjust the volume by

pressing

even if Touch lock is set.

• If Auto touch lock (P126) is set, Touch lock is applied

automatically after a certain period of time.

• Touch lock cannot be set in some occasions such as during a

call, while making a call, or communicating.

Auto touch lock

Automatically Setting Touch

Lock

You can automatically lock and disable touch operations and

keys if the FOMA terminal does not operate for a certain

period of time with the FOMA terminal in Turn View Style

mode.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶ "Auto

touch lock" ▶ Select a lock method

OFF : Do not activate Auto touch lock.

After 15 sec. : Activate Touch lock 15 seconds after the last

operation of the FOMA terminal in Turn View

Style mode.

After 30 sec. : Activate Touch lock 30 seconds after the last

operation of the FOMA terminal in Turn View

Style mode.

After 60 sec. : Activate Touch lock 60 seconds after the last

operation of the FOMA terminal in Turn View

Style mode.

When LCD oﬀ : Activate Touch lock when the display turns oﬀ

in Turn View Style mode.

Display Call/Mail logs

Setting Display for Redial and

Received Calls

You can disable the display of redial, received call, sent mail,

and received mail logs.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶

"Display Call/Mail logs" ▶ Enter the Terminal

security code



Move the cursor to an item to set ▶

[ON/OFF]

The items set to "OFF" cannot be displayed.

Redial logs : Set whether to display the redial logs.

Rcv. call logs : Set whether to display the received call logs.

Sent mail logs : Set whether to display the sent mail logs.

Rcv. Mail logs : Set whether to display the received mail logs.

Note

• If "Rcv. call logs" is set to "OFF", the recorded message list is

not displayed.

127

Security Settings

Continue on the next page

Secret mode

Displaying Information Set as

Secret

You can set whether to display secret Phonebook entries/

Schedule events.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Lock/Security" ▶ "Secret

mode" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶

Select a Secret mode setting

OFF : Display only general data other than secret

data.

Secret mode : Display secret and general data.

Secret data only

: Display only secret data.

Reject on list

Rejecting a Call from Speciﬁed

Number

You can reject calls from the speciﬁc parties saved on the

list.

• This function is available only when the caller sends caller ID.

• It is recommended that you set the Caller ID request service

concurrently.

Saving Phone Numbers to Reject

You can save and edit up to 20 phone numbers to reject.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ "Accept/Reject call" ▶ Enter

the Terminal security code ▶ "Edit reject list"

Reject list screen

Continued on next page

128

Security Settings



Select an empty list number ▶ Enter a phone

number to reject ▶ "Silent"/"Disconnect call"

Silent : Mute the ring tone.

Disconnect call : Incoming call actions are not performed.

•

[Search]: Invoke a phone number to reject from the

Phonebook.

Deleting a saved phone number

Select a number to delete on the Reject list screen ▶ select

"Delete".

Editing a saved phone number

Select a number to edit on the Reject list screen ▶ select "Edit".

Setting the Reject on List

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ "Accept/Reject call" ▶ Enter

the Terminal security code ▶ "Accept/Reject

set" ▶ "Reject on list"

To cancel the rejection

Select "Accept" on the screen after selecting "Accept/

Reject set".

Note

• When the Reject on list is activated, and a call from a party

saved as "Disconnect call" arrives, appears on the Stand-by

display and the call is recorded in the Received call log as a

missed call. The other party hears a busy signal.

• i-mode mail or SMS messages are received regardless of the

rejection settings.

Reject all calls

Rejecting All Incoming Calls

You can mute the ring tone for all incoming calls or

disconnect calls before incoming call actions are performed.

M

▶

"Settings"

▶

"Call/VT/Dialing"

▶

"Incoming

call"

▶

"Accept/Reject call"

▶

Enter the Terminal

security code

▶

"Accept/Reject set"

▶

"Reject all

calls"

▶

"Silent"/"Disconnect call"

Silent : Mute the ring tone for all incoming calls.

Disconnect call : Do not perform incoming call actions for all

incoming calls.

To cancel the rejection

Select "Accept" on the screen after selecting "Accept/

Reject set".

Note

• When a call arrives while "Disconnect call" is set, the call is not

notiﬁed and appears on the Stand-by display. The call is

recorded in the Received call log as a missed call. The other

party hears a busy signal.

• i-mode mail or SMS messages are received regardless of the

rejection settings.

129

Security Settings

Continue on the next page

Anonymous caller

Setting Actions when Calls

Arrive from Anonymous Callers

You can set whether to accept or reject calls without caller

ID per reason for anonymous call.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ "Anonymous caller" ▶

Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Perform the

following operations

[User unset]

Set options for incoming calls without caller ID at the caller's will.

Response : Set response method for anonymous caller.

Disable : Cancel the setting.

Reject call : Reject incoming calls.

Silent alert : Mute the ring tone. You can select an image for the

incoming call from images saved in "My picture" of

"Data Box".→P296

Alert setting : Select an image and ring tone for the incoming call

from data in "Data Box".

Incoming call

image : Set an image for anonymous caller.

▶ "Terminal setting"/"Image"/"i-motion" ▶ Select an

image

Ring tone : Set ring tone for anonymous caller.

▶ "Terminal setting"/"MUSIC"/"i-motion"/"Melody" ▶

Select a ring tone

• If Chaku-Uta Full

saved in "MUSIC" is selected, go

to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song as a

Ring Tone" (P266).

[Pay phone]

Set options for calls made from payphones.

• Set items and operations are the same as in "User unset".

[Not support]

Set options for calls for which caller ID cannot be sent such as calls

made from overseas or from a land-line phone via forwarding services.

(Caller ID may be sent depending on the carrier.)

• Set items and operations are the same as in "User unset".

Note

• If an anonymous call set to "Reject call" arrives while the

Anonymous caller is activated, the call is not notiﬁed and

appears on the Stand-by display. The call is recorded in

Received call log as a missed call. The other party hears a

busy signal. Calls are rejected even when the Voice mail or

Call forwarding service is activated. However, if Ringing time is

set to 0 second or the FOMA terminal is out of service area or

turned power oﬀ, network services are activated.

• i-mode mail or SMS messages are received regardless of the

rejection settings.

• If "Select ring tone" (P100) or "Call & Mail image" (P109)

is set with a moving picture/i-motion with audio/video for a

speciﬁc caller and change either of them, the default sound or

image, even if the response method is set to "Alert setting", is

played for "Ring tone" or "Incoming call image" with the setting

unchanged.

• If a moving picture/i-motion with video/sound is set as either

"Incoming call image" or "Ring tone", the same moving picture/

i-motion is set for the other item.

• If the Caller ID request service is activated, it takes priority over

the settings of "Anonymous caller". The caller hears the voice

guidance for a Caller ID request.

130

Security Settings

Set mute ring(sec.)

Muting Ring Tone for a Caller

Unset in Phonebook

You can set the FOMA terminal not to ring immediately when

a call arrives from a caller not saved to the Phonebook or

without caller ID. This prevents nuisance calls such as "one-

ring call" that are disconnected after a short ringing time.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Sounds&Vibration" ▶

"Set mute ring(sec.)" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Set mute ring time]

Set whether to enable the Set mute ring time.

[Mute time]*

Set the time for which the ring tone is muted before the ringing

action starts between 1 and 99 seconds.

[Missed call logs]*

Set whether to display the Received call logs for the call that was

terminated in the time speciﬁed in "Mute time".

* Can be set when "Set mute ring time" is set to "ON".

I

[Done]

Note

• When a relevant call arrives while this function is activated,

incoming call actions, such as sounding the ring tone, do not

take place for the set time; however, the Incoming call screen

appears.

• This function operates even when "Secret mode" is set to "OFF"

or a call from a operates Phonebook entry arrives.

• If this option is set longer than the response time of the Voice

mail/Call forwarding service, network services start without the

ringing action.

• If this option is set longer than "To answer" time of "Record

message", the Record message starts without the ringing

action.

• You cannot set "Set mute ring time" when "Reject unknown" is

set to "ON".

Reject unknown

Rejecting a Call from a Caller

Unset in Phonebook

You can set to reject calls from callers not saved to the

Phonebook or without caller ID.

• It is recommended that you set the Caller ID request service

concurrently.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Call/VT/Dialing" ▶

"Incoming call" ▶ "Accept/Reject call" ▶ Enter

the Terminal security code ▶ Move the cursor

to "Reject unknown" ▶

[ON/OFF]

131

Security Settings

Continue on the next page

Note

• The FOMA terminal does not perform incoming call actions for

a rejected incoming call, however, the call is recorded in the

Received call log. The other party hears a busy signal.

• Calls are rejected even when the Voice mail or Call forwarding

service is activated. However, if the ringing time is set to 0

second, network services start.

• i-mode or SMS messages are received regardless of the

rejection settings.

• You cannot activate "Reject unknown" when "Set mute ring

time" is set to "ON" or "Data access lock" is set to "ON" with

"Phonebook" marked.

Data Security Service

Using Data Security Service

This service enables you to back up the Phonebook, images

and mails ("Saved data") at the DOCOMO's Data Center so

that the Saved data can be restored if you lose your FOMA

terminal or when changing models. Also, you can notify all

connected parties of your mail address change at a time. No

packet communication charges apply for sending the multi-

address notice mail. If you have a PC (My docomo), you can

use this service more conveniently.

• For details about the Data Security Service, see "Mobile Phone

User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

• The Data Security Service is a fee-based service requiring a

separate subscription (The i-mode contract is necessary for this

subscription).

Saving the FOMA Terminal Phonebook at

the Data Security Center

M

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Data security service" ▶

"Connect to center" ▶ Enter the Terminal

security code ▶ "Yes"

Note

•

You cannot save the UIM Phonebook.

•

If another Phonebook is saved already, the data is updated.

•

Note that if you use this service after deleting the Phonebook entries

in the FOMA terminal, the Phonebook entries saved at the Data

Center are deleted likewise.

•

You can restore the Phonebook or use Set auto-update from ｉモ

ードの電話帳お預かりサイト (i-mode's Data Security Service). "iMenu"

▶

"English"

▶ "My Menu"

▶

select "電話帳お預かり (Data Security

Service)".

Displaying Exchanging History

Display exchanging history with the Data Center.

M

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Data security service" ▶

"Exchanging history" ▶ Select an exchanging

history

• Move the cursor to an exchanging history and press

[Menu]

to select "Delete one" or "Delete all".

Setting whether to Send Images Set for the Phonebook

Set whether to save images set for the Phonebook entries to

the Data Center.

M

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Data security service" ▶

Move the cursor to "Sndg img in phonebook" ▶

[ON/OFF]

132

Security Settings

Saving Images/Mails to the Data Center

Example: To save images saved in "My picture"

M

▶ "Data Box" ▶ "My picture" ▶ Move the

cursor to a folder ▶

[Open]

M

[Menu] ▶ "Store in center" ▶ Mark images

to save ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the Terminal

security code ▶ "Yes"

Note

• Only images and mail saved in the FOMA terminal can be saved.

• SMS reports cannot be saved.

• An image larger than 100KB cannot be saved.

• Files attached to i-mode mail will not be saved.

• SMS with Korean text cannot be saved.

Reset Settings

Resetting Various Functions

You can reset settings of various functions to the defaults.

• For functions that can be reset to the defaults, refer to "Menu List"

(P430).

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶"Reset/Clear" ▶

"Reset Settings" ▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal

security code

Note

• Perform "Reset Settings" with the battery level suﬃcient.

• During "Reset Settings", functions/communication cannot be

used.

Clear memory

Deleting Saved Data All at Once

You can delete saved data.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Reset/Clear" ▶

"Clear memory"



Mark items to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes" ▶

Enter the Terminal security code

■ Data to be deleted

Item Data

Pre-installed

data Default data in "Data Box"*1

User data All data other than pre-installed data in "Data Box"

PIM data Data in "Phonebook"*2/"Schedule"/"Text memo"/

"Sketch memo"/"To do list"/"Remembering

dates"/"1Seg", data in Inbox/Outbox*3, data in

Bookmark, Screen memo, URL history, settings

in Additional service and Additional guide of the

network service

*1 Kisekae Tool data is not deleted.

*2 The total calls cost is not deleted.

*3 Inbox/Outbox folders, MessageR/F folders, and mail-connected

i-αppli folder are not deleted.

133

Security Settings

Continue on the next page

Deleting data saved on the microSD card

You can delete all data saved on the microSD card.

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "Reset/Clear" ▶ "Clear microSD"

▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

Note

• Data saved on the UIM are not deleted.

• " Welcome Mail " and "Welcome ドコモ動画 " are deleted.

<Pre-installed data>

• Some ﬁles that are used for default settings are not deleted.

• The use of WOW LG

If you deleted pre-installed i-αppli, Deco-mail pictures, Deco-mail

pictograms, wallpapers (the Stand-by display), frames, stamps,

melodies, or i-motion and want to restore it, visit site, "WOW LG"

in iMenu and you can download.*

"iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト (Menu list)" ▶ "ケータイ電話メーカー

(Mobile Phone Manufacturers)" ▶ "WOW LG"

*Packet communication charges apply for downloading.

Other Security Settings

In addition to the security settings described in this chapter,

the following functions/services are available.

Function name/Service name

Purpose

Reference

IC card lock

To prevent unauthorized

use of the IC card function

P292

Nuisance call blocking

service To reject "nuisance call" P397

Caller ID request service To reject a call from a

caller without caller ID P398

Function name/Service name

Purpose

Reference

Software Update To update software on

the FOMA terminal when

necessary

P459

Scanning function

To protect the FOMA

terminal from harmful data

P464

Receive option To accept only necessary

mails out of mass mails P149

i-mode Disaster Message

Board Service

See "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version".

Change your mail address

Spam Mail Prevention

(Reject Mail with URLs)

( Reject/Receive Mail

Settings)

(Kantan Mail Settings)

( Reject Mass i-mode Mail

Senders)

(SMS Rejection Settings)

( Reject Unsolicited Ad Mail)

( Conﬁrm Settings)

Suspending/reactivating

mail functions

Limiting mail size

Keitai-Osagashi Service

imadoco kantan search

(Location Search Service

Lite)

Continued on next page

134

Security Settings

Note

• The order of precedence when the function to prevent nuisance

calls is set concurrently is the following:

a "Nuisance call blocking service"

b "Reject on list"

c "Reject unknown"

d "Accept/Reject call"

e "Anonymous caller"

135

Mail

Mail Functions of FOMA Terminal ･･･････････････････ 136

i-mode Mail ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 136

Displaying Mail Menu ････････････････････ Mail menu 137

Composing i-mode Mail/Deco-Mail

Composing and Sending i-mode Mail

･････････････････････････ Compose/Send i-mode mail 138

Creating and Sending Deco-mail ･･････････Deco-mail 141

Using a Template to Create Deco-mail ････ Template 144

Attaching a File ････････････････････････ Attachment 146

Receiving and Operating i-mode Mail

When You Receive i-mode Mail

･･････････････････････････Receive mail automatically 147

Receiving i-mode Mail Selectively ･･･ Receive option 149

Checking New i-mode Mail ･･･Check new messages 150

Replying to i-mode Mail ････････Reply to i-mode mail 151

Forwarding i-mode Mail to Other Address

･････････････････････････････････Forward i-mode mail 151

Adding Mail Addresses/Phone Numbers to

Phonebook ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 152

Playing/Saving an Attached File from i-mode

Mail ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 152

Operating Mailbox

Displaying Mail in Inbox/Outbox or Unsent

Messages ･･････････Inbox/Outbox/Unsent message 154

Using Mail History

･･･････････ Received mails/Sent mails/Recent mails 166

Conﬁguring Mail Settings

Setting Mail Functions of the FOMA Terminal

･････････････････････････････････････････ Mail setting 168

Using Message Services

When You Receive Message ･････ Receive Message 172

Checking New Message ･････Check new messages 173

Displaying New Message ････MessageR/MessageF 174

Using SMS

Composing and Sending SMS

････････････････････････････････ Compose/Send SMS 176

When You Receive SMS Messages ･･･Receive SMS 177

Checking New SMS Messages ････Check new SMS 177

Setting SMS ･････････････････････････ SMS Settings 178

136

Mail

Mail Functions of FOMA Terminal

The FOMA terminal provides 2 mail types: i-mode mail and

SMS.

• Using i-mode mail requires i-mode subscription.

• Using SMS requires no i-mode subscription.

• If you send i-mode mail or SMS containing some symbols

(, , etc.) or pictographs, they may not be displayed properly on

a mobile phone other than i-mode terminal or on a PC.

• Mail function in Korean is supported only by SMS. If you receive

e-mail in Korean via i-mode mail, text will not be displayed properly.

i-mode Mail

Upon subscription to i-mode, you can send and receive

e-mail via the Internet, as well as between i-mode terminals.

In addition to the message text, a total of 2MB in 10 ﬁles

(pictures or moving pictures, etc.) can be attached. Also,

Deco-mail is supported, in which you can change the color

and size of message text or background color. You can also

use Deco-mail pictogram to send expressive mail easily.

• For details about i-mode mail, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version".

SMS

You can send and receive text messages using only mobile

phone numbers without subscription to i-mode.

Sending→P176, Receiving→P177, Checking→P177

SMS Addresses

The SMS address is the "subscribed mobile phone number".

•

You can send and receive SMS to/from terminals that use international

carriers other than DOCOMO. Visit the DOCOMO International Services

website for available countries and international carriers.

Number of Characters that Can be Sent or Received

The number of characters that can be sent and received in

SMS is as follows:

Receiver 21 characters (including "+")

SMS text Japanese (70 characters), Korean (70 characters)

English (160 characters)

Sending and Receiving SMS in Korean

You can send and receive SMS in Korean to/from terminals

that support Korean.

•

Use L-03B to send and receive international SMS in Korean to/from

Korean-support terminals of Korea and other international carriers.

Visit the DOCOMO International Services website for international

carriers that support international SMS. The number of characters

that can be sent depends on the situation of each recipient carrier.

For details, contact recipient carriers.

• SMS texts in Korean sent to a terminal which does not support

Korean will not be displayed properly on the terminal.

• Switching input modes in SMS message to Korean→P178

• Entering in Korean→P382

137

Mail

Continue on the next page

When SMS Cannot be Received

SMS delivered to the SMS center will be immediately sent

to your FOMA terminal. However, when your FOMA terminal

is turned oﬀ or out of service area, the SMS is stored in the

SMS center.

Note

• The maximum storage period of SMS in the SMS center is 72

hours. You can specify the storage period from "SMS validity

period".→P178

• Expired SMS is automatically deleted.

• SMS stored in the SMS center can be received by "Check new

SMS".→P177

• When SMS stored in the SMS center is delivered, it is deleted

from the SMS center.

Mail menu

Displaying Mail Menu



Stand-by display ▶

Mail menu screen



Perform the following operations

[Inbox]

Display the Inbox list screen.→P154

[Compose message]

Create new i-mode mail.→P138

[Unsent message]

Display the Unsent mail list screen.→P155

[Outbox]

Display the Outbox list screen.→P155

[Check new messages]

Receive i-mode mail stored in the i-mode center by checking new

messages.→P150

[Receive option]

Check subjects of i-mode mail stored in the i-mode center, and select

mail to be received, or deleted without reception from the i-mode

center.→P149

[SMS]

Compose new SMS, or receive SMS stored in the SMS center by

checking new SMS.→P176, P177

[Template]

Display a list of saved templates.→P145

[Mail setting]

Set mail functions.→P168

138

Mail

Compose/Send i-mode mail

Composing and Sending i-mode

Mail



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Compose

message"

Compose

message screen

Receiver

Subject

Attachment

The total number of

bytes of characters

and decoration in

the message text

Message



Select ﬁeld ▶ "Direct input" ▶ Enter the

address

• Up to 50 half-pitch characters can be entered.

• The address can be selected from Sent message log, Received

message log, Phonebook, or Mail group.→P139

• Also, press

[Ph. book] to select an address from the

Phonebook.



Select ﬁeld ▶ Enter the subject

• Up to 15 full-pitch or 30 half-pitch characters can be entered.



Select [Message] ﬁeld ▶ Enter the message

• Up to 5,000 full-pitch or 10,000

half-pitch characters can be entered.

Message text

entry screen

I

[Send]

• T

[Save]: Save as unsent message.

Note

• To decorate message text→P141

• To send with attachments→P146

• You can insert a line feed in the message text. The line feed is

counted as 1 full-pitch character.

• A space inserted by pressing

is counted as 1 half-pitch

character.

• Characters may not be sent to the receiver depending on the

signal strength.

• Half-pitch katakana and pictographs except for mail exchanged

between i-mode terminals may not be displayed correctly.

• The secret code is added automatically when mail is sent with

the secret code set. However, the address of the sent mail

does not display the added secret code.

• Even if i-mode mail is sent successfully, an error message

indicating failure of sending mail may appear depending on the

signal strength.

139

Mail

Continue on the next page

• If you use Deco-mail pictogram (Picto. D) in mail, the mail is

automatically sent as Deco-mail.

• If you send a mail with pictographs added to the subject or

message text to the other carrier's mobile phone, they will

be automatically replaced with the similar pictographs that

the carrier/mobile phone supports. However, they may not be

displayed properly depending on the mobile phone type or its

functions.

• i-mode mail that is successfully sent will be saved in Outbox.

If the total number or total size of the stored sent mail exceeds

the limit, the oldest mail will be deleted ﬁrst. Protect sent mail

that you want to keep.

Compose Message Screen Sub Menu



Compose message screen (P138) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Send]

Send mail.

[Auto send]

Send i-mode mail that was composed in out of service area

automatically when the terminal moves to the place where signal can

be received.

[Save]

Save mail being created or edited in Unsent message.

[Address]

Add address : Send mail to multiple addresses (multi-address

transmission). Up to 5 addresses can be added.

Sent msg. log : Select an address from Sent message log.

Rcv. msg. log : Select an address from Received message log.

Phonebook : Select an address from Phonebook.

Mail group : Select an address from Mail group.

Direct input : Enter the receiver address directly.

Delete address : Delete a selected receiver address.

Change rcv. type : Change the selected receiver address type.

Change to To : Change the selected receiver to To. The mail

address entered in the To ﬁeld will be shown to

the recipient.

Change to Cc : Change the selected receiver to Cc. You can

specify additional addresses to send a copy of

the same mail to other recipients in addition to

the direct recipients. The mail address entered in

the Cc ﬁeld will be shown to other recipients.

• The mail address may not be displayed

depending on the recipient's mobile phone,

device or mail software.

Change to Bcc : Change the selected receiver to Bcc. You can

specify addresses to hide from other recipients.

The mail addresses entered in the Bcc ﬁeld will

not be shown to other recipients.

[Attachment]

Attach, view/play, or delete ﬁles.→P146

[Template]

Load template : Load a template to create Deco-mail.→P144.

Save as template : Save the current Deco-mail as a template.

[Header/Sign.]

Attach header : Attach the set header.

Attach sign. : Attach the set signature.

Continued on next page

140

Mail

[Delete body]

Delete the message text.

Note

• When selecting a Phonebook entry with multiple mail addresses

saved, you need to further specify which addresses are to be

added for recipients.

• If the message text is already entered, a conﬁrmation whether

to delete the text appears. To load the template, select "Yes".

Message Text Entry Screen Sub Menu



Message text entry screen (P138) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Decorate mail]

Open the palette to select the decoration to Deco-mail.→P142

[Common phrases]

Enter or edit Common phrases.→P381

[Edit character]

Select a character or decoration in message text to copy, cut, or

paste. Undo the last entry or pasting of characters.→P385

[Edit user dict.]

Edit a dictionary stored in the FOMA terminal.→P387

[Quote]

Quote the contents of a Phonebook entry, etc.→P380

[Input setting]

Conﬁgure the character entry settings.→P380

[Special input]

Enter a space, line feed, or enter characters using Kuten code.

→P380

[Header/Sign.]

Header : Attach the set header.

Signature : Attach the set signature.

[Jump]

Top : Move to the top of the displayed message text.

Bottom : Move to the end of the displayed message text.

[Image info.]

Display detailed information about an image behind the cursor.

[Preview]

Open the preview screen of the message text.

141

Mail

Continue on the next page

Deco-mail

Creating and Sending Deco-mail

You can create your own designed mail by adding

decorations such as changing font size, font color or

background color, or inserting images while editing an i-mode

mail message.

• Deco-mail up to 100KB can be sent.

• Up to 20 images within 90KB can be inserted.

• Some i-mode terminals may receive Deco-mail that is larger than

10,000 bytes as mail containing a URL to browse.

Message text

entry screen

The set decoration

appears at the

cursor position.



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Compose

message"



Enter the receiver and subject

• Entering the receiver and subject→P138



Select [Message] ﬁeld ▶

[Deco]

Palette display

screen



Use the palette to decorate the message text

• Decorating→P142

To specify a decoration before entering characters

For operations, refer to "Specifying a Decoration before

Entering Characters" (P143).

To enter characters before specifying a decoration

For operations, refer to "Entering Characters before

Specifying a Decoration" (P144).

M

[Close]

To view the Deco-mail message

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Preview".

C

[Set] ▶

[Send]

Continued on next page

142

Mail

Note

• If you exchange Deco-mail with Deco-mail incompatible i-mode

terminals, the decorations may not be displayed correctly.

• After decorated text is deleted, the decoration data may remain

and this may result in a reduction in the number of characters

available to enter in the text ﬁeld. Cancel any decoration before

deleting the text. When you delete the text by pressing

for 1+ seconds, the text including any decoration data will be

deleted.

• If a template contains an image that cannot be sent via mail,

the image may be deleted.

Decorating



Message text entry screen (P138) ▶ g[Deco]

•

[Close]: Switch from palette functions to character entry.



Perform the following operations

[ (Insert image)]

Data box : Insert an image saved in "My picture" to

the message text.

▶ Move the cursor to the folder ▶

[Open] ▶ Select an image

Still image photography : Capture and insert a still image.

▶ Capture an image ▶

[Save] (If

capturing in Turn View Style mode, )

[ (Background color)]

Set a background color of the message text.

[ (Insert line)]

Insert a line in message text.

[ (Edit decoration)]

Specify the range of text to decorate.→P144

• This option cannot be selected when no text has been entered in

the message.

[ (Char decoration)]

Select decorations to apply to characters.→P143

[ (Cancel decoration)]

Delete decoration in the line at the cursor.

[ (My decoration)]

Apply My decoration : Apply a character decoration which is saved

beforehand.

Edit My decoration : Save your favorite character decoration.

→P143.

[ (Undo)]

Restore a set decoration to the previous state.

[ (Reset all settings)]

Delete all set decorations.

143

Mail

Continue on the next page

Note

• When characters with "Telop" or "Swing" set are selected and

copied or cut, "Telop" or "Swing" will not take eﬀect.

• Up to 90KB or 20 images can be inserted. The number of

available attachments may be reduced depending on the ﬁle

size. If the maximum number of images or size is exceeded, a

warning message appears.

• By default, images are saved in the "Decomail picture" and

"Decomail picto" folders.

• If the same image is inserted more than once, it is considered

that one image is inserted.

Specifying a Decoration before Entering Characters



Message text entry screen (P138) ▶

[Deco] ▶ Select (Char decoration) ▶

Perform the following operations

[ (Font color)]

Set the color for characters.

• You can also select a color from the palette by pressing

[Palette].

[ (Font size)]

Set a font size.

[ (Blink)]

Set the text to blink.

• To cancel blinking, select (Blink).

[ (Move/Align)]

Set the display of the text.

• To cancel the setting, select (Move Align (Default)).

(Telop) : Set the text to display from right to left as a telop.

• Characters entered between and appear as

a telop.

(Swing) : Set the text to swing.

• Characters entered between and swing.

(Left) : Align characters to be entered or images to be

inserted to the left.

(Center) : Align characters to be entered or images to be

inserted to the center.

(Right) : Align characters to be entered or images to be

inserted to the right.

C

[Set] ▶ Enter characters

Note

• The size of Deco-mail pictogram cannot be changed.

• Pictographs are also displayed in the speciﬁed color. To

restore the default color, select on the right of (Text color

(Unchange)) from the color palette.

<Blink>

• When characters set to blink are displayed on the preview

screen or the Compose message screen, the characters stop

blinking after a certain period of time.

144

Mail

Entering Characters before Specifying a Decoration



Message text entry screen (P138) ▶

[Deco] ▶ Select (Edit decoration)



Use

to move the cursor to start point ▶

[Select]

•

[SelAll]: Select the entire message.

•

[Top]: Move to the top of the message text.

•

[End]: Move to the end of the message text.



Use

to move the cursor to end point ▶

[Select] ▶ Specify a decoration

• You can also decorate text by performing the following steps:

[Menu] (for 1+ seconds) ▶ Use

to move the cursor to

start point ▶

[Select] ▶ Use

to move the cursor to end

point ▶

[Select] ▶ "Decoration" ▶ Specify a Decoration

Selecting "Cancel decoration" deletes the decoration applied

to the text.

Template

Using a Template to Create

Deco-mail

Templates are form data for Deco-mail with decorations

such as the font size and image insertion already set. In

addition to the pre-installed templates, you can use templates

downloaded from sites.



Compose message screen (P138)

▶

[Menu]

▶

"Template"

▶

"Load template"

▶

"Yes"

• If the mail has entered message text, the entered text will be

deleted and the template will be loaded.



Select a template

The selected template is inserted in the message text.

• To select a template while viewing, press I[Preview] and

switch templates using J.

• You can edit the message text after inserting a template.

Creating a New Template

Create user-deﬁned templates. Created templates are saved

in "Template" of Mail menu.



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Template" ▶

[Menu] ▶ "New Template"



Create templates

• Decorating→P142



Create a template ▶

[Set] ▶ Edit the title ▶

[Set] ▶ "Yes"

Note

• If message text in the mail is not decorated, a template cannot

be saved.

145

Mail

Continue on the next page

Editing Templates

You can edit user-deﬁned templates.



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Template"

Template list

screen



Select a template ▶

[Edit] ▶ Edit the

template

• Decorating→P142

C

[Set] ▶ "Overwrite save"/"New save"

Overwrite save : Save the edited template over the source

template.

New save : Save the edited template as a new template.



Edit the title ▶ C[Set]



"Yes"

Template List Screen Sub Menu



Template list screen (P145) ▶ Move the

cursor to a template ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Compose mail]

Compose a new message with the selected template.

[New Template]

Create a new template.→P144

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected template.

Del. Selected : Select and delete templates.

▶ Mark templates to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or "Deselect

all".

Delete all : Delete all templates.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Edit title]

Edit the title of the selected template.→P145

[Detail info]

Display the properties of the selected template.

146

Mail

Attachment

Attaching a File

You can send i-mode mail with images or melodies attached.

• Up to 10 ﬁles, a total of 2MB, can be attached. The number of

available attachments may be reduced depending on the ﬁle size.

• The following ﬁle types can be attached:

- Images (JPEG, GIF)

- Moving picture/i-motion

- Motion Oekaki

image

- Melody

- Phonebook

- Schedule event

- To do

- Bookmark

- Other ﬁles on microSD

• A ﬁle prohibited to be attached to mail or to be output from the

FOMA terminal cannot be attached.



Compose message screen (P138) ▶ Select

ﬁeld ▶ Perform the following operations

[Image]

My picture : Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data

box".→P296

Start camera : Capture and attach a still image.

▶ Capture a still image ▶

[Save] (If capturing in

Turn View Style mode, )

[Movie]

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in

"i-motion" of "Data Box".

Start camera : Capture and attach a moving picture.

▶ Capture a moving picture ▶

[Save] (If

capturing in Turn View Style mode, )

[Motion Oekaki]

microSD : Select a Motion Oekaki

image or Flash movie

saved in "OTHER" folder of microSD card.

Start drawing : Start Motion Oekaki

and attach a created image.

[Melody]

Select a melody saved in "Melody" of "Data Box".

▶ Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open] ▶ Select a melody

[Phonebook]

Select a Phonebook entry.

[Calendar]

Select a schedule event saved in the FOMA terminal.

▶ Select a date ▶ Select a Schedule event

[To do]

Select To do saved in the FOMA terminal.

[Bookmark]

i-mode : Attach a bookmark saved in "Bookmark" folder of

"i-mode".

Full browser : Attach a bookmark saved in "Bookmark" folder of "Full

browser".

147

Mail

Continue on the next page

[Others]

Attach a ﬁle saved in "OTHER" folder of a microSD card.

Note

• GIF images and attached melodies cannot be received with an

i-mode terminal using the mova service.

• A moving picture/i-motion larger than 2MB cannot be attached.

Reduce the size under "Clipping" to the available size before

attaching it.→P312

• Depending on the recipient terminal, a moving picture may

be displayed coarsely or as sequential still images. When

sending a moving picture/i-motion larger than 500KB to i-mode

terminals other than 2MB-compatible ones, a moving picture

captured with following setting is recommended.

Size restriction: 500KB, Select size: QCIF (176×144),

Quality: Super ﬁne

• Some i-motion may not be attached.

Playing/Displaying/Deleting an Attached File



Compose message screen (P138) ▶ Select a

desired attachment ﬁeld with a ﬁle attached ▶

Perform the following operations

[Select]: Play/display the selected attachment.

[Delete]: Delete the selected attachment.

Note

• To add another attachment, select an ﬁeld where no ﬁle is

attached.

Receive mail automatically

When You Receive i-mode Mail

When the FOMA terminal is in the service area, i-mode mail is

automatically sent from the i-mode center.



After the i-mode mail is received, appears

at the top of the screen

When the reception is completed, the

Receive results screen appears.

• The previous screen returns if no operation

is performed for approximately 30

seconds.

• Selecting "Mail" displays the Inbox list

screen.

• Until the detail screen of received i-mode

mail is displayed, appears at the top of

the screen and (the number indicates

the number of messages) appears in

Stand-by.

Receive results

screen

Note

• When new i-mode mail is delivered, other i-mode mail and

MessageR/F stored in the i-mode center are received at the

same time.

• When receive option for i-mode mail has been set, sent i-mode

mail is stored in the i-mode center. You can check the subject

of i-mode mail stored in the center before selecting and

receiving the mail.→P149

• If received mail was sent from a terminal that is capable

of setting To, Cc, or Bcc, you can check how the mail was

addressed to you on the FOMA terminal.→P156

• Melodies, moving pictures, and still images can be received

as attachments to i-mode mail. Incompatible ﬁles may be

automatically deleted at the i-mode center. If an attached ﬁle is

deleted, "添付ファイル削除 (Attached ﬁle deleted)" is added below

the subject.

Continued on next page

148

Mail

• Files attached to a mail cannot be saved in the FOMA terminal

when the FOMA terminal does not support the ﬁle type. Those

ﬁles can be saved to a microSD card or forwarded.→P151

• Up to 100KB of i-mode mail including attachments can be

automatically downloaded. Attachments larger than 100KB can

be manually downloaded from the i-mode center.→P152

• You can set whether to receive attached melodies or images

under "Receive attach ﬁle".→P168

• If the size of a received mail exceeds the number of characters

(data capacity) set under "iMenu" ▶ "English" ▶ "Options" ▶

"Mail Settings" ▶ "Other Settings" ▶ "Limit Mail Size", you can

select and download the attached ﬁle or the data whose name

appears in the message text.→P152

• If the total number or total size of the received mail (i-mode mail

and SMS) stored in the FOMA terminal exceeds the limit, the

oldest read message will be deleted ﬁrst. Protect the received

messages you want to keep.

• Incoming mail is saved at the i-mode center when:

- Power is oﬀ - A videophone call in progress

- Self mode is activated - The terminal is out of service area

- Omakase Lock

- "Receive option set" is set to "ON"

- Inbox is full with protected or unread mail

• When mail is kept at the i-mode center, or appears.

When the terminal power is oﬀ or the terminal is out of service

area, these icons may not be displayed even there is i-mode

mail at the i-mode center.

• If multiple i-mode mail messages or MessageR/F are received

concurrently, the ring tone set to the last received i-mode mail

or MessageR/F sounds.

• By default, " Welcome Mail " and "Welcome ドコモ動画 "

are saved in Inbox. No communication charge applied for this

mail.

• You cannot reply to " Welcome Mail " and "Welcome ドコモ

動画 ".

Displaying New i-mode Mail



Receive results screen (P147) ▶ "Mail" ▶

Select a folder



Select mail to be displayed

• Displaying/playing/saving/deleting an

attached ﬁle→P153

Received mail

detail screen

Note

• Selecting mail icon in Stand-by also display mail.

• Images attached to i-mode mail may not be properly displayed.

• Attachments incompatible with the FOMA terminal cannot be

saved to "Data Box", however, they can be forwarded or saved

to a microSD card (when saving in a microSD card, the ﬁle

name will be changed to "OTHER001" to "OTHER999").

149

Mail

Continue on the next page

Receive option

Receiving i-mode Mail Selectively

You can check the subject of i-mode mail stored in the

i-mode center, and select mail to receive or delete at the

i-mode center before downloading new messages. To use the

Receive option, set "Receive option set" to "ON" in advance.

Setting Receive Option

After setting "Receive option set" to "ON", perform the

following to receive selected i-mode mail.



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Receive option" ▶

[Select] ▶ "ON"

After this option is set, i-mode mail will not be received automatically.

Note

• To set "Receive option" to "OFF", perform from "Receive option

set" (P168).

When You Receive Mail



Notiﬁcation of received mail screen appears

Press

[OK] or

to close the

notiﬁcation screen.

Notiﬁcation of

received mail screen

Note

• or indicating the incoming i-mode mail will not be

displayed, and the mail ring tone will not sound.

• The i-Channel ticker stops while the Notiﬁcation of received

mail screen is displayed.

150

Mail

Setting Receive Option for Mail

After "Receive option set" is set to "ON", perform the

following steps to select and receive i-mode mail.



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Receive option"

For subsequent steps, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]

FOMA version".

Icons displayed on the Receive option screen indicating

attachments

Icon File type

An image is attached.

i-motion is attached.

A melody is attached.

Another type of ﬁle is attached.

Note

• Even if "Receive option set" is set to "ON", all messages will

be received when "Check new messages" is used. If you do

not want to receive mail, exclude "Mail" from the items to be

checked.→P168

• Receive option can also be performed from "iMenu". Select

"iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト (Menu List)" ▶ "メール選択受信 (Receive

option)".

• If the total number or total size of the received mail (i-mode mail

and SMS) stored in the FOMA terminal exceeds the limit, the

oldest read message will be deleted ﬁrst. Protect the received

messages you want to keep.

Check new messages

Checking New i-mode Mail

i-mode mails that could not be received for a reason, such

as because the FOMA terminal was out of service area, are

stored in the i-mode center. You can receive stored i-mode

mail by checking the i-mode center.

• appears at the top of the screen when mail is kept at the

i-mode center.

• You can select items to check (mail or MessageR/F) under "Check

new messages" (P168).

• You cannot check new messages when the FOMA terminal is out of

service area.



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Check new

messages"

When checking is completed, the Check results screen appears.

Note

• Even when i-mode mail is kept at the i-mode center, may not

appear on the screen if mail arrived while the FOMA terminal

power was turned oﬀ.

151

Mail

Continue on the next page

Reply to i-mode mail

Replying to i-mode Mail

You can reply to the sender of i-mode mail. Replying can be

made by entering new text or quoting the text of received

i-mode mail.



Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Reply/Forward" ▶ "Reply"/"Reply

with quote"

• You can reply to mail also by pressing

[Reply] on the

Received mail detail screen.

• If the mail is sent to multiple receivers, you can select "Sender"

to reply only to the sender or select "All" to reply the sender

and all other receivers.



Enter the subject and the message text

• "Re:" is added to the subject.

• When replying with quotation, ">" is added at the beginning of

the quoted message.

• Editing the subject and message→P138

I

[Send]

Note

• After exceeding the storage capacity of Outbox, you cannot

send a reply. Delete mail saved in Outbox before replying.

• The reply to received Deco-mail with quotation has original

decoration and images entered in the message text. However,

images restricted to be output from the FOMA terminal will not

be entered.

Forward i-mode mail

Forwarding i-mode Mail to Other

Address

You can forward received i-mode mail to other addresses.



Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Reply/Forward" ▶ "Forward"



Enter the receiver

• "Fw:" is added to the subject.

• Editing the receiver and message text→P138

I

[Send]

Note

• When a ﬁle prohibited to be attached to mail or to be output

from the FOMA terminal is attached or pasted to an i-mode mail

to be forwarded, the ﬁle will be deleted.

• After exceeding the storage capacity of Outbox, you cannot

forward mail. Delete mail saved in Outbox before forwarding.

• If you forward a received Deco-mail, the original decoration and

images remain entered in the message text. However, images

restricted to be output from the FOMA terminal will not be

entered.

152

Mail

Adding Mail Addresses/Phone

Numbers to Phonebook

You can save mail addresses and phone numbers in received

mail to the Phonebook.

Saving an Address/Phone Number from the Message

Text



Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶ Move

the cursor to the address/number to save ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Save" ▶ "No./addr. in body"

Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received

Calls etc." (P89).

Saving a Receiver, Sender Address, or Phone Number



Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Save" ▶ "Address"

If there are multiple recipients/senders, further select the

addresses/phone numbers to save.

Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received

Calls etc." (P89).

Playing/Saving an Attached File

from i-mode Mail

You can play or save an image, melody, moving picture, or

i-motion attached or pasted to i-mode mail.

Retrieving Selected Attached File

When the size of a received message including attachments

larger than 100KB, you will need to download the

attachments from the i-mode center.

• All the attached ﬁles selected are downloaded regardless of the

setting of "Receive attach ﬁle" option in "Communication" of "Mail

setting".

• Expired ﬁles cannot be downloaded.



Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶ Select

a ﬁle name

Note

• When available space for Inbox is less than the ﬁle size, the

attachment cannot be retrieved.

153

Mail

Continue on the next page

Displaying/Playing/Saving/Deleting an

Attached File



Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶ Move the

cursor to the attached ﬁle

•

[Select]: Display/play the selected attachment.

M

[Menu] ▶ "Attach ﬁle" ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Save]

Save the selected attachment.

• In addition, select the destination when a microSD card is inserted

on the terminal.

[Delete]

Delete the selected attachment.

Savable ﬁle type and saving destination

File type

Destination

Image*

"i-mode" folder of "My picture" in "Data Box"

Image available

as Deco-mail

pictogram

"Decomail picto" of "My picture" of "Data Box"

Moving picture/

i-motion "i-mode" folder of

"i-motion" in "Data Box"

Melody "i-mode" folder of "Melody" in "Data Box"

Phonebook Phonebook

Schedule Schedule

To do To do list

File type

Destination

Bookmark "Bookmark" in "i-mode" or "Full browser"

Others*

―

*1 Images other than ones available as Deco-mail pictogram and

Flash movie

*2 Other ﬁles, such as Flash movies, are saved only on a microSD

card. However, depending on attachment, ﬁles cannot be saved.

Note

• Large i-mode mail may be rejected by the i-mode center, and an

error message may be returned to the source address.

• i-mode mail that is 100KB (with attachments included) or

smaller can be automatically downloaded. Attachments larger

than 100KB can be manually downloaded from the i-mode

center.

• You can set a size limit for i-mode mail messages.

• When the image size is larger than the screen, it is shrunk and

displayed.

• Some images and moving pictures/i-motion may not be

displayed or played.

• When "Melody auto play" is set to "ON", an attached melody is

played automatically when you open a received i-mode mail.

• A software that supports i-motion is required to play an i-motion

mail on a PC.

154

Mail

Saving Inline Images



Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Save" ▶ "Inline image"



Select an image ▶ "Yes"

• To set as Stand-by display, select "Yes".

Inbox/Outbox/Unsent message

Displaying Mail in Inbox/Outbox

or Unsent Messages

• To display contents of a folder with security set, enter the Terminal

security code.

Displaying Received Mail

• Up to 1,000 incoming i-mode mail and SMS messages can be

saved in Inbox. However, the savable number depends on the

amount of data.

• By default, " Welcome Mail " and "Welcome ドコモ動画 " are

saved. No communication charge applied for this mail.

• You cannot reply to " Welcome Mail " and "Welcome ドコモ動画



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Inbox"

•

[ShowAll]: Display all received mail in list.

•

[Outbox]: Display the Outbox list

screen.→P155

Inbox list screen



Select a folder

•

[Reply]: Reply to the sender and

multiple recipients.→P151

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected mail.

•

[Search]: Search from the Phonebook,

Schedule, Address (Sent msg. log/Rcv.

msg. log/Phonebook/Direct input), or

Subject.

Received mail list

screen



Select a message

•

: Display the previous or next mail.

•

[Reply]: Reply to the sender and

multiple recipients.→P151

Received mail

detail screen

155

Mail

Continue on the next page

Displaying Sent Mail

• Up to 500 i-mode mail, SMS, and unsent messages can be saved

in Outbox. However, the savable number depends on the amount of

data.



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Outbox"

•

[ShowAll]: Display all sent mail in list.

•

[Inbox]: Display the Inbox list screen.

→P154

Outbox list

screen



Select a folder

•

[Edit]: Display the Compose message

screen or the Compose SMS screen.

→P138, P176

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected mail.

•

[Search]: Search from the Phonebook,

Schedule, Address (Sent msg. log/Rcv.

msg. log/Phonebook/Direct input), or

Subject.

Sent mail list

screen



Select a message

•

: Display the previous or next mail.

•

[Edit]: Display the Compose message

or SMS screen.→P138, P176

Sent mail detail

screen

Displaying Unsent Messages

• The number of messages saved in Unsent message are included in

the maximum number of savable messages in Outbox.



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Unsent message"

•

[Send]: Send the selected mail.

•

[Delete]: Delete i-mode mail, or SMS.

Unsent message

list screen



Select a message

The Compose message/SMS screen appears depending on the

type of the selected mail. You can edit unsent mail.

156

Mail

Received/Sent/Unsent Mail Screen Components

Inbox/Outbox List Screen

Ex.: Inbox list

screen

Folder name

Number of unread messages/total number of messages in

the folder

Appear on the Inbox list screen. For Outbox, only the total

number of messages in the folder is displayed.

Icons displayed on the Inbox/Outbox screen

Icon Description

"Inbox"/"MessageR"/"MessageF"/"Outbox"

(Default folders)

No messages

Security set

No unread mail

*Standard i-αppli

*i-α ppliDX

* Created automatically when mail-connected i-αppli is received.

Received Mail List Screen/Received Mail Detail

Screen

Received mail list

screen Received mail

detail screen

Displayed folder name

Subject

"SMS" is displayed for an SMS message.

Received date and time

On the Received mail list screen, the date is displayed for

messages received before today, and the time is displayed

for messages received today.

Sender's phone number/mail address

If the phone number or mail address is saved in the

Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears.

Address types and multiple recipients

If mail is sent to multiple addresses, their address types

(To or Cc) are displayed. If the mail address is saved in the

Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears.

157

Mail

Continue on the next page

Icons displayed on the Received mail list screen/Received

mail detail screen

Icon Description

/ / Unread i-mode mail/SMS/SMS report request

/ / Read i-mode mail/SMS/SMS report

Replied

Forwarded

The message is protected.

Saved in the UIM.

Mail-connected i-αppli (Standard i-αppli)

Mail-connected i-αppli (i-α ppliDX)

Received date and time

( ) Diﬀerent Time zone SMS received

Melody is attached.

i-αppli can be started from the message text.

( / / /

/ / / /

)

Melody (SMF)/melody (MFi)/still Image/moving

pictures/Phonebook entry/Schedule event/

bookmark/other ﬁle is attached.

Multiple ﬁles attached

Damaged ﬁle (Example: For a still image)

(Gray) Deleted attachment (Example: For a still image)

Attached ﬁle un-retrieved

Attached ﬁle deleted without retrieving

Attached ﬁle interrupted while retrieving

Acquisition failed.

Attached ﬁle with the UIM security function

activated

Icon Description

Subject

/ / The message sent with the address as To, Cc,

or Bcc

/Multiple recipient address types other than own

address (To/Cc)

/ / Sender mail address to which the reply cannot

be sent

/Multiple recipient addresses to which the reply

cannot be sent

* Diﬀerent icons indicated with ( ) appear on a detail screen.

Sent Mail List Screen/Outbox Detail Screen

Sent mail list

screen Sent mail detail

screen

Displayed folder name

Sent date and time

On the Sent mail list screen, the date is displayed for

messages sent before today, and the time is displayed for

messages sent today.

Subject

"SMS" is displayed for an SMS message.

Recipient phone number/mail address

If the phone number or mail address is saved in the

Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears.

Receiver type

Indicate the receiver type of the sent mail (To, Cc, or Bcc).

Continued on next page

158

Mail

Icons displayed on the Sent mail list screen/Sent mail

detail screen

Icon Description

/Sent i-mode mail/SMS

i-mode mail sent to multiple recipients

Failed to be sent

The message is protected.

SMS saved in the UIM

Mail-connected i-αppli (Standard i-αppli)

Mail-connected i-αppli (i-α ppliDX)

Sent date and time

Melody is attached.

i-αppli can be started from the message text.

( / / /

/ / / /

)

Melody (SMF)/melody (MFi)/still image/moving

pictures/Phonebook entry/Schedule event/

Bookmark/other ﬁle is attached.

Multiple ﬁles attached

File with UIM security function attached

Subject

/ / Sent as To/Cc/Bcc

/ / Failed to send as To/Cc/Bcc

* Diﬀerent icons indicated with ( ) appear on a detail screen.

Unsent Mail List Screen

Unsent mail list

screen

Saved date and time

The date is displayed for messages saved before today, and

the time is displayed for messages saved today.

Subject

"SMS" is displayed for an SMS message.

Recipient phone number/mail address

If the phone number or mail address is saved in the

Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears.

■ Icons displayed on the Unsent mail list screen

Icon Description

/Unsent i-mode mail/SMS

i-mode mail with auto send reserved

Auto send failed

* Other than the above, same icons as for sent mail are used.

159

Mail

Continue on the next page

Inbox/Outbox List Screen Sub Menu



Inbox list screen (P154)/Outbox list screen

(P155) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Manage folders]

New folder : Add a folder.

Delete folder : Delete the selected folder.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Edit folder name

: Change the name of the selected folder.

Reorder folder : Select the display position of the selected folder

and sort.

Folder lock : Set or release security to the selected folder.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code

[Delete message]

Read in folder*: Delete all read messages in the Inbox folder.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

All without Protected : Delete all messages in the Inbox/Outbox

folders. (Except the protected messages)

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

All with Protected : Delete all messages in the Inbox folder.

(Including the protected messages)

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Send all Ir data]

Send all mail in Inbox/Outbox via infrared communication.→P329

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Enter the authentication

password ▶ "Yes"

[Copy all microSD]

Copy all messages in Inbox/Outbox to the microSD card.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Memory status]

Display number of messages in Inbox/Outbox and Unsent message

folders.

[Clear inbox]*

Delete the user-deﬁned folders and mail saved in "Inbox" and

"user-deﬁned" folder. (Except the protected messages and folders

containing the protected messages)

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

* Not displayed for sent mail list screen.

Note

• This option is not available for the default "Inbox", "Outbox",

"MessageR", and "MessageF" folders. However, "Auto sort" is

available for the "MessageR" and "MessageF" folders.

• A folder containing protected mail cannot be deleted.

• Protected mail and SMS saved in the UIM are not deleted.

• When unread mail exists, or when "Delete folder" is selected

for a folder containing mail, a conﬁrmation for deletion appears.

Select "Yes" to delete.

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki

ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is sent, the

attached ﬁle is deleted.

Continued on next page

160

Mail

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki

ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is copied,

the attached ﬁle is deleted.

Received Mail List Screen Sub Menu



Received mail list screen (P154)▶ Move the

cursor to mail ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Reply/Forward]

Reply : Reply to the selected mail.→P151

Reply with quote : Reply to the selected mail by quoting the

received message text.→P151

Forward : Forward the received mail to another receiver.

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected mail.

Delete selected : Select and delete mail.

▶ Mark mail to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Delete all read : Delete all read mail in the folder.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Delete all : Delete all mail in the folder.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Move]

Move one : Move the selected mail to another folder.

Move selected : Select and move mail to another folder.

▶ Mark mail to move ▶

[Done] ▶ Select a

destination folder

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Move all : Move all mail in the folder to another folder.

[Protect]

Protect :

Protect one : Protect the selected mail.

Protect selected : Select and protect mail.

▶ Mark mail to protect ▶

[Done]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Protect all : Protect all mail in a folder.

Clear :

Clear one : Unprotect the selected mail.

Clear selected : Select and unprotect mail.

▶ Mark mail to unprotect ▶

[Done]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Clear all : Unprotect all mail in a folder.

161

Mail

Continue on the next page

[Store in center]

Save mail at the Data Center.

Save one : Save the selected mail.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Save selected : Select and save mail.

▶ Mark mail to save ▶

[Done]

• If the number of saved mail is less than 10, press

M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort mail.

[Filter]

Display messages that meet certain conditions.

Unread : Display only unread mail.

Read : Display only read mail.

Protected : Display only protected mail.

With attach ﬁle : Display only mail with a ﬁle attached.

Mail : Display only i-mode mail.

SMS : Display only SMS and SMS reports.

All : Display all mail in the folder.

[Export]

Ir exchange : Send the selected mail or all mail in the selected

folder via infrared communication.→P328

Copy to microSD : Copy the selected mail or all mail in the selected

folder to the microSD card. Copying all mail in

the folder requires you to enter the Terminal

security code.

UIM : Copy or move the selected SMS to the FOMA

terminal or the UIM.

[Search]

With phonebook : Search mail by the Phonebook group search.

With scheduler : Select date from the Schedule to search

received mail on the selected date.

Address :

Sent msg. log : Search mail by recipients' address in Sent mails.

Rcv. msg. log : Search mail by sender address in Received mails.

Phonebook : Search mail by searching all Phonebook entries.

Direct input : Enter address to search mail.

Subject : Enter subject to search mail.

Note

• If there are unread messages, a conﬁrmation for deletion

appears. Select "Yes" to delete.

• Protected mail cannot be deleted.

• Up to 1,000 mail can be protected.

• SMS with Korean text cannot be saved at the Data Center.

Continued on next page

162

Mail

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki

ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is sent via

infrared communication ("Ir exchange") or copied to microSD

("Copy to microSD"), the attached ﬁle is deleted.

Received Mail Detail Screen Sub Menu



Received mail detail screen (P154) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Reply/Forward]

Reply or forward the displayed mail to another receiver.→P151

[Delete]

Delete the displayed mail.

[Move]

Move the displayed mail to another folder.

[Protect]

Protect or unprotect the displayed mail.

[Save]

Address : Save the mail address of the sender or multiple

recipients to the Phonebook.→P152

No./addr. in body : Save the phone numbers or mail addresses in

the displayed mail to the Phonebook.→P152

Inline image : Save images contained in the displayed mail.

→P154

Template : Save Deco-mail as a template.

▶ Edit the title ▶ "Yes"

[Copy]

Copy contents of the displayed mail.

Body : Select and copy contents of message text.→P385

Subject : Copy the subject.

Address : Copy address. If there are multiple addresses, select

an address from the Mail address list screen.

[Attach ﬁle]

Save or delete ﬁles attached to the displayed i-mode mail.→P153

[Export]

Ir exchange :

Send the displayed mail via infrared communication.

Copy to microSD : Copy the displayed mail to the microSD card.

UIM : Copy or move the displayed SMS to the FOMA

terminal or the UIM.

[Store in center]

Save the displayed mail at the Data Center.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Font size]

Set a font size for the message text on the Mail display screen.

Note

• Protected mail cannot be deleted.

• Up to 1,000 mail can be protected.

163

Mail

Continue on the next page

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki

ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is sent via

infrared communication ("Ir exchange") or copied to microSD

("Copy to microSD"), the attached ﬁle is deleted.

• SMS with Korean text cannot be saved at the Data Center.

Sent Mail List Screen Sub Menu



Sent mail list screen (P155)▶ Move the cursor

to mail ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Edit]

Edit and send sent mail.→P138, P176

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected mail.

Delete selected : Select and delete mail.

▶ Mark mail to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Delete all : Delete all mail in the folder.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Move]

Move one : Move the selected mail to another folder.

Move selected : Select and move mail to another folder.

▶ Mark mail to move ▶

[Done] ▶ Select a

destination folder

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Move all : Move all mail in the folder to another folder.

[Protect]

Protect :

Protect one : Protect the selected mail.

Protect selected : Select and protect mail.

▶ Mark mail to protect ▶

[Done]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Protect all : Protect all mail in a folder.

Clear :

Cancel one : Unprotect the selected mail.

Cancel selected : Select and unprotect mail.

• The operations are the same as "Protect

selected".

Cancel all : Unprotect all mail in the folder.

[Store in center]

Save mail at the Data Center.

Save one : Save a selected mail.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Save selected : Select and save mail.

▶ Mark mail to save ▶

[Done]

• If the number of saved mail is less than 10, press

M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort mail.

Continued on next page

164

Mail

[Filter]

Display mail that meet certain conditions.

Protected : Display only protected mail.

With attach ﬁle : Display only mail with a ﬁle attached.

Mail : Display only i-mode mail.

SMS : Display only SMS.

All : Display all mail in the folder.

[Export]

Ir exchange : Send the selected mail or all mail in the selected

folder via infrared communication.→P328

Copy to microSD : Copy the selected mail or all mail in the selected

folder to the microSD card. Copying all mail in

the folder requires you to enter the Terminal

security code.

UIM : Copy or move the selected SMS to the FOMA

terminal or the UIM.

[Search]

With phonebook : Search mail by the Phonebook group search.

With scheduler : Select date from the Schedule to search mail

received on the selected date.

Address :

Sent msg. log : Search mail by recipients' address in Sent mails.

Rcv. msg. log : Search mail by sender address in Received mails.

Phonebook : Search mail by searching all Phonebook entries.

Direct input : Enter address to search mail.

Subject : Enter subject to search mail.

Note

• Protected mail cannot be deleted.

• Up to 500 mail can be protected.

• SMS with Korean text cannot be saved at the Data Center.

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki

ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is sent via

infrared communication ("Ir exchange") or copied to microSD

("Copy to microSD"), the attached ﬁle is deleted.

Sent Mail Detail Screen Sub Menu



Sent mail detail screen (P155) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Edit]

Edit and send sent mail.→P138, P176

[Delete]

Delete the displayed mail.

[Move]

Move the displayed mail to another folder.

[Protect]

Protect or unprotect the displayed mail.

165

Mail

Continue on the next page

[Save]

Address : Save the mail address to the Phonebook.→P152

No./addr. in body : Save the phone numbers or e-mail addresses in

the displayed mail to the Phonebook.→P152

Inline image : Save images contained in the displayed mail.

→P154

Template : Save Deco-mail as a template.

▶ Edit the title ▶ "Yes"

[Copy]

Copy contents of the displayed mail.

Body : Select and copy contents of message text.→P385

Subject : Copy the subject.

Address : Copy the address. If there are multiple recipients, select

addresses to copy.

[Attach ﬁle]

Save or delete ﬁles attached to the displayed i-mode mail.→P153

[Export]

Ir exchange :

Send the displayed mail via infrared communication.

Copy to microSD : Copy the displayed mail to the microSD card.

UIM : Copy or move the displayed SMS to the FOMA

terminal or the UIM.

[Store in center]

Save the displayed mail at the Data Center.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Font size]

Set a font size for the message text on the Mail display screen.

Note

• Protected mail cannot be deleted.

• Up to 500 mail can be protected.

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki

ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is sent via

infrared communication ("Ir exchange") or copied to microSD

("Copy to microSD"), the attached ﬁle is deleted.

• SMS with Korean text cannot be saved at the Data Center.

Unsent Mail List Screen Sub Menu



Unsent mail list screen (P155) ▶ Move the

cursor to mail ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected mail.

Delete selected : Select and delete mail.

▶ Mark mail to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Delete all : Delete all unsent mail.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Continued on next page

166

Mail

[Store in center]

Save mail at the Data Center.

Save one : Save the selected mail.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Save selected : Select and save mail.

▶ Mark mail to save ▶

[Done]

• If the number of saved mail is less than 10,

press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort mail.

[Filter]

Display mail that meet certain conditions.

Mail : Display only i-mode mail.

SMS : Display only SMS.

All : Display all unsent messages.

[Ir exchange]

Send the selected mail or all unsent mail via infrared

communication.→P328

[Copy microSD]

Copy the selected mail or all unsent mail to the microSD card.

Copying all unsent mail requires you to enter the Terminal security

code.

[Cancel auto send]

Cancel the auto send setting.

[Auto send fail reason]

Display the reason for auto send failure.

Note

• SMS with Korean text cannot be saved at the Data Center.

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki

ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is sent, the

attached ﬁle is deleted.

• If mail with a Flash movie (ﬁles with extension of swf including

Motion Oekaki

ﬁles) larger than 100KB attached is copied,

the attached ﬁle is deleted.

Received mails/Sent mails/Recent mails

Using Mail History

Up to 30 entries will be saved in each the Received mail logs

and Sent mail log. Also, up to 60 entries of sent/received

mail will be saved in "Recent". These logs can be used to

compose mail and save addresses to the Phonebook.

• If the maximum number of recordable entries has been exceeded,

the oldest entry will be deleted ﬁrst.

167

Mail

Continue on the next page

Example: To display the Received mails



Stand-by display ▶

(for 1+ seconds)

To display the Sent mails

Stand-by display ▶ press

(for 1+ seconds).

To display the Recent mails

Press

on the Received mail list

screen/Sent mail list screen.

•

[Mail]: Create mail to the receiver or

sender of the selected log entry.

•

[V. phone]: Make a videophone call to the

phone number of the selected log entry.

•

[Call]: Make a voice call to the phone

number of the selected log entry.

Ex.: Received mail

list screen



Select an entry in the log

•

[Call]: Make a call to the selected

number in the log.

•

[Mail]: Create mail to the receiver or

sender of the selected entry.

•

[V. phone]: Make a videophone call

to the phone number of the selected

log entry.

•

[Add]: Add the selected mail

address in the log to the Phonebook.

Go to Step 2 in Adding Phonebook

Entries from Dialed/Received Calls

etc." (P89).

Only unsaved mail addresses can be

saved.

The name saved in the Phonebook

Other party's mail address

Receive/sent date & time

Ex.: Received mail

detail screen

Icons displayed on the Received mails/Sent mails/Recent mails

Icon Description

Received mail

Sent mail

Received SMS

Sent SMS

Mail and SMS that were received/sent while roaming*

* The received/sent date and time is shown in the local time.

Received Mails/Sent Mails/Recent Mails Sub Menu



Use H to move the cursor to a log entry to

use ▶ M[Menu] ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Call function]

Voice call : Make a voice call to the phone number of the

selected log entry.

Videophone call : Make a videophone call to the phone number of

the selected log entry.

Customize call : Edit the phone number of the selected log entry

and dial.

[Mail]

Compose mail : Create mail to the receiver or sender of the

selected log entry.

Go to Step 3 in "Composing and Sending i-mode

Mail" (P138).

Compose SMS : Create SMS to the receiver or sender of the

selected log entry. Go to Step 3 in "Composing

and Sending SMS" (P176).

[Add to phonebook]

Save the mail address of the selected log entry to the Phonebook.

Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received

Calls etc." (P89).

• Only unsaved mail addresses can be saved.

Continued on next page

168

Mail

[Change list]*2

Recent calls : Display recent call log entries.

Recent mails : Display recent mail log entries.

Received calls : Display incoming call log entries.

Received mails : Display received mail log entries.

Redial : Display phone redial log entries.

Sent mails : Display sent mail log entries.

• The item for the currently displayed log is not displayed.

[Delete]*3

Delete the selected log entry.

[Delete]*2

Delete one : Delete the selected log entry.

Selected : Select and delete log entries.

▶ Mark mail to delete ▶

[Delete]

• Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Delete all : Delete all log entries.

*1 On the detail screen of Received mails/Sent mails/Recent mails,

"Compose mail" is displayed instead.

*2 Not displayed on the detail screen of Received mails/Sent mails/

Recent mails.

*3 Displayed only on the detail screen of Received mails/Sent

mails/Recent mails.

Mail setting

Setting Mail Functions of the

FOMA Terminal

Communication

Conﬁguring Communication Settings



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting"

▶ "Communication" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Receive option set]

To enable/disable the Receive option (P149), set whether to receive

i-mode mail automatically.

ON : Do not receive mail automatically.

OFF : Receive mail automatically.

[Receive attach ﬁle]

Specify attached ﬁles to be retrieved when i-mode mail is received.

▶ Mark items to download ▶

[Done]

[Check new messages]

Specify request items when using "Check new messages".

▶ Mark items to check ▶

[Done]

Note

•

When this option is set to "ON", i-mode mail cannot be received

automatically. Incoming i-mode mail is kept at the i-mode center,

and the Notiﬁcation of received mail screen (P149) appears.

• If the attached ﬁle set not to be received arrives, the ﬁle

name is displayed in the message text and you can receive by

selecting it.→P152

169

Mail

Continue on the next page

Display

Conﬁguring Display Settings



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"Display" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Font size]

Set a font size for text on the Mail detail screen.

• Pressing

, or

on the Received mail detail screen also

changes the font size.

[Folder lock]

Set security for Inbox/Outbox and Unsent message in Mail menu.

To display security-activated mail, the Terminal security code must

be entered.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Mark items to set ▶

[Done]

[Melody auto play]

Set whether to automatically play attached or pasted melodies on

the Mail display screen.

[Receiving display]

Set whether to notify with a ring tone or Receive results screen when

i-mode mail or MessageR/F is received while operating the FOMA

terminal (displaying other than Stand-by display).

Alarm mode : Notify with a ring tone or the Receive results

screen.

• The Receive results screen is not displayed

depending on the function in use such as while

calling or activating Camera.

Operation mode : Prioritize the FOMA terminal operation and does

not notify with a ring tone or the Receive results

screen, etc.

• When receiving i-mode message or MessageR/F

while the display is turned oﬀ, the display does

not light up.

Mail group

Registering Mail Group

easily specify a certain group of multiple recipients.

Up to 20 mail groups can be created. Up to 5 recipients can

be registered to a mail group.



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"Mail group"

Mail group list

screen

I

[Add] ▶ Enter a mail group name



Select a registered mail group ▶ Move the

cursor to a receiver ﬁeld ▶

[Add] ▶ Select

a registration method ▶

[Done]

Sent msg. log : Select an address from Sent mails.

Rcv. msg. log : Select an address from Received mails.

Phonebook : Select an address from the Phonebook.

Direct input : Enter an address directly.

170

Mail

Mail Group List Screen Sub Menu



Mail group list screen (P169) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Delete group]

Delete the selected mail group.

[Add group]

Create a new mail group.

[Rename group]

Edit the selected mail group name.

[Write Mail]

Create i-mode mail addressed to the selected mail group.→P138

Auto sort

Sorting Mail Automatically to Folders

Set conditions to automatically save mail in speciﬁed folders.

Setting Auto Sort Rule

Set conditions to sort mail to folders automatically.

• Create folders in "Inbox" or "Outbox" for sorting beforehand.

• Up to 30 sorting conditions can be saved.



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"Auto sort"

Auto sort screen



"Sort inbox"/"Sort outbox" ▶ Select a Sort rule

ﬁeld



Select the Sorting criteria ﬁeld ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Address]

Set mail address or phone numbers as a condition to sort.

▶ "Direct input" ▶ Enter a mail address/phone number

• Select an address from Recent msg log, Recent dial log, or

Phonebook.→P139

[Phonebook Group]

Set a phonebook group as a condition to sort.

[Subject]

Set mail subject as a condition to sort.



Select the Folder to sort into ﬁeld ▶ Select a

folder to sort into ▶

[Done]

171

Mail

Continue on the next page

Note

• To edit the sorting condition, select a sorting condition to edit

and set a rule again.

• The same sorting conditions as ones set to another folder

cannot be set.

• When setting a mail address as a sorting condition, the domain

name (the string after @) should be included. For example, when

setting from the Sent message log, or the Received message

log, if the mail is exchanged based on their phone numbers, the

address does not include the domain name. In this case, the

mail address is not recognized as a sorting condition.

• When setting a sorting condition to SMS, enter a phone number

for "Address". You cannot set "Phonebook Group"/"Subject" as a

sorting condition.

Re-sorting Mail

Re-sort saved mail according to a sorting condition.



Auto sort screen (P170) ▶ "Re-sort" ▶

"Inbox"/"Outbox"



Mark folders to re-sort ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll] to select all.

Deleting Auto Sort Rule



Auto sort screen (P170) ▶ "Sort inbox"/"Sort

outbox" ▶ Move the cursor to the Sort rule

ﬁeld ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected sorting rule.

Delete selected : Select and delete the sorting rules.

▶ Mark sorting rules to delete ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll] to select all.

Delete all : Delete all sorting rules.

Re-ordering Auto Sort Rule

The execution priority of the auto sort rule follows the display

sequence of the rules on the screen. Re-ordering the auto

sort rules changes the execution priority.



Auto sort screen (P170) ▶ "Sort inbox"/"Sort

outbox"



Move the cursor to the Sort rule ﬁeld to re-

order ▶

[Reorder] ▶ Use

to move a sort

rule ▶

[Select]

172

Mail

Edit

Editing Header/Signature/Quotation



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"Edit" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Edit header]

Set a header to be inserted to i-mode mail text.

▶

[Edit] ▶ Enter a header

[Edit signature]

Set a signature to be inserted to i-mode mail text.

▶

[Edit] ▶ Enter a signature

[Edit quotation]

Set a symbol indicating that a text is quoted from received mail when

replying with quoting.

▶

[Select] ▶ Enter a quotation mark ▶

[Done]

[Auto attach]

Set whether to automatically attach a header or signature when

composing i-mode mail.

▶ Mark items to be attached ▶

[Done]

Others

Conﬁguring Other Settings



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"Others" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Check settings]

Check the contents set in "Mail setting".

[Reset settings]

Reset the contents set in "Mail setting" to the default.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Receive Message

When You Receive Message

When the FOMA terminal is in service area, MessageR/F is

sent automatically from the i-mode center. When MessageR/F

arrives, the display, ring tone, or vibration notiﬁes you of new

messages.

• Up to 100 MessageR/F can be saved respectively. However, the

number of savable messages varies depending on the message

size.

Viewing New Message

When MessageR/F arrives, the latest message appears

automatically.

• "Auto-display setting" can be conﬁgured to allow the detail screen

to automatically open after receiving a MessageR/F.→P173



Automatically receive MessageR/F when it

arrives

• After receiving MessageR/F, the Receive results screen is

displayed.

• The previous screen returns if no operation is performed for

approximately 30 seconds.

173

Mail

Continue on the next page

Auto-display setting

Displaying Message Automatically

Set automatic display method of MessageR/F.



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Image&Eﬀect set." ▶ "Auto-display setting"

▶ Perform the following operations

MessageR preferred : Display MessageR automatically

when MessageR and MessageF arrive

simultaneously.

MessageR only : Display

only MessageR automatically.

MessageF preferred : Display MessageF automatically

when MessageR and MessageF arrive

simultaneously.

MessageF only : Display

only MessageF automatically.

Auto-display OFF : Do not display

MessageR/F

automatically.

Melody auto play

Playing a Melody Automatically when

Message is Displayed

Set whether to automatically play a melody when

MessageR/F is displayed.



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Image&Eﬀect set." ▶ "Melody auto play"

Switch between ON and OFF each time "Melody auto play" is

selected.

Check new messages

Checking New Message

MessageR/F that was not received because the FOMA

terminal was out of service area is stored at the i-mode

center, and , , or appears at the top on the screen.

Checking new messages downloads the stored MessageR/F.

• You cannot check new messages when the FOMA terminal is out of

service area.

• Set items to check (mail and MessageR/F) in "Check new

messages" (P168).



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "Check new

messages"

When checking is completed, the Check results screen appears.



"MessageR"/"MessageF"

Note

• Incoming MessageR/F is stored at the i-mode center when:

- Power is OFF

- A videophone call in progress

- Self mode is activated

- The FOMA terminal is out of service area

- Omakase Lock is activated

- MessageR/F on the FOMA terminal is full

174

Mail

MessageR/MessageF

Displaying New Message

When MessageR/F arrives from the i-mode center, or

appears at the top of the screen.



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "MessageR/F"

▶ "MessageR"/"MessageF"

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected

MessageR/F

Subject

Received date and time

On the MessageR/F list screen,

the messages received before

today are displayed with date and

ones received today are displayed

with time. Ex.: MessageR

list screen



Select MessageR/F

Received date and time

Subject

Ex.: MessageR

detail screen

Icons displayed on the MessageR/F list/detail screen

Icon Description

/Unread MessageR/F

/Read MessageR/F

* Icons other than above are the same as for Received mail.→P157

MessageR/F List Screen Sub Menu



MessageR/F list screen (P174) ▶ Move the

cursor to a message ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected MessageR/F.

Delete selected : Select and delete MessageR/F.

▶

Mark MessageR/F to delete

▶

[Done]

▶

"Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Delete all read : Delete all read MessageR/F.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Delete all : Delete all MessageR/F.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

175

Mail

Continue on the next page

[Protect]

Protect :

Protect one : Protect the selected MessageR/F.

Protect selected : Select and protect MessageR/F.

▶ Mark MessageR/F to protect ▶

[Done]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Select all" or

"Deselect all".

Protect all : Protect all MessageR/F.

Clear :

Clear one : Unprotect the selected MessageR/F.

Clear selected : Select and unprotect MessageR/F.

• The operation is the same as "Protect

selected".

Clear all : Unprotect all MessageR/F.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort MessageR/F.

[Filter]

Display only the MessageR/F that meet sorting conditions.

Unread : Display only the unread MessageR/F.

Read : Display only the read MessageR/F.

Protected : Display only the protected MessageR/F.

All : Display all MessageR/F.

Note

• If there are unread MessageR/F, a conﬁrmation for deletion

appears. Select "Yes" to delete.

• Protected mail cannot be deleted.

• Up to 100 MessageR/F can be protected respectively.

MessageR/F Detail Screen Sub Menu



MessageR/F detail screen (P174) ▶

[Menu]

▶ Perform the following operations

[Delete]

Delete the displayed MessageR/F.

[Protect]

Protect or unprotect the displayed MessageR/F.

[Save]

No./addr. in body : Save the mail address or phone numbers in

the

currently

displayed MessageR/F to the

Phonebook.→P152

Inline image :

Save or check information about an image

inserted in the currently displayed MessageR/F.

Background image : Save the background image used in the

currently

displayed MessageR/F.

[Attach ﬁle]

Save : Save an attached ﬁle of the currently displayed

MessageR/F.

Delete : Delete an attached ﬁle of the currently displayed

MessageR/F.

Note

• Protected message cannot be deleted.

• Up to 100 MessageR/F can be protected respectively.

176

Mail

Compose/Send SMS

Composing and Sending SMS

•

You can send and receive SMS to/from terminals that use international

carriers other than DOCOMO. Visit the DOCOMO International Services

website for available countries and international carriers.

•

You can send and receive SMS in Korean to/from terminals that

support Korean.

•

Use L-03B to send and receive international SMS in Korean to/from

Korean-support terminals of Korea and other international carriers. Visit

the DOCOMO International Services website for international carriers

that support international SMS. The number of characters that can

be sent depends on the situation of each recipient carrier. For details,

contact recipient carriers.

•

Switching input modes in SMS message to Korean→P178



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "SMS" ▶

"Compose SMS"

•

[Ph. book]: Select a recipient from the

Phonebook.

Compose SMS

screen



Select ﬁeld ▶ "Direct input" ▶ Enter the

phone number

• Up to 21 digits (including "+") can be entered.

• On the Phone number entry screen, press

[Menu] to select

"Int. call", "Select preﬁx", or "Cancel". To cancel the entry, press

[Cancel].

• The address can be selected from Sent message log or

Received message log, or Phonebook.→P139



Select ﬁeld ▶ Enter the message

• The number of characters that can be entered diﬀers

depending on the settings in "SMS input character".→P178

I

[Send]

Note

• For a destination of an international carrier other than

DOCOMO, enter in the order of "+" (press

for 1+ seconds),

"Country Code", and "other party's mobile phone number". For the

mobile phone number starting with "0", enter the phone number

excluding "0". Numbers may be entered in the order of "010",

"Country Code", and the "other party's mobile phone number" (to

reply to overseas SMS received, enter "010").

• Characters may not be sent correctly on receiver's side

depending on the signal strength, etc.

• When you send an SMS to a receiver who uses an international

carrier and some of the characters you send are not supported

by the carrier, those characters may not be displayed correctly.

• Even if you set "Caller ID notiﬁcation" to "Not notify", your caller

ID is sent to the other party.

• You cannot reply to SMS sent with unknown ID or from a public

phone.

• When sending SMS, "Pictographs" and "Pictograph idioms" other

than and are displayed as half-pitch space in receiver's

screen.

• SMS texts in Korean sent to a terminal which does not support

Korean will not be displayed correctly on the terminal.

Compose SMS Screen Sub Menu



Compose SMS screen (P176) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Send]

Send SMS.

177

Mail

Continue on the next page

[Save]

Save SMS being created or edited as an unsent message.

[Report request]

Set whether to request an SMS report when SMS is delivered.

→

P178

[Validity period]

Set the period of time that a sent SMS can be kept undelivered at

the SMS center.→P178

Receive SMS

When You Receive SMS Messages

When the FOMA terminal is in service area, SMS is

automatically received.

• Up to 1,000 received SMS messages including i-mode mail can be

saved. However, the savable number depends on the amount of the

data.



When SMS is received appears at the top of

the screen

When the reception is completed, the

Receive results screen appears.

• The previous screen returns if no operation

is performed for approximately 30

seconds.

• Selecting "SMS" opens the Inbox list

screen.

• Until the detail screen of received SMS

opens, appears at the top of the screen

and (the number indicates the

number of messages) appears in Stand-by. Receive results

screen

Note

• When Stand-by i-αppli is set, the Receive results screen for

SMS does not appear, and the ring tone and vibrator for SMS

do not work.

Viewing New SMS



Receive results screen (P177) ▶ "SMS" ▶

Select a folder



Select an SMS message to display

Received mail

detail screen

Check new SMS

Checking New SMS Messages

SMS that could not be received for a reason such as because

the FOMA terminal was out of service area, are stored at the

SMS center. You can receive stored SMS by checking the

SMS center.

• You cannot check new messages when the FOMA terminal is out of

service area.



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "SMS" ▶

"Check new SMS"

When the reception is completed, the Check results screen

appears.

178

Mail

SMS Settings

Setting SMS

SMS Report Request

Set whether to request an SMS report after the SMS is

delivered. If set to "ON", an SMS report indicating that the

SMS has been delivered to the receiver will be sent to you.



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"SMS" ▶ "SMS report request" ▶ "ON"/"OFF"

Note

• An SMS report includes the sent time and the phone number of

the receiver.

SMS Validity Period

Set the period of time that a sent SMS will be kept

undelivered at the SMS center because the recipient terminal

is out of service area, etc.

• If "0 day" is selected, sending the SMS message is retried after a

while, then the message is deleted from the SMS center.



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"SMS" ▶ "SMS validity period" ▶ Select the

period

SMS Input Character

Set the SMS input mode.



Mail menu screen (P137) ▶ "Mail setting" ▶

"SMS" ▶ "SMS input character" ▶ Select an

item to set

JP(70Chara) : Enter Japanese text. Up to 70 characters

can be entered.

JP/KR(70Chara) : Enter Japanese and Korean text. Up to 70

characters can be entered.

English(160Chara) : Enter English text. Up to 160 characters

can be entered.

SMS Center

* You usually do not need to change this setting.

Set the SMS center settings.

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International roaming"

▶ "Network" ▶ "SMS center" ▶ Perform the

following operations

[SMS Center]

DOCOMO : Set DOCOMO as the SMS center.

Others : Set a carrier other than DOCOMO as the SMS center.

[Address]

When "Others" is selected for "SMS Center", enter connection

address.

179

Mail

Continue on the next page

[Type of number]

Set this option when "Others" is selected for "SMS Center".

International : If the SMS center phone number is for international

calls, select this option.

Unknown : If you do not know whether the SMS center phone

number is for international calls, select this option.

I

[Done]

181

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

i-mode ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 182

Displaying the i-mode Menu ････････････i-mode Menu 182

Displaying a Site

Displaying a Site ････････････････････････････････････ 183

Viewing and Operating Sites ････････････････････････ 186

Subscribing to a Site in My Menu ･････････ My Menu 187

Changing i-mode Password

･･･････････････････････････ Change i-mode Password 188

Displaying Internet Web Pages ････Internet Access 188

Saving Web Pages or Sites for Quick Access

･･･････････････････････････････････････････ Bookmark 190

Saving Site Contents ･･･････････････ Screen memo 192

Downloading Images, Melodies etc.

from Sites

Downloading Data from Sites ･･･････････････････････ 194

Useful Functions of i-mode

Using Phone To/Mail To/Web To/Media To/i-αppli To Function

･･･

Phone To/Mail To/Web To/Media To/i-αppli To function

196

Setting i-mode

Setting i-mode ･･･････････････････････i-mode setting 197

Using Certiﬁcates

Operating SSL Certiﬁcate ･････ SSL Certiﬁcate Info 200

Using i-motion

i-motion ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 201

Downloading i-motion from Sites

･･･････････････････････････････････i-motion Download 201

Using i-Channel

i-Channel ････････････････････････････････････････････ 203

Displaying i-Channel ････････････････････････････････ 203

Setting i-Channel ･･････････････････i-Channel Setting 204

182

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

i-mode

i-mode makes use of the display of the FOMA terminal

supporting i-mode (i-mode terminal) to use online services

such as sites access, Internet access and i-mode mail.

• i-mode is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription.

• For details about i-mode, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]

FOMA version".

Before using i-mode

• Contents of sites and Internet web sites (web pages) are

generally protected by copyright law. Data, such as text or

images you download to the i-mode terminal from sites or

web pages, can be used only for personal entertainment, and

the data cannot be used, in whole or in part, as it is or after

modiﬁcation, for sale or redistribution, without the consent of

the copyright holders.

• If you insert another UIM or turn the FOMA terminal power on

without the UIM, depending on the model of the FOMA terminal,

still images, moving pictures, melodies downloaded from sites,

mail attachments (still images, moving pictures or melodies),

screen memos, and MessageR/F cannot be viewed or played.

• When a ﬁle with UIM restrictions is set as the Stand-by display

or ring tone, the setting will revert to its default if a diﬀerent UIM

is inserted or the terminal power is turned on without a UIM.

i-mode Menu

Displaying the i-mode Menu

You can use i-mode functions from the i-mode menu.



Stand-by display ▶

i-mode menu

screen



Perform the following operations

[iMenu]

Connect to the i-mode center.→P183

[Bookmark]

Display the Bookmark folder list screen.→P190

[Screen memo]

Display the Screen memo list screen.→P193

[Last URL]

Open the last viewed i-mode site or web page.→P185

[Go to location]

Enter a URL to connect to the Internet.→P188

[i-Channel]

Display the i-Channel menu screen.→P204

183

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Continue on the next page

[MessageR/F]

Display a list of MessageR/F.→P174

[Check new messages]

Check whether i-mode mail or MessageR/F is stored at the i-mode

center.→P173

[i-mode setting]

Conﬁgure the FOMA terminal i-mode functions.→P197

[Full browser]

Display the Full browser menu screen.→P206

Displaying a Site

You can use various services oﬀered by IP (Information

Providers).

• Services vary depending on the IP (Information Providers). Some

sites require a separate subscription.



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "iMenu" ▶

"English" ▶ "Menu List"

appears at the top of the screen during i-mode

communication.

[Select]

• Press

[Stop] to cancel a page download.



Select an item (link)

•

[Reload]: If the current site is updated, reload the page.

•

[∧]: Scroll the screen up.

•

[∨]: Scroll the screen down.

•

: Exit i-mode. Select "Yes".

Note

• When a number appears in front of a link item, press the

corresponding dial key to access the linked site. Some sites

may not be possible to connect.

• Some sites may require "Phone/Terminal and UIM ID" to be sent

in order to gain access.

The "Phone/Terminal and UIM ID" is sent to the IP (Information

Provider) so that the IP can recognize you and provide

customized information or judge whether the contents that the

IP provides can be used on your mobile phone. The "Phone/

Terminal and UIM ID" is sent via the Internet to the IP and

may be seen by a third party. This action does not reveal your

address, age, or sex to the IP.

• Images that can be displayed are in JPEG, GIF, and SWF

formats.

184

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Site Display Screen Sub Menu



While viewing a site ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Bookmark]

Save : Save the URL of the displayed site as a Bookmark. Go to

Step 2 in "Adding to Bookmark" (P190).

List : Display the Bookmark folder list screen.→P190

[Screen memo]

Save : Save the displayed page as a Screen memo.→P192

List : Display the Screen memo list screen.→P193

[Save image]

Save images or background images contained in the displayed page.

→P194

[Show properties]

URL : Display the URL of the displayed page.

Page properties : Display the URL and title of the displayed page.

Certiﬁcates : If the displayed page supports SSL, the SSL

certiﬁcate is displayed.

[Go to location]

Enter URL : Enter a URL to access the web page. Go to Step 2 in

"Displaying Internet Web Pages" (P188).

Home : Connect to the URL set as "Home".

URL history : Select an entry in the URL history to access the web

page. Go to Step 2 in "Using URL History"(P189).

[Reload]

If the displayed site is updated, reload the page.

[Compose message]

Create i-mode mail with the URL of the displayed page pasted in the

message text. Go to Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail"

(P138).

Select from the following options when a linked item is selected.

This page : Paste the URL on the displayed page.

Link page : Paste the URL of the link.

[Add to Phonebook]

Save a phone number or mail address displayed on the site to the

Phonebook.→P187

[Display]

Change char code : If characters are not displayed correctly,

change the character encoding and display.

Retry : Play Flash movie/an animation contained in the

displayed page from the beginning.

[Settings]

Image display : Set whether to display images contained on the

displayed page.

Sound eﬀect : Set whether to play sound eﬀects of the Flash

movie contained in the displayed page.

i-motion type : Specify the i-motion type to download.→P202

[Switch to Full Browser]

Switch to Full browser.→P213

185

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Continue on the next page

Note

• If characters are not displayed correctly, repeat the steps.

However, after the character code is changed 4 times, the

default character encoding returns.

• Characters may not be displayed correctly even after repeatedly

changing the encoding.

• The new character encoding is valid only for the displayed page.

• Images may not be displayed correctly even when this option is

set to "ON". In this case, appears.

Downloading an SSL page

The screen shown on the right appears when

you access an SSL site. When accessed, the

SSL page opens and appears on the top of

the screen.

Returning to a normal site

The screen shown on the right appears when

you return to a non-SSL site. Select "Yes" to

return to a normal site, and disappears.

Note

• If the SSL certiﬁcate has already expired or the site does not

support SSL, a warning indicating that this site may not be

secure may appear. To connect, select "Yes". However, note

that your personal information (credit card number or contact

address) may not be sent safely.

Last URL

Opening the Last Viewed Web Page

After i-mode is terminated, the URL of the last opened page is

saved in "Last URL". You can re-connect to the last accessed

page using Last URL.



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "Last URL" ▶

[Connect]

186

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Viewing and Operating Sites

This section describes basic operations on sites.

Going Back to Previous Page/Going to

Next Page The FOMA Terminal

The FOMA terminal temporarily saves the displayed sites

data in a cache.

Data saved in the cache can be displayed, without revisiting

the site, by using

• However, communication is established if the data is larger than

the cache size, or if the site requires the latest information always

be loaded.

• Characters or settings entered at the site will not be stored in the

cache.

• Terminating i-mode deletes data from the cache.

Example: When pages are displayed in the order of Screen

"A" → "B" → "C" → "B" → "D"

If the pages are opened in the order "A"→"B"→"C", then returning to

"B", and opening "D", "C" is deleted from the cache. Pressing

displays "B"⇔"D".

… Display order of pages

… The order when displaying the

previous page from Screen "D"

Note

• Touch operation is not available on sites which use Flash

movies.

• Operation on sites may diﬀer when a Flash movie is displayed.

Selecting Links or Items

You may need to perform operations using the following

items while connecting to i-mode. For details, see "Mobile

Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

Name Display example Details

Radio button

(Not selected) Select only 1 item.

(Selected)

Check box

(Not selected) Select multiple items.

(Selected)

Text box Enter text. Select a text

box to display the text entry

screen.

Pull down

menu Select an item from an

option list. Click pull-down

menu to display the option

list.

187

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Continue on the next page

Note

• Perform the following operations to quote and enter information

saved in the FOMA terminal, such as Phonebook entries, your

own number, or data scanned with the bar code reader.

[Menu] ▶ "Quote" ▶ "Phonebook"/"Own number"/"Bar code"

Displaying Flash Movies

The FOMA terminal supports Flash movies, an animation

technology using images and sounds. You can access

sites that provide various kinds of animations. You can also

download a Flash movie and set it for the Stand-by display.

Note

• Even if a Flash movie is displayed, the animation may not work

correctly.

• Some Flash movies use data about your FOMA terminal. To

allow Flash movies to use the data, set "Use phone info." to

"ON".

• If the Flash movie contains audio, it will be played at the volume

set for "Incoming call". To mute sound eﬀects, set "Sound

eﬀect" to "OFF".→P198

• If you play a Flash movie with vibration set, the FOMA terminal

vibrates regardless of "Vibrator" (P102) settings on the FOMA

terminal.

• Flash movies are not displayed if "Images" is set to "OFF".

• Flash movies which are saved in Data Box, microSD card, or

Screen memo may appear diﬀerently depending on the saved

part.

• Flash sound eﬀect or vibration does not work if they are set to

the Stand-by display/incoming call screen, etc.

Adding a Mail Address/Phone Number to

Phonebook

You can save a phone number or mail address displayed at a

site to the Phonebook.



While viewing a site ▶ Move the cursor to a

phone number/mail address ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Add to Phonebook" ▶ "Yes"

Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received

Calls etc." (P89).

My Menu

Subscribing to a Site in My Menu

Frequently accessed sites can be saved in My Menu for quick

access.

• Up to 45 entries can be saved in My Menu.

• Some sites cannot be saved in My Menu.



Display a site to save ▶ "マイメニュー登録 (Save

in My Menu)"

• Item names may vary depending on the site.



Select i-mode password text box ▶ Enter the

i-mode password ▶ "決定 (OK)"

• The entered i-mode password is masked by asterisks "＊".

• i-mode password→P188

Note

• When you subscribe to a fee-based site in "Menu List", the site

is automatically added to My Menu.

188

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Accessing a Site from My Menu



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "iMenu" ▶

"English" ▶ "My Menu" ▶ Select the site to

access

Change i-mode Password

Changing i-mode Password

"i-mode Password" (4 digits) is required to save to/delete

from My Menu, subscribe to/unsubscribe from message

services or fee-based i-mode sites, or conﬁgure mail settings.

The password is set to "0000" by default.

Change it to a number of your own choice for safety. Do not

reveal your i-mode password to others.



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "iMenu" ▶

"English" ▶ "Options" ▶ "Change i-mode

Password"



Select the "Current Password" text box ▶

Enter the i-mode password (4 digits)



Select the "New Password" text box ▶ Enter a

new i-mode password (4 digits)



Select the "New Password (Conﬁrmation)"

text box ▶ Enter the new i-mode password

(4 digits)



"Select"

Note

• If you forget the i-mode password, you need to bring a picture

ID such as your driver's license to the docomo Shop to have the

i-mode password reset to "0000".

Internet Access

Displaying Internet Web Pages

You can view a web page by entering its URL. Use half-pitch

alphanumeric characters and symbols to enter a URL.



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "Go to location"

▶ "Enter URL"



Enter the URL

• Up to 2,033 half-pitch characters can be entered.

Note

• Web pages that do not support i-mode may not be displayed

correctly.

• When the same URL as a history entry is accessed, the old

URL is overwritten and the entry is displayed at the top of the

URL history as the latest URL.

189

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Continue on the next page

Using URL History

Up to 10 previously entered URLs are stored in the URL

history. You can access a web page by using the URL

history.



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "Go to location"

▶ "URL history"

URL history list

screen



Select the URL to access

Note

• If more than 10 URLs are saved in the history, the oldest URL

will be overwritten ﬁrst.

• The visited URL is displayed at the top of the URL history.

URL History List Screen Sub Menu



URL history list screen (P189) ▶ Move the

cursor to a URL history entry ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Connect]

Connect to the selected site in the URL history.

[Edit URL]

Edit and connect to the URL of the selected history.

▶ Edit URL ▶

[Set]

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete a selected URL history entry.

Del. selected : Select and delete entries in the URL history.

▶ Mark the URL history entries to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Delete all : Delete all entries in the URL history.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Compose message]

Create i-mode mail with the URL of the selected history entry pasted

in the message text. Go to Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode

Mail" (P138).

190

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Bookmark

Saving Web Pages or Sites for

Quick Access

Save frequently accessed sites or web pages in Bookmark to

quickly display the pages.

Adding to Bookmark

• Up to 100 URLs can be saved in the Bookmark folders.



While viewing a site ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Bookmark"

▶ "Save"

C

[Select] ▶ Edit a title ▶

[Set] ▶

[Add] ▶ Select a destination folder

• If there is already the same URL saved, a conﬁrmation to

overwrite appears. Select "Yes".

Note

• Up to 256 half-pitch characters can be entered for a URL

saved as a Bookmark.

• Up to 12 full-pitch or 24 half-pitch characters can be saved for

a Bookmark title.

• If the maximum number of Bookmarks has been saved, a

conﬁrmation whether to select items to delete appears. To

select, "Yes" ▶ select a folder ▶ select Bookmark to delete ▶

select a destination folder.

Accessing a Homepage/Site from

Bookmark



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "Bookmark"

•

[Add]: Add a folder. Up to 16 full-pitch or

32 half-pitch characters can be entered for

a folder name.

•

[Edit]: Edit the folder name of the

selected user-deﬁned folder.

Bookmark folder

list screen

■ Icons displayed on the Bookmark folder list screen

Icon Description

(Gray) "Bookmark" (pre-installed folder)

(Yellow) User-deﬁned folder

191

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Continue on the next page



Select a folder

•

[URL]: Display the URL.

•

[Edit]: Edit the title.

Bookmark list

screen



Select the Bookmark URL to access

Bookmark Folder List Screen Sub Menu



Bookmark folder list screen (P190) ▶ Move

the cursor to a folder ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Manage folder]

Create folder : Add a folder. Up to 16 full-pitch or 32 half-pitch

characters can be entered for a folder name.

Rename folder : Edit the selected folder name.

Sort folder : Sort the selected folder.

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected folder.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Delete all : Delete all Bookmarks.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Send all Ir data]

Send all Bookmarks via infrared communication.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Enter the authentication

password ▶ "Yes"

[Copy all microSD]

Copy all Bookmarks to a microSD card.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Memory status]

Display the number of saved Bookmarks in the entire folder.

Note

• The pre-installed "Bookmark" folder cannot be renamed, moved,

or deleted.

• If there is a bookmark in the folder, a conﬁrmation to delete

appears. Select "Yes" to delete in the entire folder.

Bookmark List Screen Sub Menu



Bookmark list screen (P191) ▶ Move the

cursor to a bookmark ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Connect]

Connect to the selected Bookmark site.

[Edit title]

Edit the title or URL of the selected Bookmark.

▶ Edit the title or URL ▶

[Set]

Continued on next page

192

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

[Move]

Move this : Move the selected Bookmark to another folder.

Move selected : Select and move Bookmarks.

▶ Mark the Bookmarks to move ▶

[Move] ▶

Select a destination folder

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Move all : Move all Bookmarks in the folder to another folder.

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected Bookmark.

Del. selected : Select and delete Bookmarks.

▶ Mark the Bookmarks to delete ▶

[Delete]

▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Delete all : Delete all Bookmarks.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[URL Info]

Display the URL of the selected Bookmark.

[Copy URL]

Copy the URL of the selected Bookmark.

[Compose message]

Create i-mode mail with the selected Bookmark attached. Go to Step

2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

[Ir exchange]

Send : Send the selected Bookmark via infrared communication.

Send all : Send all bookmarks in the folder via infrared

communication.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Enter the

authentication password ▶ "Yes"

[Copy microSD]

Copy one : Copy selected Bookmark to microSD card.

Copy all : Copy all Bookmarks in the folder to microSD card.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Memory status]

Display the number of saved Bookmarks in the folder.

Screen memo

Saving Site Contents

You can save the displayed page as a Screen memo. Pages

saved as Screen memo can be opened without connecting to

i-mode.

Saving Screen Memos

• Up to 50 Screen memos can be saved. However, the actual number

of savable pages may be reduced depending on the saved data

size.

• Up to approximately 100KB per page can be saved.



While viewing a site ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Screen

memo" ▶ "Save" ▶ "Yes"

Note

• If the maximum number of Screen memos have already been

saved, a conﬁrmation whether to select a screen memo to

delete appears. To select, "Yes" ▶ select a screen memo to

delete.

193

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Continue on the next page

Viewing Screen Memos



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "Screen memo"

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected Screen

memo.

•

[URL]: Display the URL.

Screen memo list

screen



Select the Screen memo to display

The Screen memo detail screen is displayed.

Note

• The page saved as a Screen memo has the information at the

time it was saved. The Screen memo may not contain the latest

information.

Screen Memo List Screen Sub Menu



Screen memo list screen ▶ Move the cursor to

the Screen memo ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Display]

Display the selected Screen memo.

[Edit title]

Edit the title of the selected Screen memo. Up to 12 full-pitch or 24

half-pitch characters can be entered for a title.

[Delete]

Delete one : Delete the selected Screen memo.

Del. selected : Select and delete Screen memos.

▶ Mark the Screen memos to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Delete all : Delete all Screen memos.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[URL Info]

Display the URL of the selected Screen memo.

[Protect on/oﬀ]

One ON/OFF : Disable/Enable protection for the selected Screen

memo.

Select ON/OFF: Select and protect or unprotect a Screen memo.

▶ Mark Screen memos to protect ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Unprotect all : Unprotect all Screen memos.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code

[Memory status]

Display the number of Screen memos.

194

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Screen Memo Detail Screen Sub Menu



Screen memo detail screen ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Save image]

Save an image or background image contained in the current Screen

memo. Go to Step 2 in "Downloading Images from Sites or Screen

Memos" (P195).

[Show properties]

URL : Display the URL of the displayed Screen memo.

Page properties : Display the title and the URL of the displayed

Screen memo.

Certiﬁcates : If the displayed Screen memo supports SSL, the

SSL certiﬁcate is displayed.

[Add to Phonebook]

Save a phone number or mail address on the site to the Phonebook.

→P187

[Retry]

Play a Flash movie or an animation contained in the Screen memo

from the beginning.

[Sound eﬀect]

Set whether to play sound eﬀects of the Flash movie contained in

the displayed Screen memo.

ON : Play the Flash movie sound eﬀects.

OFF : Do not play the Flash movie sound eﬀects.

[Edit title]

Edit the title of the displayed Screen memo. Up to 12 full-pitch or 24

half-pitch characters can be entered for a title.

[Delete]

Delete the displayed Screen memo.

[Protect ON/OFF]

Protect or unprotect the displayed Screen memo.

Note

• Protected Screen memos cannot be deleted. Unprotect them

before deleting.

• Up to 10 Screen memos can be protected. The number of

protectable Screen memos may vary depending on the data

size.

Downloading Data from Sites

You can download ﬁles or data such as images or melodies

from sites and save them to the FOMA terminal or microSD

card.

• Savable data (ﬁle) type and maximum savable size per ﬁle are as

follows:

- Image (JPEG, GIF, or SWF format), i-melody, template: 100KB

- Kisekae Tool: 2MB

- Dictionary: 32KB

Save image

Downloading Images from Sites or Screen

Memos

Save images on the displayed site or contained in Screen

memo to the FOMA terminal or a microSD card.

• Obtained images are saved in the "i-mode" folder in "My picture" of

"Data Box" or microSD card.

195

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Continue on the next page

Example: To save the image displayed on a site



While viewing a site ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Save

image"



"Select image" ▶ Select an image to save

To save the background image from a site

Select "Save backgnd".

A savable image

is framed by a

dotted border.



"Yes"

• Further select the destination when a microSD card is inserted

on the FOMA terminal. However, images in SWF format is

automatically saved to the FOMA terminal.

• If you saved the image on the FOMA terminal, a conﬁrmation

appears asking whether to set the saved image as Stand-by

display. Select "Yes" to set it.

Note

• Images cannot be saved if "Images" is set to "OFF".

• Some images saved on the FOMA terminal may not be

displayed properly even if they are displayed on the site.

• Some obtained images may not be displayed correctly.

• Image ﬁles in JPEG, GIF, or Progressive JPEG* formats

cannot be displayed after they are saved with the size (pixels)

exceeding the following. However, they can be output to

external devices such as by attaching to mail.

- JPEG or Progressive JPEG image ﬁles that exceed 2592×

1944 dots

- GIF image ﬁles that exceed 800×600 dots

* Progressive JPEG is an image format that is used on

the Internet. The image looks coarse at the beginning of

the download and the image sharpness improves as the

download progresses.

Downloading Data from a Site

Savable data type and the saving destination are as follows.

Data (ﬁle) type Destination

i-melody "i-mode" folder in "Melody" of "Data Box" or

microSD card

Template "Template" in Mail menu (P144)

Kisekae Tool "i-mode" folder in "Kisekae Tool" of "Data Box"

Dictionary "Download dictionary" (P389)



While viewing a site ▶ Select data

When download completes, a conﬁrmation appears.

Continued on next page

196

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel



"Save"

• To cancel saving, select "Back".

• You can check data by selecting "View", "Play", or "Preview"

depending on the data type.

To save i-melody

Further select the destination if a microSD card is

inserted on the FOMA terminal.

To save a template

Select "Save" ▶ change the ﬁle name ▶ "Yes".

To save a dictionary

Select the destination.

Note

＜i-melody＞

• Download may not be possible depending on the site.

• Some downloaded melodies may not be played correctly.

• In some downloaded melodies, playback part may be speciﬁed.

Those melodies will be played entirely at playback, however,

when the melody is set for a ring tone etc., only the speciﬁed

part is played.

• When downloading templates, select "Compose mail" to create

Deco-mail using downloaded template.

＜Dictionary＞

• Using downloaded dictionaries→P389

Phone To/Mail To/Web To/Media To/i-αppli To function

Using Phone To/Mail To/Web

To/ Media To/i-αppli To Function

When a phone number, mail address or URL is highlighted

on a site or in mail, you can use it to easily make a call,

send i-mode mail, or access the web page. Also, when 1Seg

information is highlighted, you can watch 1Seg or set timer

for starting 1Seg.

• Phone To, AV Phone To, Mail To, Web To, or Media To function in

mail sent from a PC may not be available.

Phone To/AV Phone To Function

Make a voice call (Phone To)/videophone call (AV Phone To)

to the highlighted phone number on a site or in mail.



Select a phone number ▶ Perform the following

operations

Voice call : Make a voice call.

Video call : Make a videophone call.

SMS : Create an SMS message addressed to the

selected phone number.

Add phonebook : Add the selected phone number to the

Phonebook.

Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook

Entries from Redial/Received Calls etc."

(P88).

Copy : Copy the selected phone number.

Note

• The Phone To/AV Phone To function may not be available

depending on the site.

• For mail, the order of displayed items varies.

197

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Continue on the next page

Mail To Function

You can send a mail to an i-mode mail address highlighted on

a site page or in mail.



Select a mail address

Go to Step 3 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

Note

• The Mail To function may not be available depending on the

site.

Web To Function

Access a URL highlighted on a site or in mail.



Select a URL

• For mail, further press

[Connect].

Note

• The Web To function may not be available depending on the

site.

• The appearance of the URL varies depending on the site.

• The Web To function may be available using a highlighted item

other than a URL.

Media To Function

You can watch 1Seg or set timer for starting 1Seg.



Select 1Seg information ▶ "Yes"

Note

• The Media To function may not be available when other

functions are running.

i-αppli To Function

You can start i-αppli from a URL highlighted on a site or in

i-mode mail.

• If "Set i-αppli To" (P285) or "Mail i-αppli To" in "Set i-αppli To" is not

marked, the i-αppli will not start.



Select i-αppli information ▶ "Yes"

Note

• Some i-αppli, which immediately start directly from the site

using the i-αppli To function, may not be saved.

i-mode setting

Setting i-mode

Set functions of i-mode or MessageR/F.

Communication

Conﬁguring Communication Settings



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Communication" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Connection timeout]

Set the timeout duration until the connection is automatically

terminated if there is no response due to network traﬃc.→P199

[Check new messages]

Specify request items when using "Check new messages".

▶ Mark the items to check ▶

[Done]

198

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Image&Eﬀect set.

Conﬁguring Image and Eﬀect Settings



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Image&Eﬀect set." ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Images]

Set whether to display images or Flash movies contained on sites or

in Screen memos.

[Sound eﬀect]

Set whether to play sound eﬀects of Flash movies contained on sites

or in Screen memos.

[Font size]

Set the font size for sites or Screen memos.

[Scroll]

Set the number of lines to scroll with each press of

on sites or

Screen memos.

[Use phone info.]

When a Flash movie is displayed on a site or in a Screen memo,

information saved on the FOMA terminal may be required. Set

whether to use the information from the FOMA terminal then.

[Auto-display setting]

Set how MessageR/F is displayed automatically.→P173

[Melody auto play]

Set whether to automatically play a melody when MessageR/F is

displayed.→P173

Note

• Images may not be displayed correctly even when "Images" is

set to "ON". In this case, appears.

• Even if "Sound eﬀect" is set to "ON", some sound eﬀects may

not sound depending on the Flash movie.

• If set to "ON", the battery level, signal strength, Date & Time,

Ring Volume, Language, and terminal model information may

be sent to IP (Information Provider) via the Internet, and a third

party may intercept the information.

Home

Conﬁguring Home Setting

Set the home URL by selecting "Home" from the Site display

screen sub menu.



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Home"



Select "Enable" ▶ "http://" ﬁeld ▶ Enter the

URL ▶

[Done]

Note

• If set to "Disable", selecting "Home" does not open the speciﬁed

page. The URL entered in the "http://" ﬁeld will remain intact.

199

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Continue on the next page

Others

Conﬁguring Other Settings



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Others" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Check settings]

Check the options set in "i-mode setting".

[Reset settings]

Reset the options set in "i-mode setting" to the default.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Connection timeout

Setting Connection Timeout

Set the timeout duration until the connection is automatically

terminated if there is no response due to network traﬃc.



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Communication" ▶ "Connection timeout" ▶

"60 seconds"/"90 seconds"/"Unlimited"

• If set to "Unlimited", the connection will not be automatically

terminated.

Note

• Even if set to "Unlimited", the connection attempt may be

terminated depending on the signal strength etc.

Host selection

Changing Access Point from i-mode

* If you use the DOCOMO i-mode service, changing the

access point is not required.

Set an Access Point Name (APN) used when you use services

other than i-mode (DOCOMO). i-mode and i-mode mail become

unavailable when you connect to an APN other than DOCOMO.

Adding Access Points

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "International roaming" ▶

"Network" ▶ "Host selection"

Host selection

screen

I

[Add] ▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶

Perform the following operations

[Host name]

Enter the access point name within 15 full-pitch or 30 half-pitch characters.

[Host number]

Enter the number of the access point within 99 half-pitch alphanumeric

characters.

[Host address]

Enter the access point address within 30 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.

Continued on next page

200

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

[Host address 2]

Enter the access point address for i-Channel within 30 half-pitch

alphanumeric characters.

I

[Done]

Changing Access Point



Host selection screen (P199) ▶ Select the

access point to change

Host Selection Screen Sub Menu



Host selection screen (P199) ▶ Move the

cursor to the access point ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

• Not available while "i-mode" is selected.

[Add new]

Add a new access point.→P199

[Edit]

Edit the access point settings.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Edit the access point settings

▶

[Done]

[Delete]

Delete the selected access point.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

[View]

Display the selected access point settings.

•

[Edit]: Edit the access point settings.

Note

• When an access point is changed, the i-Channel ticker does not

appear. When the information is auto-updated or you download

the latest information by pressing

in Stand-by, the ticker

will appear automatically.

• If the set access point is deleted, "imode" will be set as the

default host.

SSL Certiﬁcate Info

Operating SSL Certiﬁcate

You can view an SSL certiﬁcate, or set a certiﬁcate valid or

invalid.



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "Certiﬁcates"

•

[Select]: Display the contents of the selected certiﬁcate.



Move the cursor to the certiﬁcate ▶

[Invalid/Valid]

• Press

[Menu] and select "Certiﬁcate Info" or "Valid/Invalid".

Icon Description

Valid certiﬁcate

Invalid certiﬁcate

Certiﬁcates used for SSL communication

These certiﬁcates are issued by an authentication company, and

are saved on the FOMA terminal by default.

201

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Continue on the next page

i-motion

i-motion is a moving picture with video and sound. They can

be obtained from i-motion sites, played, saved, and set as the

Stand-by display or a ring tone, etc.

i-motion Types

There are 2 types of i-motion.

Standard type

There are 2 formats of the Standard type.

The format in which an i-motion can be played after

download (Up to10MB)

The format in which an i-motion can be played during

the download (Up to 10MB)

• Some standard type i-motion cannot be saved.

Streaming type

This type allows you to play i-motion while downloading

data. Up to 10MB of i-motion can be played. The data is

deleted after playback. It cannot be saved on the FOMA

terminal.

Note

• i-motion that can be downloaded and played are in MP4 (Mobile

MP4) format. i-motion in ASF format cannot be downloaded or

played.

i-motion Download

Downloading i-motion from Sites

Up to 2,000 i-motion can be saved. However, the savable

number depends on the amount of the data.

• Downloaded i-motion is saved in the "i-mode" folder in "i-motion" of

"Data Box" or microSD card.



While viewing a site ▶ Select i-motion

• When "Auto-replay setting" is set to "ON", i-motion is played

automatically after downloaded.

Operations during playback→P308

Streaming-type i-motion

• The Playback conﬁrmation screen appears. Select "Yes" to

play i-motion during the download.

• When "i-motion type" is set to "Standard type", you cannot

play i-motion. Switch to "Std/Streaming", then download

i-motion again.→P202



After download,

▶ "Save"

Play : Play downloaded i-motion.

File property : Display information about downloaded i-motion.

Back : Return to the Site display screen without

saving i-motion.

• Further select the destination when a microSD card is inserted

on the FOMA terminal.

Continued on next page

202

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Note

• Depending on the connected site or i-motion, some i-motion

may not be downloaded or played during the download.

• If you play i-motion while downloading data, i-motion may stop

playing or the image may become distorted due to signal

strength etc.

• Some i-motion cannot be saved on the FOMA terminal.

• Some i-motion have playback restrictions. appears for

i-motion with playback count. appears for i-motion with

playback period or playback limit. i-motion which has restricted

term for playback cannot be played before/after the term.

• Some downloaded i-motion may not be played correctly.

When a Link is Set in Ticker

When a ticker is set in i-motion, the ticker is displayed during

playback. If a phone number, a mail address, or a URL is set

in the ticker, you can use Phone To, AV Phone To, Mail To, or

Web To functions after the i-motion playback is ﬁnished.



i-motion playback ends ▶ Select an item

Auto-replay setting

Setting whether to Play i-motion

Automatically

Set whether to play i-motion automatically when downloading

from a site or mail.



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "i-motion setting" ▶ "Auto-replay setting"

Switch between ON and OFF each time "Auto-replay setting" is

selected.

i-motion type

Specifying Type of Downloading i-motion

Set the type of the new i-motion to download from a site.



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "i-mode setting"

▶ "i-motion setting" ▶ "i-motion type" ▶ Select

a type

Standard type : Download only standard-type i-motion.

Std/Streaming : Download standard or streaming-type i-motion.

Note

• To download streaming-type i-motion, "Std/Streaming" must be

set.

203

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Continue on the next page

i-Channel

i-Channel is a service which provides information such as

news or weather forecasts to i-Channel compatible terminals.

Automatically received latest information is displayed and

runs as a ticker on the Stand-by display. Also, pressing

displays the latest information in the channel list. (Display

channel list→P203)

• i-Channel is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription

(The i-mode contract is required for this subscription).

i-Channel has 2 types of channel: "Basic channels" provided

by DOCOMO and "Favorite channels" provided by IP

(Information Provider). Packet communication charge does

not apply to automatic update of information delivered to

"Basic channels". You can register your favorite channels on

"Favorite channels". For this channel, packet communication

charge applies for automatic update of information. Note

that packet communication charges apply to view detailed

information for both channels. To use International roaming

service, packet communication charges apply for both

automatic updating and viewing detailed information.

• For details about i-Channel, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]

FOMA version".

• The i-Channel service is provided in Japanese only.

Displaying i-Channel

If you subscribe to i-Channel, information appears as a ticker

on the Stand-by display as the information is received.

• To automatically display the ticker, set "Ticker display" to "ON".

→P204

• When Public mode (Drive mode) is set, the ticker is not displayed.



Stand-by display ▶

Ticker

Channel list

screen



Select a channel item

Connect to the site and detailed information is displayed.

•

: Return to the Channel list screen.

Continued on next page

204

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Note

• While information is being received, blinks.

• Even when the information arrives, a ring tone does not sound

nor does the terminal vibrate. The illumination does not light/

blink either.

• Information may not be received when the FOMA terminal power

is turned oﬀ, while the FOMA terminal is out of service area, or

when the signal reception is weak. Press

in Stand-by to

receive information, then the obtained information is displayed

automatically as the ticker on the Stand-by display. Also,

information may not be received if the default settings are kept.

In this case, press

in Stand-by to receive and automatically

display the information as the ticker on the Stand-by display.

• In some conditions, information may be received only when a

channel list is displayed.

• If you change the access point in "Host selection", the access

point of i-Channel is also changed (normally, you do not need to

change these settings).

• The ticker will not appear after i-Channel is unsubscribed.

• When i-motion is set to the Stand-by display, the ticker will not

appear during playback.

• There may be a message notifying of failure to acquire channel

information if:

- the i-Channel access point has been changed

- the UIM has been replaced

• Touch operation is not available on i-Channel screen.

i-Channel Setting

Setting i-Channel

You can set whether to display the ticker on the Stand-by

display or to set the ticker display speed. Also you can delete

all i-Channel information on the FOMA terminal.



Stand-by display ▶

▶ "i-Channel" ▶ Perform

the following operations

[i-Channel list]

Display the Channel list screen.→P203

[Ticker setting]

Ticker display : Set whether to display a ticker on the Stand-by

display.

Ticker speed : Set the ticker display speed.

Font size : Set the ticker font size.

Font color : Set the ticker font color.

[Reset i-Channel]

Delete i-Channel data downloaded on the FOMA terminal and restore

Ticker setting to defaults.

Note

• If you unsubscribe the i-mode service before unsubscribing

i-Channel, the "Ticker display" setting remains.

205

Full Browser

Displaying Web Pages Designed for PC

･････････････････････････････････････････ Full browser 206

Setting Full Browser ･････････ Full Browser Settings 214

206

Full Browser

Full browser

Displaying Web Pages Designed

for PC

With Full browser, FOMA terminal can display web pages

designed for PC.

• Some pages may not be displayed correctly.

• Up to approximately 500KB per page can be displayed.

• Note that accessing web pages containing lots of images or

performing communication with large amount of data such as data

download makes communication charge high. For details about

packet communication and billing plan, see "Mobile Phone User's

Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

Displaying Full Browser Menu



i-mode menu screen (P182) ▶ "Full browser"

Full browser

menu screen



Perform the following operations

[Home]

Display a web page which URL is set as "Home".

[Bookmark]

Display the Bookmark folder list screen.

[Last URL]

Display the last accessed web page.

[Go to location]

Input address : Enter a URL to access a web page.→P207

URL history : Select an entry in the URL history to access a

web page. Go to Step 2 in "Using URL History"

(P189).

[Full Browser Settings]

Set Full browser functions.→P214

Note

• SSL/TLS-supporting web pages can be displayed with Full

browser.

• SSL/TLS are methods to protect privacy and communicate

safely with authentication/encryption technologies. SSL/TLS

pages prevent others from eavesdropping, spooﬁng, and

altering information during communication by exchanging

encrypted data, and enable you to exchange your personal

information such as credit card number and address safer.

207

Full Browser

Continue on the next page

Displaying a Web Page by Entering URL



Full browser menu screen (P206) ▶ "Go to

location"



"Input address" ▶

[Select] ▶ Enter the URL

▶

[Connect]

• When "Access Setting" (P214) of Full browser is set to "Not

Use", the Access setting screen is displayed to conﬁrm

whether to use Full browser when activating Full browser.

Selecting "Yes" sets the Access setting to "Use" and displays

a web page. This setting is valid even after Full browser is quit.

Some web pages may take a while to be displayed.

• Up to 2,033 half-pitch characters can be entered.

• During Full browser communication, appears at the top of

the screen.

• To cancel the page retrieval while retrieving, press

[Stop].

• Once a URL is input, you can use the URL history to open its

web page by selecting on the Full browser menu screen (P206)

▶ "Go to location" ▶ "URL history". For details, refer to "Using

URL History" (P189) in i-mode section.

• To close a web page, press

▶ "Yes".

Note

• Some web pages automatically establish communication.

When starting communication, a conﬁrmation appears. Select a

communication method on a conﬁrmation screen.

Yes (once)

: Connect this time only.

Yes (permanently)

: After this, connect automatically without conﬁrmation.

No : Do not connect.

Full Browser Screen

XXXXXX XXXXX

ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸＸＸ

XXXXXX XXXXX ＸＸＸＸＸ

Displaying a web page

(horizontal)

Displaying a web page

(vertical)

Display mode

: Displayed only in PC layout mode→P215

Key operations while viewing a web page

Operation Description

(In Keitai mode),

(In PC layout mode),

Scroll the screen to the direction of the key

press

[∧]*Scroll the screen up

[∨]*Scroll the screen down

[Menu]*Display sub menu

[Action]*Display action menu

Select a link

Dial keys,

*Shortcut Operations→P208

* Available only in a vertical screen.

208

Full Browser

Shortcut Operations

Some operations can be done directly by pressing dial keys

while displaying a web page. The following operations are

assigned to each key by default. The assigned operations

can also be modiﬁed.

Shortcut operations

Operation Description

(Zoom out) Minify the view

(Scroll up) Scroll up on the screen

(Zoom in) Magnify the view

(Scroll left) Scroll left on the screen

(PagePilot) Display the whole page→P210

(Scroll right) Scroll right on the screen

(Back to previous page) Display the previous page

(Scroll down) Scroll down on the screen

(Go to next page) Display the next page

(Bookmark list) Display the list of saved

Bookmarks

(Switch to the left widow) Display the left window while

displaying multiple windows.

(Switch to the right widow) Display the right window while

displaying multiple windows.

Changing operations assigned to shortcuts

a While viewing a web page ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Shortcut List"

The Shortcut list screen appears.

b Move the cursor to a shortcut to change its assigned

operation ▶

[Edit] ▶ Move the cursor to an operation to

assign ▶

[Done]

Note

• Images that can be displayed are in JPEG, GIF, BMP, and PNG

formats.

• The following functions are not supported.

- Displaying Flash movies - Plug-ins - Playing sound

- Saving Screen memo - Phone To (AV Phone To)

• When user certiﬁcate stored in FOMA terminal is required for

SSL/TLS communication, certiﬁcate selection screen appears.

• Tilting the FOMA terminal to the left automatically switches to

the horizontal screen.

209

Full Browser

Continue on the next page

Displaying a Framed Web Page

A web page composed of multiple frames can be displayed.



Display a web page composed of multiple

frames

Frame page

●ＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸ

●ＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸ

●ＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸ

△△△△

All frames

screen



Select a frame to display as full frame

• To return to the All frames screen,

press

Frame page

●ＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

●ＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

●ＸＸ

ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ

Full frame

screen

Note

• For a web page composed of many frames, all frames may not

be displayed.

Displaying in Multiple Windows

You can open multiple windows at a time and display those

by switching.

• Up to 5 windows can be opened. The maximum number of window

may not be opened depending on frame numbers or contents of the

pages.



While viewing a web page ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Window Operat." ▶ "New Window" ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Open]

Display the Bookmark folder list screen.

[Go to location]

Input address : Enter a URL to access a web page.→P207

URL history : Select an entry in the URL history to access a web

page. Go to Step 2 in "Using URL History" (P189).

[Home]

Display a web page whose URL is set as "Home".

[Link]

Display a linked page

Continued on next page

210

Full Browser

Note

• Tabs are displayed on the top of the

screen.

To switch windows, press

[Menu]

▶ "Window Operat." ▶ "Change

Window" ▶ select a window name

to display. The tab of the displayed

web page appears to the front.

XX XX XX

ＸＸＸＸＸＸ

X XXX XXX

Tab

Operations in Full Browser

The operations in Full browser is basically same as those on

sites accessed from Go to location menu of i-mode (P186).

Here describes diﬀerent parts of the operation.

Full Browser Screen Sub Menu



While viewing a web page ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Goto Page]

Back : Display the previously accessed web pages.

Forward : When displaying web pages backwards, display next

page of the displayed web page.

Visit History : Access a web page by using the URL history.

Home : Display a web page whose URL is set as "Home".

[Reload]

Reload the displayed web page.

[Bookmark]

Bookmark folder.

[Go to location]

Input address : Enter a URL to access a web page.→P207

Home : Display a web page whose URL is set as "Home".

URL history : Select an entry in the URL history to access a web

page. Go to Step 2 in "Using URL History" (P189).

[Display]

Set display settings for web pages.

Zoom :

Zoom In : Magnify the view of the web page.

Zoom Out : Minify the view of the web page.

Zoom : Set zoom factor for web page display.

Display Mode : Change display mode of a web page.→P215

PagePilot : Minify the whole view of the displayed web page and

select a range to display.

▶ Move the cursor to the part to display ▶

[Select]

All frames : Display the All frames screen when the Full frame

screen is displayed.

Goto on Page : Display the top/end of the web page.

Go to Top : Go to the top of the displayed web page.

Go to End : Go to the end of the displayed web page.

211

Full Browser

Continue on the next page

Search : Search text in the displayed web page. When

the search text is found, the matched text is

highlighted.

▶ Select the Search text ﬁeld ▶ Enter the text to

search ▶

[Done]

To search the exact match word only, mark

"Whole Words Only".

To search a word distinguishing upper case from

lower case, mark "Case Sensitive".

To display search result in sequence, press

[Prev]/

[Next].

Press

to quit the search.

Character code : Change character code of the displayed web

page.

Every time you change the character code, the

code switches in order of Shift-JIS → EUC → JIS

→ UTF-8.

Play animation : Play GIF animation displayed from the beginning

frame.

Title Info : Display the title of the displayed web page.

URL Info :

URL Info : Display the URL of the displayed web page.

• To copy the URL, press

[Menu] ▶ "Copy".

Link Info : Display the URL of the selected link.

• To copy the URL, press

[Menu] ▶ "Copy".

SSL Info : Display the certiﬁcate of the web page.

[Window Operat.]

New Window : Open another web page loaded from the Open/Go

to location/Home/Link in a new window.→P209

Open as Back : Open another web page loaded from the Open/Go

to location/Home/Link in a background window.

→P209

Open Link : Display the selected link in a new window.

• If a moving picture is linked, a new window is

closed and a moving picture application starts.

Close Window : Close the displayed web site.

Change Window : Select a web page from the list of pages

displayed in multi windows.

[Save Image]

Save images on a web page to the FOMA terminal or microSD card.

▶ Select an image to save ▶ "Yes"

• If microSD card is inserted, further select save location.

[Text]

Text Copy : Copy text on a web page.

Select start point of a range including text to copy ▶

Select end point ▶ Select start point ▶ Select end

point

• Press

[SelAll] to copy all text.

Text Paste : Paste copied text to the selected text box.

Continued on next page

212

Full Browser

[Compose msg]

Create i-mode mail with the URL of the displayed web page in the

message text. Go to Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail"

(P138).

Select from the following options when a linked item is selected.

This page : Paste the URL of the displayed web page.

Link page : Paste the URL link on the selected web page.

[Setting]

Image display : Set whether to display images.

Set as Home : Set the displayed web page as "Home".

TLS : Set whether to use TLS. Normally, changing this

setting is not necessary.

[Shortcut List]

Check operations assigned to the dial keys in list. The assigned

operations can be modiﬁed as well.→P208

Note

• For some web pages, characters may not appear correctly or

their view may diﬀer from the web pages displayed on PC. When

characters appear incorrectly, "Character code" (P211) may ﬁx

the problem.

• When no data is obtained for a web page due to communication

error etc., may appear on the screen. In this case, reloading

the web page (P210) may ﬁx the problem.

• Images that can be saved are in JPEG, GIF, BMP, PNG formats

and up to 100KB.

• For BMP and PNG formats, images are automatically saved in

"OTHER" folder of microSD card. These images cannot be saved

in the FOMA terminal.

• Images may not be saved depending on the site.

<Text>

• In some pages, text cannot be copied.

Full Browser Screen Action Menu



While viewing a web page ▶

[Action] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Open Link]

Display a linked page

[Link Info]

Display the URL of selected link.

[Save Image]

Save the selected image to the FOMA terminal or microSD card.

→P211

[Text Paste]

Paste copied text to the selected text box.

[Zoom In]

Magnify the view of the web page.

[Zoom Out]

Minify the view of the web page.

[Display Mode]

Change display mode of a web page.→P215

213

Full Browser

Continue on the next page

[PagePilot]

Minify the whole view of the displayed web page and select a range

to display.→P210

[Go to Top]

Go to the top of the displayed web page.

[Go to End]

Go to the end of the displayed web page.

[Text Copy]

Copy text on a web page.→P211

Note

• Some menu items may not appear depending on the operating

condition.

Uploading Images

You can upload JPEG/GIF images saved in the FOMA

terminal to a web page.

• Upload method varies depending on web pages. Follow the

instructions on the screen.

Note

• Up to 80KB of an image can be uploaded. However, when

multiple images and characters are included, the maximum size

is 100KB altogether.

• Uploading may not be available on some web pages.

• Images which are restricted to be transferred from the FOMA

terminal cannot be uploaded.

Bookmark

Adding to Bookmark



While viewing a web page ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Bookmark" ▶ "Add"



Select the Title ﬁeld ▶ Edit a title ▶

[Add] ▶

Select the folder to save

Note

• The operations available for Bookmark folder list or Bookmark

list are the same as for i-mode.→P190

Switching to Full Browser from i-mode

You can switch i-mode view to Full browser.

• Some web pages may not appear or may not appear correctly.

• Note that the billing system for Full browser is diﬀerent from the

one for i-mode, and accessing web pages containing lots of images

or performing communication with large amount of data such as

data download makes communication charge high. For details about

packet communication charges and billing plan, see "Mobile Phone

User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".



While viewing an i-mode site ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Switch to Full Browser" ▶ "OK"

214

Full Browser

Full Browser Settings

Setting Full Browser

Set browser functions.

Communication

Conﬁguring Communication Settings



Full browser menu screen (P206) ▶ "Full

Browser Settings" ▶ "Communication" ▶

Perform the following operations

[Access Setting]

Check the information about using Full browser.

• When you use Full browser changing settings, please read the

information in the Access Setting carefully.

[Cookie Setting]

Set whether to validate Cookie. Cookie is the scheme to store

information such as user name, access date, or number of accesses

in the FOMA terminal temporarily when accessing web pages and

use those data when accessing the same page next time.

• DOCOMO is not responsible if your information is passed to a third

party by validating Cookie.

• When selected "Valid (notify)", you can select the option from

"Sending", "Receiving", or "Sending/receiving".

[Delete Cookie]

Delete Cookie.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Referer Setting]

Set whether to send Referer (information that where a page is linked

from) when accessing a web page by selecting a link.

• DOCOMO is not responsible if your information is passed to a third

party by sending Referer.

[TLS]

TLS is a method to protect privacy and communicate safely with

authentication/encryption technologies. Set whether to use TLS.

Normally, changing this setting is not necessary.

Note

• If inserting another UIM, Access Setting becomes invalid.

• If inserting another UIM, Cookie Setting becomes "Invalid".

• If changing the setting from "Invalid" to "Valid"/"Valid (notify)",

and if UIM information does not match, the Terminal security

code is required.

215

Full Browser

Continue on the next page

Image&Eﬀect set.

Conﬁguring Image and Eﬀect Settings



Full browser menu screen (P206) ▶ "Full

Browser Settings" ▶ "Image&Eﬀect set." ▶

Perform the following operations

[Zoom]

Set zoom factor for a web page display.

[Display Mode Setting]

Set display method of a web page.

PC layout mode : Display a web page in the same way as you view

on PC. Scrolling up/down, or to the right/left is

available.

Keitai mode : Display a web page ﬁt to the display width.

Scrolling up and down is available.

[Set Image display]

Set whether to display images.

[Bookmark Display]

Set display method for saved Bookmark folder.

[Window Open Guard Setting]

Set the action when getting an instruction to open a new window

from JavaScript on a web page.

Valid : A new window does not open.

Invalid : A conﬁrmation appears when opening a new window.

[Script Setting]

Set whether to validate JavaScript. JavaScript is a program which

works on web pages.

• Some web pages may not appear correctly with "Invalid" set.

Home URL

Conﬁguring the Home Setting



Full browser menu screen (P206) ▶

"Full Browser Settings" ▶ "Home URL"

C

[Select] ▶ Enter URL ▶

[Done]

• Up to 2,033 half-pitch characters can be entered.

Others

Conﬁguring Other Settings



Full browser menu screen (P206) ▶ "Full

Browser Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Check Settings]

Display the list of Full browser settings.

[Reset Settings]

Reset the Full browser settings.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

217

Camera

Copyrights and Portrait Rights

You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute contents

such as text, image, music, or software downloaded from

web sites on the Internet, or images captured with this

product without permission from the copyright holder except

when the copy or quote is for personal use that is allowed

under copyright laws. Note that it may be prohibited to

capture or record live performances or exhibitions even for

personal use. Refrain from taking portraits of other people

and uploading such portraits to web sites without their

consent, as this violates portrait rights.

Please be considerate of other people's privacy

when capturing and sending pictures using camera-

equipped mobile phones.

Before Using Camera ･･･････････････････････････････ 218

Capturing Still Images ･････････････････ Photo-mode 222

Capturing Moving Pictures ････････････ Movie-mode 227

Changing Settings for Shooting ････････････････････ 230

Changing Camera Settings ･･･････ Camera settings 232

Using Bar Code Reader ････････････Bar code reader 234

218

Camera

Before Using Camera

Notes for Capturing Images

• The camera employs high-precision technology, but some pixels

or lines may seem brighter or darker than others. Also, when you

capture images in places with insuﬃcient lighting, noises such as

white lines increase. This is not a malfunction.

• Clean the lens with a soft cloth before capturing. If the lens is

stained with ﬁngerprints or oil, the captured image may be out of

focus or blurred.

• Do not leave the FOMA terminal in a warm place or under a direct

sunlight for a long period of time. The image or video to capture

may deteriorate.

• If you capture under a ﬂuorescent light, mercury lamp, or sodium

lamp ﬂickering at high speed, ﬂickering such as stripes may

appear. The color tone of still images or moving pictures may vary

depending on the capturing timing.

• Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight for a long period of time

and do not point at the sun or a bright light directly. The image may

become discolored or the camera may malfunction.

• Do not cover the lens with your ﬁnger, hair, or the strap when

capturing.

• Capturing a fast moving object may result in an image slightly oﬀ

from the image displayed on the screen at the time of capturing, or

the image may be blurred.

• When the battery level is low, you may not be able to save captured

still images or moving pictures. Check the battery level before using

the camera.

• Captured still images or moving pictures may diﬀer from the actual

subjects in brightness or color tone.

• Even in Manner mode, the shutter tone sounds at a ﬁxed volume.

The shutter tone sounds from the speaker even when a Flat-plug

Earphone/Microphone with Switch (optional) is connected to the

FOMA terminal.

Using Camera

You can use camera with the terminal closed or opened.

This manual describes operations in horizontal capture mode

(in Turn View Style) as a priority.

Also, you can select the Inner or the Outer camera,

depending on the situation.

Outer camera

Useful for taking pictures of scenery or other people. The

screen output is similar to what you see (normal image).

The Auto focus adjusts the focus of still image capturing

with the Outer camera.→P225 Outer camera

Photo light/Light

Inner camera

Useful for taking pictures of yourself. Inverted (mirrored)

images are shown in the frame. Captured image can be

saved as either mirrored image or normal image.→P224

Inner Camera

219

Camera

Continue on the next page

Note

• Photo light turns orange or blinks when capturing a still image/

moving picture.

• The light can only be used for the Outer camera.

Capture Screen Components

The meanings of marks (icons and others) on the Still image/

Moving picture capture screen are as follows:

Still image capture screen

(horizontal capture mode)

Still image capture screen

(vertical capture mode)

Moving picture capture screen

(horizontal capture mode)

Continued on next page

220

Camera

Moving picture capture screen

(vertical capture mode)

Camera-mode→P223, P228

Photo-mode

Movie-mode

Funny face shot

Image size→P232, P233

5.1M (2560×1920)

3M (2048×1536)

2M (1600×1200)

1M (1280×960)

VGA (640×480) (Outer camera)

VGA (480×640) (Inner camera)

CIF (352×288)

QVGA (320×240)

QCIF (176×144)

Sub-QCIF (128×96)

Wallpaper (800×480)

* Numbers in parentheses of still image ﬁles indicate as in

horizontal capture mode. The right and left numbers switch

when capturing in vertical capture mode.

Quality→P233, P234

Super ﬁne

Fine

Normal

White balance

Auto

Incandescent

Sunny

Fluorescent

Cloudy

Light→P222, P227

OFF

When capturing

Always ON

AUTO

Shake reduction

Receiving mail→P34

Continuous mode→P232

Auto Manual

Scene mode→P232

Auto

Night scene

• Set this mode when capturing in a dark place, etc.

Portrait

Landscape

Sports

Sunset

221

Camera

Continue on the next page

Macro→P233

Battery level→P50

Auto timer→P232

3sec 10sec 15sec

Memory in use→P233, P234

Handset memory

External memory (microSD card)

Number of available shots→P448, P469

Focus frame→P225

The frame color changes to indicate status when the Auto

focus is in operation.

Zoom bar→P230

Exit key

Return to the previous screen.

Camera-mode

Photo-mode

Movie-mode

Bar code reader

Funny face shot

Album

CameraSW→P223, P227

Light

OFF

When capturing

Always ON

AUTO

Brightness→P231

Display key operation guide

Capturing→P223

Task status→P34

Size restriction→P234

No restriction For mail long For mail short

Type→P234

Sound+Video Movie only Sound only

Total recordable time

Start recording button→P227

Recording→P228

Note

• In horizontal capture mode, items a, q to v, B, and C

disappear in approximately 3 seconds after the Still image

capture screen/Moving picture capture screen is displayed.

Touch the screen to display.

222

Camera

Save Format of Still Images and Moving

Pictures

Still image ﬁle Moving picture ﬁle

File format JPEG MP4 (Mobile MP4)

Resolution*Outer

camera 5.1M (2560×1920)

3M (2048×1536)

2M (1600×1200)

1M (1280×960)

VGA (640×480)

CIF (352×288)

QVGA (320×240)

QCIF (176×144)

Sub-QCIF (128×96)

Wallpaper

(800×480)

QVGA (320×240)

QCIF (176×144)

Sub-QCIF

(128×96)

Inner

camera VGA (480×640)

CIF (352×288)

QVGA (320×240)

QCIF (176×144)

Sub-QCIF (128×96)

QVGA (320×240)

QCIF (176×144)

Sub-QCIF

(128×96)

Encoding

Format −Video: MPEG-4

Sound: AMR

File

Extension .jpg .3gp

* Numbers in parentheses of still image ﬁles indicate as in horizontal

capture mode. The right and left numbers switch when capturing in

vertical capture mode.

Still image ﬁle Moving picture ﬁle

Display

name of the

ﬁle

The year, month, date, hour, and minute at the time

of capture are added automatically.

Example: If taken at 10:10:10 on 2009/8/1

Photo-mode: "P2009_0801_101010"

Movie-mode: "V2009_0801_1010_X" (X is a

sequential number)

* If memory in use is "External memory" (microSD

card) and type is "Sound+Video" or "Movie

only", the ﬁle is named as "MOLXXX" (XXX is a

sequential number). If the type is "Sound only", the

ﬁle is named as "MMFXXXX" (XXXX is a sequential

number).

Maximum

ﬁle size Approx. 5.1MB QCIF: Approx. 58MB

Photo-mode

Capturing Still Images

• Captured still images are saved in the "Camera" folder in "My

picture" of "Data Box" on the FOMA terminal. To change the saving

destination to a microSD card, set in "Memory in use" (P233).



Stand-by display ▶

Still image capture screen

223

Camera

Continue on the next page

Touch/Key operations on the Still image capture screen

(horizontal capture mode)

Operation Description

Shutter

Zoom bar,

Zoom

"Menu" Display setting menu

Exit Photo-mode

(Camera-mode) Change Camera-mode

(Switch camera)

Switch between the Inner camera and the

Outer camera

(Light) Set lighting condition

(Brightness) Display the Brightness adjustment bar

Key operations on the Still image capture screen (vertical

capture mode)

Operation Description

[Take],

Shutter

Zoom

Adjust brightness

[Mode] Change Camera-mode

[Menu] Display setting menu

[Light] Set lighting condition

Exit Photo-mode

[CameraSW] Switch between the Inner camera and the

Outer camera

Display key operation guide

Select size→P232

Shot mode→P232

Scene mode→P232

Operation Description

Eﬀect→P232

White balance→P232

Funny face shot→P226

Macro→P233

Auto timer→P233

Memory in use→P233

Display captured images in "My picture" of

"Data Box"

Auto focus→P233



Point the camera to a subject ▶

The shutter tone sounds and the

still image is captured.

The Conﬁrm save screen appears,

and you can select whether to

save the image.

Conﬁrm save screen

(Ex.: Outer camera)

Continued on next page

224

Camera

Touch operations on the Still image conﬁrm save screen

(horizontal capture mode)

Operation Description

Create an i-mode mail with captured image

attached

Return to the Still image capture screen without

saving the captured image

Save the captured image

Save and upload the captured image to Picasa

Save the captured image as a mirror image

Check the captured image by switching to

normal/mirror image

Save all continuous pictures captured

Delete the selected image

*1 Appear only with the Inner camera.

*2 Appear only in the Continuous mode.

Key operations on the Still image conﬁrm save screen

(vertical capture mode)

Operation Description

I[Picasa] Save and upload the captured image to Picasa

[Mail] Create an i-mode mail with captured image

attached

[Save] Save the captured image

[New]

Return to the Still image capture screen without

saving the captured image

[Menu]

Save the captured image as a mirror image

Check the captured image by switching to

normal image

[Save all]

Save all continuous pictures captured

Operation Description

[Delete]

Delete the selected image

*1 Appear only with the Inner camera.

*2 Appear only in the Continuous mode.



The captured image is

automatically saved in the

destination speciﬁed under

"Memory in use" (P233) and the

Complete save screen will be

displayed.

• When using the Inner camera,

images on the capture screen

and the Conﬁrm save screen

are displayed as a mirror image,

however, the image will be saved

as a normal image. To save the

image as a mirror image, set

"Auto Saving" to "OFF" and touch

on the Conﬁrm save screen.

Complete save screen

(Ex.: Outer camera)

Touch/Key operations on the Still image complete save

screen (horizontal capture mode)

Operation Description

Create an i-mode mail with captured image attached

Return to the Still image capture screen

Set the captured image as wallpaper, etc. to the

Stand-by display

Edit the captured image

Delete the captured image

Upload the captured image to Picasa

225

Camera

Continue on the next page

Key operations on the Still image complete save screen

(vertical capture mode)

Operation Description

I[Picasa] Upload the captured image to Picasa

[Mail] Create an i-mode mail with captured image

attached

[New] Return to the Still image capture screen

[Menu] <Use as>

Set the captured image as wallpaper, etc. to the

Stand-by display

<Edit>

Edit the captured image

Delete the captured image

<Album>

Display captured images in "My picture" of "Data

Box"

Auto focus

When you capture images with the Outer camera, Auto focus

operates and the subject in the center of the screen can be

automatically focused on. When

is pressed on the Still image

capture screen, auto adjustment starts, then the focus frame

turns red. The focus frame turns green when focused, and

shutter clicks.

For images captured with "Continuous mode"

• The captured image is displayed on the left side and the

touched image is displayed in the center of the screen.

• To save all captured images, touch .

•

To select and send images via mail, touch images to send ▶ .

• To select and delete images, touch images to delete ▶ .

When "Auto Saving" (P233) is set to "ON"

Pressing

captures a still image and automatically saves it in

the destination speciﬁed under "Memory in use". (P233)

After the Complete save screen appears, the Still image capture

screen returns. However, in the Continuous mode, the screen that

notiﬁes of saving appears instead.

Note

• Even when Manner mode is activated, the shutter tone sounds

when capturing.

• If capturing with "Select size" set to "5.1M (2560×1920)" or

capturing using the Inner camera, the zoom feature cannot be

used.

• The FOMA terminal connects to the Picasa site. Log in the site

and upload ﬁles by mail attachment. The captured image is

retained up to the compose message screen for uploading so

make sure the receiver's address.

• A ﬁle of more than 2MB cannot be uploaded.

• For details, visit Picasa site (http://picasa.google.co.jp/) via

PC, etc.

226

Camera

Panorama Shot

You can create a panoramic image from 3 captured still

images taken by moving the FOMA terminal rightward.

• This option is available when the image size is "VGA (640×840)" to

"Sub-QCIF (128×96)"

• This option is not available for the Inner camera.



Stand-by display ▶



"Menu" ▶ "Preview" ▶ "Shot mode" ▶

"Panorama shot"

Panorama shot screen

Indicate where the

current frame is

G



Move the FOMA terminal rightward ▶



Move the FOMA terminal rightward ▶

A panoramic image made up of the 3 images is displayed.



Note

• The right edge of the previously taken image is displayed at the

left edge of the current capture screen, helping you to frame for

the next shot.

• Touching while capturing starts over capturing.

Funny Face Shot

If you point the camera to a subject, the camera recognizes

faces and you can convert them into various funny faces.

• About image size, you can select for the Inner camera from "VGA

(480×640)" to "QVGA(320×240)", for the Outer camera from

"Wallpaper (800×480)" to "QVGA (320×240)".



Stand-by display ▶

▶ (Camera-mode) ▶

"Funny face shot"



Select a funny face type

227

Camera

Continue on the next page

Funny face type

Type Description

(OFF) Cancel Funny face shot mode.

(Bighead) Change shape of head as enlarged.

(Mosaic) Apply mosaic to face.

(Animal mask) If this type is selected, animal mask type is

displayed. Select a mask type to cover face

with the selected animal mask.

(Snow) Apply eﬀect as if the snow is falling on the

entire image.

(Monotone) Apply black-and-white eﬀect.

(Facial color) Apply eﬀect to make face look like beautiful

skin.

(Outfocus) Blur face outline.

(Radialblur) Blur face outline radially.

(Fisheye) Apply eﬀect as if captured with Fisheye lends.

(Concave) Apply face to look shrunk.



Point the camera to the subject ▶

Once your face is recognized, the eﬀect is displayed on the

screen.



Movie-mode

Capturing Moving Pictures

• Captured moving pictures are saved in the "Camera" folder in

"i-motion" of "Data Box" on the FOMA terminal. To change the saving

destination to a microSD card, set in "Memory in use" (P234).



Stand-by display ▶

▶ (Camera-mode) ▶

"Movie-mode"

Moving picture capture

screen

Touch/Key operations on the Moving picture capture

screen (horizontal capture mode)

Operation Description

Start recording

Zoom bar,

Zoom (available while capturing)

"Menu" Display setting menu

Exit Movie-mode

(Camera-mode) Change Camera-mode

(Switch camera) Switch between the Inner camera and the

Outer camera

(Brightness) Display the Brightness adjustment bar

(Light) Set lighting condition

Continued on next page

228

Camera

Key operations on the Moving picture capture screen

(vertical capture mode)

Key Description

[Rec.],

Start recording

Zoom (available while capturing)

Adjust brightness

[Mode] Change Camera-mode

[Menu] Display setting menu

[Light] Set lighting condition

Exit Movie-mode

[CameraSW] Switch between the Inner camera and the

Outer camera

Display the key operation guide

Select size→P233

Auto Saving→P234

Video quality→P234

Eﬀect→P233

White balance→P234

Type→P234

Common mode→P234

Flicker tuning→P234

Memory in use→P234

Display captured images in "My picture" of

"Data Box"



Point the camera to the subject ▶

The tone sounds and capturing

moving picture starts.

• / : Pause/resume the

recording.

* Pause is not available when

"Type" is "Sound only".

Capturing moving picture

screen

Key operations while capturing moving pictures (vertical

capture mode)

Operation Description

[Pause] Pause/Resume capturing

[Stop] Stop capturing

[Cancel] Cancel capturing



The tone sounds and capturing

moving picture ends. The photo

light turns oﬀ. After a moving

picture is captured, the Conﬁrm

save screen appears, and you can

select whether to save the moving

picture.

Conﬁrm save screen

229

Camera

Continue on the next page

Touch operations on the Moving picture conﬁrm save

screen (horizontal capture mode)

Operation Description

Create an i-mode mail with captured moving picture

attached

"New" Return to the Moving picture capture screen without

saving the captured moving picture

Preview the captured moving picture

Save the captured moving picture

"YouTube" Save and upload the captured moving picture to

YouTube

Key operations on the Moving picture conﬁrm save screen

(vertical capture mode)

Operation Description

[Save] Save the captured moving picture

M[Play] Preview the captured moving picture

[YouTube] Save and upload the captured moving picture to

YouTube

[Mail] Create an i-mode mail with captured moving picture

attached

Return to the Moving picture capture screen

without saving the captured moving picture



The captured moving picture is

automatically saved in the save

location speciﬁed under "Memory

in use" (P234) and the Complete

save screen appears.

• When using the Inner camera,

images on the capture screen

are displayed as a mirror image,

however, images will be saved as

a normal image. Complete save screen

Touch/Key operations on the Moving picture complete

save screen (horizontal capture mode)

Operation Description

Create an i-mode mail with captured moving picture

attached

"New",

Return to the Moving picture capture screen

Preview the captured moving picture

Set the captured moving picture as wallpaper, etc. to

the Stand-by display

Delete the captured moving picture

"YouTube" Upload the captured moving picture to YouTube

Key operations on the Moving picture complete save

screen (vertical capture mode)

Operation

Description

[New] Return to the Moving picture capture screen

M[Use as] Set the captured moving picture as wallpaper,

etc. to the Stand-by display

[Delete] Delete the captured moving picture

[YouTube] Save and upload the captured moving picture

to YouTube

[Mail] Create an i-mode mail with captured moving

picture attached

When "Auto Saving" (P234) is set to "On"

Pressing /

stops the recording and automatically saves it in

the destination speciﬁed under "Memory in use" (P234).

The Complete save screen appears and the Moving picture capture

screen returns.

Continued on next page

230

Camera

Note

•

Even when Manner mode is activated, the shutter tone sounds

when capturing starts and ends.

•

Moving picture capturing will be terminated when it is interrupted by

a call arrival. After the call is terminated, the Conﬁrm save screen

appears, and you can save the moving picture recorded until the

interruption.

•

Playing moving pictures on a PC.→P447

• The FOMA terminal connects to the YouTube site. Upload ﬁles

by mail attachment. The captured moving picture is retained up

to the compose message screen for uploading so make sure

the receiver's address.

• A ﬁle of more than 2MB cannot be uploaded.

• For details, visit YouTube site (http://www.youtube.com/) via

PC, etc.

Changing Settings for Shooting

Set the Camera functions according to the capturing

conditions.

Using Zoom

Set the image zoom magniﬁcation.

• When capturing a still image, if capturing with "Select size" set to

"5.1M (2560 ~1920)" or capturing using the Inner camera, the zoom

feature cannot be used.



Still image capture screen (P222)/Moving

picture capture screen (P227) ▶ Slide the

Zoom bar to adjust zoom magniﬁcation

• Move the Zoom bar pressing

, or with your ﬁnger

touching the touch panel.

For vertical capture mode, using

also slides the zoom bar.

Zoom setting

(Ex.: Still image capture screen)

Zoom bar

231

Camera

Continue on the next page

Outer camera maximum magniﬁcation

Camera

-mode Image size*Zoom Maximum

magniﬁcation

Photo-mode

5.1M (2560×1920) − −

3M (2048×1536)

10 steps

Approx. 1.2 times

2M (1600×1200) Approx. 1.6 times

1M (1280×960)

Approx. 2.0 times

VGA (640×480)

CIF (352×288)

QVGA (320×240)

QCIF (176×144)

Sub-QCIF (128×96)

Wallpaper

(800×480) Approx. 1.6 times

Movie-mode QVGA (320×240) Approx. 2.0 times

QCIF (176×144) Approx. 3.6 times

Sub-QCIF (128×96) Approx. 5.0 times

* Numbers in parentheses indicate as in horizontal capture mode.

The right and left numbers switch when capturing in vertical

capture mode.

Outer camera maximum magniﬁcation

Camera

-mode Image size*Zoom Maximum

magniﬁcation

Movie-mode QVGA (320×240) 10 steps Approx. 2.0 times

QCIF (176×144) Approx. 3.3 times

Sub-QCIF (128×96) Approx. 5.0 times

* Numbers in parentheses indicate as in horizontal capture mode. The

right and left numbers switch when capturing in vertical capture

mode.

Adjusting Brightness

Adjust the image brightness (exposure). You can adjust

brightness in 9 steps.



Still image capture screen (P222)/Moving

picture capture screen (P227)



Display the Brightness adjustment bar

Horizontal capture mode

Touch .

Vertical capture mode

Press



Slide the Brightness adjustment bar to adjust

brightness

• Move the Brightness adjustment

bar with your ﬁnger touching the

touch panel.

In horizontal capture mode,

pressing F or E also allows to

slide.

For vertical capture mode, using

also slides the brightness

adjustment bar.

Brightness setting

(Ex.: Still image capture screen)

Brightness adjustment bar

232

Camera

Setting Auto Timer

Set the number of seconds from the time the shutter is

pressed until an image is captured.

• The Auto timer is not available for moving picture capturing.



Still image capture screen (P222) ▶ "Menu" ▶

"Preview" ▶ "Auto timer"



"3sec"/"10sec"/"15sec"

(the number indicates the number of seconds) appears at the

top of the screen.

• To release Auto timer, set to "OFF".

G

Auto timer starts. An image is captured automatically after the

set number of seconds.

After the shutter key is pressed, photo light blinks in orange and

the timer sound rings until the image is captured.

Camera settings

Changing Camera Settings

Still Image Capture Screen Setting Menu



Still image capture screen (P222) ▶ "Menu" ▶

"Preview"/"Others" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Select size]

Set the image size to capture.

[Shot mode]

Normal : Capture one still image.

Continuous mode : Press the shutter key to capture images

continuously.

• You can capture up to 6 continuous images

smaller than "CIF (352×288)", or up to

4 images of "CIF (352 ×288)".

• When "Auto" is selected, you can capture

continuous images by pressing the shutter

key once. When "Manual" is selected, you can

capture continuous images by pressing the

shutter key repeatedly.

Shoot with frame : Add a frame to the subject when capturing an

image. Select a frame from "My picture".

▶ Move the cursor to a folder ▶ [Open] ▶

Select a frame

Panorama shot*: Capture a panoramic image.→P226

[Scene mode]*

Capture a still image suitable for the capturing conditions.

[Eﬀect]

Add an eﬀect when capturing a still image.

[White balance]

Set hue/tint for the image. When set according to the capturing

conditions, a naturally colored image can be produced.

233

Camera

Continue on the next page

[Macro]*

Set close-up capturing.

• Become focused when distance between the Camera and subject is

approximately 10cm.

[Auto timer]

Select the number of seconds from the time the shutter is pressed

until an image is captured.

[Image quality]

Select the image quality used when saving the still image.

[Auto Saving]

Set whether to save the still image automatically.

[Memory in use]

Set the save location for the still image.

[Shake reduction]*

Set whether to enable the shake reduction function.

[Auto focus]*

Set the Auto focus.

• When "Face tracking" is selected, a face is recognized and focused

automatically. Up to 3 faces can be detected.

[Shutter sound]

Set the shutter tone.

[Flicker tuning]

The ﬂicker on the screen under a ﬂuorescent light, etc. may be

reduced.

Auto : Suppress the ﬂicker automatically.

50Hz : Select this option in an area where the frequency of the

power is 50Hz.

60Hz : Select this option in an area where the frequency of the

power is 60Hz.

[Reset settings]

Restore the still image capture settings to default.

* Not available for the Inner camera.

Note

• This option is available when the image size is "CIF (352×288)"

or smaller.

• When "Auto" is selected, the Outer camera captures at intervals

of approximately 0.7 seconds, and the Inner camera at intervals

of approximately 0.2 seconds.

• When "Continuous mode" is set, "Auto timer" is disabled.

• If you press while capturing, you can end capturing and the

Conﬁrm save screen appears.

• This option is available when the image size is "CIF (352×288)"

to "Sub-QCIF (128×96)" and "Wallpaper (800×480)" (Available

only for the Outer camera).

• When "Manual" is selected, the focus adjustment bar appears

on the Still image capture screen in horizontal capture mode.

Move the bar with your ﬁnger touching the touch panel. When

capturing in vertical capture mode, use H to display/adjust

the focus adjustment bar.

Moving Picture Capture Screen Setting Menu



Moving picture capture screen (P227) ▶

"Menu" ▶ "Preview"/"Others" ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Select size]

Set the moving picture size to capture.

[Eﬀect]

Add an eﬀect when capturing moving pictures.

Continued on next page

234

Camera

[White balance]

Set hue/tint for the image. When set according to the capturing

conditions, a naturally colored moving picture can be produced.

[Video quality]

Set the image quality used when saving the moving picture.

[Size restriction]

Restrict the ﬁle size of a moving picture.

[Memory in use]

Set the save location for a moving picture.

[Auto Saving]

Set whether to save the moving picture automatically.

[Type]

Set whether video and sound are to be included in a moving picture.

[Common mode]

Set ﬁle size suitable for attaching to i-mode mail (up to 500KB).

• If set to "On", you can select image size from "QCIF (176×144)" or

"Sub-QCIF (128×96)" and the Image quality is set to "Super ﬁne"

and the Size restriction is set to "For mail short".

[Flicker tuning]

The ﬂicker on the screen under a ﬂuorescent light, etc. may be

reduced.

Auto : Suppress the ﬂicker automatically.

50Hz : Select this option in the location where the frequency of the

power is 50Hz.

60Hz : Select this option in the location where the frequency of the

power is 60Hz.

[Reset settings]

Restore the moving picture capture settings to default.

Note

• If you record the moving picture in the size of "QVGA

(320×240)" in a room where 50Hz ﬂuorescent light is used,

ﬂicker may not be reduced.

Bar code reader

Using Bar Code Reader

You can scan information embedded in a JAN code or QR

code using the Outer camera. You can create i-mode mail

or connect to the Internet using the scanned information.

You can also save or play the scanned information, image or

melody.

• UP to 5 pieces of scanned information can be saved.

• Scan the code when the entire code is displayed on the screen.

• Hold the camera parallel to the code.

JAN codes

JAN code is a bar code representing numbers using

vertical bars in diﬀerent thickness and spaces. 8-digit

(JAN8) or 13-digit (JAN13) bar code can be scanned.

• The scanned result of the following JAN code is

"4942857123456".

235

Camera

Continue on the next page

QR codes

QR code is one of the 2 dimensional codes that express

text including alphanumeric characters, Kanji, Kana, or

pictographs in the vertical and horizontal patterns. Some

QR codes have an image or melody embedded, and some

are split QR codes where multiple images contain 1 larger

piece of information.

• The scanned result of the following QR code is "株式会社NTTドコ

モ (NTT DOCOMO, INC.)".

Scanning Codes

• When scanning bar cords, use the Outer camera and hold the FOMA

terminal approximately 10cm away from the code to scan.

M

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Bar code reader"

Scan screen

Key operations on the Scan screen

Operation Description

[Scan] Start Auto focus

[Mode] Change Camera-mode

[List] List the saved scanned data

[Light] Light ON/OFF

g[ ], Q

Exit Bar code reader



Display the code to scan within the screen ▶

[Scan]

After the auto focusing, scan the code.

When scanning completes, a tone sounds

and the scanned data appears.

• When the bar code reader is activated,

scanning starts automatically. When

focused, scan the code automatically

without pressing

[Scan].

• If you can not scan the code with auto

focus, press

[Retry] to scan the code

again.

• When Manner mode is activated, the tone

does not sound.

Scanned data

screen (Ex.: For a

melody)



Depending on the type of scanned data,

performs the following operations

• Depending on the scanned data, the screen or operation may

diﬀer.

• Always save the scanned data if you want to use it later.

• Up to 16 split QR codes can be continuously scanned and

combined.→P237

Continued on next page

236

Camera

For phone number

Select the displayed phone number to open the Phone

number entry screen with the scanned phone number

already entered.

If "Add to phonebook", etc. appears, select it to save to

the Phonebook.

For mail address

Select the displayed mail address to create i-mode mail

with the scanned mail address already entered.

If "Compose message", etc. appears, select it to create

i-mode mail with the scanned mail address or subject

already entered .

If "Add to phonebook", etc. appears, select it to save to

the Phonebook.

For URL

Select the displayed URL to access the URL.

If "Add bookmark", etc. appears, select it to save as

Bookmark.

For text

The scanned characters are displayed.

For image

The scanned image is displayed.

For melody

Press

[Play] to play the scanned melody.

If you press

[Stop] during a playback, the melody

stops.

For i-αppli

If "Start iappli", etc. appears, select it to launch.

Note

• Bar codes other than JAN codes, QR codes, and 2 dimensional

codes cannot be scanned.

• Bar codes may not be correctly scanned because of scratch,

smudge, damage, printing quality, or reﬂection of light.

• Some codes may not be scanned depending on the type, size,

or QR code version.

• If trying to save more than 5 pieces of data, a conﬁrmation

asking whether to delete older data ﬁrst appears. To save the

new data, select "Yes" ▶ select data to delete ▶ select "Yes".

• If Bar code reader cannot scan the code within approximately

30 seconds after being activated, a message indicating that

scanning failed appears. If the Bar code reader cannot scan the

code after a certain period of time, it automatically terminates.

• If the address has invalid characters, nothing is entered in the

address.

• Valid characters are numbers and symbols [#,

, +, −, P,

(, and )]. If the phone number contains characters other than

these, the call cannot be made.

• If "Barcode i-αppli To" (P283) is not set, you cannot start an

i-αppli from scanned data.

237

Camera

Continue on the next page

Scanned Data Screen Sub Menu

• Displayed items vary depending on the type of scanned data.



Scanned data screen (P235) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Copy]

Copy selected URL, phone number, or address on the scanned result

screen.

[Play]

Play the scanned data.

[Save to list]

Save the scanned data in a list.

[Save to Databox]

Save the scanned image or melody to "Data Box".

[Add to phonebook]

Save the scanned name, phone number, URL, or mail address to

Phonebook.

[Add bookmark]

Save the scanned URL to "Bookmark".

[Retry]

Scan the code again.

Scanning split QR codes

Perform Steps 1 and 2 in "Scanning Codes" (P235)

After the message "Scan next bar code" appears, scan the

next code

Repeat Step

• Press

to cancel scanning or

[Retry] to readjust the Auto

focus.

File name of the scanned data

The scanned data is automatically named using the year, month,

date, hour, and minute. The ﬁle cannot be renamed.

Example: If taken at 10:10 on 2009/8/1

JAN code:

"P2009_0801_1010_X.JAN" (X is a sequential number)

QR code:

"P2009_0801_1010_X.QR" (X is a sequential number)

Using/Deleting Saved Data



Scan screen (P235) ▶

[List]

To activate scan screen

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Scan".

To delete 1 item of saved scanned data

Move the cursor to data to delete ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Delete one" ▶ "Yes".

To delete all saved scanned data

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Delete all" ▶ enter the Terminal

security code ▶ "Yes".



Select the scanned data

For further operations, refer to Step 3 in "Scanning Codes"

(P235) depending on the type of data.

239

1Seg

1Seg ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 240

Before Using 1Seg ･･････････････････････････････････ 242

Setting Channels ･････････････････Channel settings 243

Watching 1Seg ･････････････････････ Activate 1Seg 245

Using i-αppli Program Guide ････････ Program guide 248

Setting Timer for Watching 1Seg Program

････････････････････････････････････････ TV timer list 248

Using Data Broadcasting ･･･････ Data broadcasting 250

Using TVlink ･････････････････････････････････ TVlink 251

Setting 1Seg ････････････････････････1Seg settings 252

240

1Seg

1Seg is a digital terrestrial broadcasting service for mobile

devices and provides data broadcasting as well as video

and sound broadcasting. Use i-mode to acquire the detail

information on TV programs, join panel shows, or enjoy TV

shopping.

• For details about "1Seg" service, visit the web site below.

The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting

PC: http://www.dpa.or.jp/english/

i-mode: http://www.dpa.or.jp/1seg/k/ (Japanese only)

Using 1Seg

• 1Seg is a service provided by TV broadcasters (broadcast

stations). Communication charge does not apply to receive video

and sound. For viewing fee of NHK, contact NHK.

• The information displayed on a data broadcasting domain has 2

types; "data broadcasting" and "data broadcasting site". "Data

broadcasting" is displayed on broadcast wave together with video

and sound, and "data broadcasting site" is accessed by connecting

to a site provided by TV broadcasters (broadcast stations) from

data broadcasting information. And it may be connected to "i-mode

site". Accessing to a site requires a separate i-mode subscription.

• Packet communication charges apply to view a "data broadcasting

site" or "i-mode site". Some sites (fee-based i-mode sites) require an

information fee for use.

About Signal

1Seg is one of the broadcasting services, and receives

a signal (broadcast wave) diﬀerent from FOMA service.

Therefore, regardless of whether the FOMA terminal is

in/out of service are, you cannot receive 1Seg broadcasting

in place the signal cannot reach or during the hours the

broadcasting is out of service.

Also, in the following places, the signal status may become

weak or the signal may not be received even if the FOMA

terminal is within a digital terrestrial broadcasting service

area.

• Place that is far from the tower which sends the broadcast wave

• Place where the signal is interrupted due to the landscape or

buildings such as mountain areas or behind a building

• Place where the signal is weak or does not reach such as a tunnel,

basement, or recess of a building

To improve the reception status, fully extend the 1Seg

antenna. Changing the direction of antenna, holding the

FOMA terminal apart from or close to your body or moving to

another place may also improve the reception status.

241

1Seg

Continue on the next page

Display when Using 1Seg for the First Time

When 1Seg is activated for the ﬁrst time after purchase, a

conﬁrmation of disclaimer appears.

Conﬁrm each term and press

[OK]. After this, the

conﬁrmation does not appear.

About Broadcast Storage Area

Broadcast storage area is a storage area in the terminal

speciﬁc for 1Seg. Information you entered following the data

broadcasting instruction is stored on the broadcast storage

area based on the TV broadcasters (broadcast stations)

setting. The stored information may include personal data

such as your answer results of quizzes, membership number,

gender, age, and occupation. The saved information may be

displayed on a data broadcasting site when viewing, or may

be sent to the TV broadcasters (broadcast stations) without

you re-entering it.

• To erase broadcast storage area→P252

• When you replaced or removed the UIM, a conﬁrmation asking

whether to initialize the broadcast storage area appears. Select

"Yes" to initialize the broadcast storage area. Selecting "No"

disables services using the broadcast storage area.

■ Display when reading the broadcast storage area

If you use the information saved in the broadcast storage

area while watching a program, a conﬁrmation "Use saved

information? It may include information used by the same

broadcasting group" appears. Select "Yes" to disable the

subsequent conﬁrmation on reading the saved information

performed while watching the same program. Select "Yes

(permanently)" to disable the subsequent conﬁrmation on

any program.

242

1Seg

Before Using 1Seg

Procedures for Watching 1Seg

Example: When watching 1Seg for the ﬁrst time

Step 1 : Channel settings→P243

Save channel lists corresponding to your area.

Step 2 : Activate 1Seg→P245

Save channel lists corresponding to your area.

1Seg Antenna

Fully extend the 1Seg antenna when watching 1Seg.

To extend the 1Seg antenna

Pinch the head of the 1Seg

antenna

, and pull it out in

the direction of the arrow

Fully extend the 1Seg

antenna

Hold the lower part of the 1Seg

antenna to change direction

• Forcibly trying to change the

direction of the 1Seg antenna

could deform or damage it.

To put the 1Seg antenna back

Hold the lower part of the

1Seg antenna and pull it down

straight

• Forcibly trying to put the 1Seg

antenna in could deform or

damage it.

Rotate the head of the 1Seg

antenna to ﬁt the depression

243

1Seg

Continue on the next page

Receiving a Call or Message while Watching 1Seg

While watching 1Seg, the FOMA terminal suspends 1Seg

program when following events occur. After the other task is

terminated, the FOMA terminal resumes the 1Seg program.

• The operations suspended with sound and video are the following:

- Receiving a voice/videophone call

- Receiving mail/SMS (when "Receiving display" is set to "Alarm

mode")

- Sounding an Alarm, or alarms set for Schedule event, To do task,

or Booked program

Note

• If 1Seg is used for a long time while charging, the battery life

may become shorter than estimated.

• Put the 1Seg antenna back in when 1Seg is not used.

Channel settings

Setting Channels

Conﬁguration of Channel settings beforehand to save a

channel list is required to watch 1Seg.

• Up to 10 channel list items can be saved. If you set a channel list

for other areas where you visit, you can watch the local TV program

there.

• Up to 62 channels can be saved in 1 channel list.

M

▶ "1Seg" ▶ "Channel settings"



If there is no channel list saved

The New channel creation screen appears.

If there is more than 1 channel list is saved

Move the cursor to "Not registered" ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Add new"



Perform the following operations

[Select area]

Select an area from area list registered in the FOMA terminal.

▶ Select a region to register ▶ Select a prefecture ▶

[Select]

▶ "Yes"

[Auto channel set]

Automatically set channels which can be received in your area.

▶ "Yes" ▶

[Save] ▶ "Yes"

• To cancel, press

[Cancel] ▶ "Yes".

• Press

[Retry] before saving to retry the setting.

Note

• "Select area" may not be conﬁgured properly depending on your

area. In this case, perform "Auto channel set".

• Make sure to perform the setting of "Auto channel set" within a

digital terrestrial broadcasting service area.

244

1Seg

Selecting a Channel List to Use

When multiple channel lists are saved, switch channel lists to

be used from those saved.

M

▶ "1Seg" ▶ "Channel settings"

The channel list in use is marked.

•

[Detail]: Display the detail screen of

the selected channel list.

Channel list

screen



Select a channel list to use

Channel List Screen Sub Menu



Channel list screen (P244) ▶ Move the cursor

to a channel list ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Add new]

Add a channel to the selected channel list.→P243

[Detail]

Display the detail screen of the selected channel list.

[Rename]

Change name of the selected channel list.

[Delete]

Delete the selected channel list.

• Currently used channel list cannot be deleted.

[Delete all]

Delete the all channel lists.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Channel List Detail Screen Sub Menu



Channel list screen (P244) ▶ Move the cursor

to a channel list ▶

[Detail] ▶

[Menu]

•

[Watch]: Display the selected channel.



Perform the following operations

[Replace remote no.]

Replace the remote controller number of the selected channel.

▶ Select a channel to change ▶ Select a new remote controller

number ▶ "Yes"

• If a destination number has a channel saved, the channel is

replaced with the target channel.

[Delete]

Delete the selected channel.

245

1Seg

Continue on the next page

Activate 1Seg

Watching 1Seg

• Perform channel settings before watching 1Seg.→P243

T

(for 1+ seconds)

• The conﬁrmation of disclaimer is displayed only at the ﬁrst

time. Read through the agreement and press

[OK].

• To terminate 1Seg, select

▶ "Yes".

1Seg Watch Screen Components

1Seg watch screen

(Vertical screen) Data broadcasting

(Full screen)

1Seg watch screen

(Horizontal screen (Standard))

Video

• Touch here to display Volume adjustment and Channel

selection icons.

Subtitles

Data broadcasting

Remote control no.

Strength of broadcast wave

Strong Weak

Operation mode

: TV : Data broadcasting

Channel name and program name

Volume

: Mute

In Multiple sound broadcasting

Main/Sub sound display

: Main+Sub sound : Main sound

: Sub sound

Continued on next page

246

1Seg

Key operations on the 1Seg screen

Operation Description

(Vertical) TV

(Horizontal)

Data

broadcasting

ーAdjust volume

(1+ seconds)

Mute

ーSelect a channel

Dial key,

(1+ seconds)

ーSearch receivable

channels→P246

ー

ーShow/hide program

name, etc.

[Disp]

Switch vertical/

horizontal (Standard)/

horizontal (Full screen)

ー

Switch TV and data

broadcasting

ーー

▶

Select a data

broadcasting item

[Disp]

(1+ seconds)

ー

[Disp]

(1+ seconds)

Switch normal

screen/full screen of

data broadcasting

ーDisplay program guide

▶ "Yes" Terminate 1Seg

* Turn to

in Turn View Style mode.

Note

• You can activate 1Seg from a link of 1Seg information

displayed in a site or mail (Media To).→P196

• Intermittent sound or image may be heard or seen due to

broadcast wave receptions. Also, a block-shaped noise may be

displayed or the image may not be displayed.

• The screen orientation automatically switches to horizontal by

tilting the FOMA terminal to the left.

• Placing the position of the FOMA terminal in horizontal direction

while data broadcasting is displayed, only video is displayed.

Searching Available Channels <Channel Search>

Search available channels in order of frequency and display

them.



1Seg watch screen (P245) ▶

(for 1+

seconds in vertical),

(for 1+ seconds in

horizontal)

Display available channels if any.

[Menu] ▶ select "Add to

channel list" to add to the channel list.

To cancel the channel search

Press

[Cancel]/

▶ "Yes".

Note

• When "Tuning..." is displayed for a long time in an area where

broadcast wave is weak, the channel search allows you to

search available channels.

• When moving to other area, the terminal may receive a channel

which is not saved in the Channel settings.

247

1Seg

Continue on the next page

1Seg Watch Screen Sub Menu



1Seg watch screen (P245) ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Channel settings]

Display the Channel list screen.→ P244

[TVlink]

Display a TVlink list.

[DBC]

Make data broadcasting setting.

Image display : Set Image display ON/OFF.

Eﬀect sound : This option is not available.

Certiﬁcate info : Display certiﬁcate at SSL communication.

Reload : Reload and display image.

Back to DBC : Return to data broadcasting.

[Switch TV/DBC]

Switch TV and data broadcasting.

[Display settings]

Set the display of the screen.

TV disp. Mode : Set the display of the screen.

DBC disp. Mode : Set the display of the data broadcasting.

Subtitles : Switch subtitle ON/OFF.

• Even if set to ON, subtitle may not be displayed

depending on a program.

Backlight : Set the backlight level of the display.

[Sound settings]

Set sound.

Mute(Unmute) : Mute/unmute the sound.

Main/Sub sound : Set main/sub sound.

Switch sound : Change the sound of multi sound broadcasting

program.

[Program guide]

Display program guide.→P248

[Recom. channel mail]

You can create a mail with the channel information you are watching.

If the destination FOMA terminal supports Media To function, the

information can be selected to activate 1Seg.

[Add to channel list]

Add the currently watching channel to the channel list.→P246

[Select service]

You can switch programs if these programs are in the same channel.

[Program info.]

Display the detail information about the program you are watching.

248

1Seg

Program guide

Using i-αppli Program Guide

By using i-αppli Program guide, you can select a program

from the program guide to start 1Seg or set timer for

starting 1Seg.

M

▶ "1Seg" ▶ "Program guide"

Press

[TV] to watch the program which is being broadcast on

the selected channel.

For further operations, refer to "Gガイド番組表リモコン (G-GUIDE

Program List Remote Controller)" (P283).

Note

• Pressing

on the 1Seg watch screen (in vertical) also

displays program guide.

• You can set i-αppli Program guide in "Program guide key

setting" in "Software set"→P278

TV timer list

Setting Timer for Watching

1Seg Program

Setting Timer to Start a 1Seg Program

Set "Announce on" to notify you of a program start by alarm

1 minute before the program starts.

• You can set or view timer from Schedule (P353).

• Up to 20 entries can be set.

M

▶ "1Seg" ▶ "TV timer list"

TV timer list

screen

I

[New] ▶ Perform the following operations

•

[Cancel]: Cancel adding a new booking.

[ (Set date)]

Specify the booking date.

[ (Set time)]

Specify the start time of the booking program.

[ (Channel)]

Select a channel.

[ Program title]

Up to 120 full-pitch or 240 half-pitch characters can be entered.

249

1Seg

Continue on the next page

[ (Announce on/oﬀ)]

Set whether to notify by alarm 1 minute before the program start.

If set to "Announce on", perform the following steps to select the

alarm tone.

▶

[List] on the ﬁeld ▶ Select a type of the alarm tone

Music : Select a music data saved in "Music" of "Data Box".

→P270

Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song as a Ring

Tone" (P266).

i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in "i-motion" of

"Data Box".→P307

Melody : Select a melody saved in "Melody" of "Data Box".→P314

[ (Set repeat)]

Set repeat booking of a program that is broadcasted regularly. Select

"None" for not to repeat.

If "Weekdays" is selected, perform the following steps to specify the

day of the week.

▶

[List] on the ﬁeld ▶ Mark days of the week ▶

[Done]

You can set period if other than "None" is selected.

▶

[List] on the ﬁeld ▶ "Set expiration" ▶ Use

select the date setting ﬁeld ▶ Select expiration date

I

[Done]

Note

• You cannot book a 1Seg program that starts now or within

1 minute.

• You can book a 1Seg program from a link of 1Seg information

displayed in a site or mail (Media To).→P196

• If "Announce on/oﬀ" is set to "Announce oﬀ", an alarm will not

sound. And 1Seg will not be activated.

When the alarm reaches the booked time

If "Announce on" is set, you will be notiﬁed by alarm 1 minute

before the starting time. The Alarm screen appears, the alarm

tone sounds, and the illumination lights up.

Press

[Watch] to start the 1Seg program. After started,

select

▶ "Yes" to terminate 1Seg.

• Press

[OFF] to stop the alarm (1Seg will not be activated at

the speciﬁed time.).

When multiple timer are set for the same time

Press

[Detail] on the Alarm screen ▶ select a program to

watch.

Checking Booking Information



TV timer list screen (P248) ▶ Select a booked

program to check

Booking program detail screen appears.

To edit the booking information

Press

[Edit].→P248

To delete the booking

Press

[Delete].

To add a new booking

Press

[New].→P248

250

1Seg

TV Timer List/Detail Screen Sub Menu



TV timer list screen (P248)/detail screen ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Add new]

Book a new 1Seg program to watch.

[Edit]

Edit the selected timer.→P248

[Delete]

Delete the selected booked program.

You can select followings on the TV timer list screen.

One : Delete the selected booked program.

Selected : Select and delete booked programs.

▶ Mark booked programs to delete ▶ g[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Sel. all/Clr. all] to select/clear all.

All : Delete all booked programs.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

Data broadcasting

Using Data Broadcasting

1Seg provides data broadcasting in addition to video and

sound. You can use various information containing images or

moving pictures such as a site connected with a program.

• You cannot watch data broadcasting in horizontal screen.

A

on 1Seg watch screen

appears and you can operate data broadcasting items.

• Press

to switch TV and data broadcasting.

• You can also switch TV and data broadcasting by touching

video/data broadcasting display area.

• Press

[Disp] for 1+ seconds to switch full screen and

normal screen of data broadcasting.



Select an item

• Some items connect to a data broadcasting site or an i-mode

site.

• Select "Yes" or "Yes (permanently)" if a conﬁrmation whether

to establish i-mode connection appears. Selecting "Yes

(permanently)" disables the subsequent conﬁrmations on the

same function, and the information of data broadcasting and

data broadcasting site may automatically be updated. Note

that packet communication charges may apply in such cases.

Note

• Even if you switch to data broadcasting from TV, the sound of

1Seg streams.

251

1Seg

Continue on the next page

TVlink

Using TVlink

Depending on a data broadcasting or data broadcasting site,

a URL or memo information can be saved as TVlink. If saved,

you can display the target information from a TVlink list.

Saving as a TVlink



Select an item that can be saved as a TVlink in

data broadcasting ▶ "Yes"

Displaying Saved TVlink

M

▶ "1Seg" ▶ "TVlink"

The TVlink list screen appears.

• You can also display a TVlink list by pressing

[Menu] ▶

"TVlink" on 1Seg watch screen.



Select a TVlink ▶ "Yes"

TVlink List Sub Menu



TVlink list screen ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[TVlink info]

Display the TVlink detail information.

[Delete]

Delete a selected TVlink.

[Delete all]

Delete all saved TVlinks.

Note

• The URL or memo information saved as a TVlink is available

only from 1Seg. Not available from i-mode or Full browser.

252

1Seg

1Seg settings

Setting 1Seg

M

[Menu] ▶ "1Seg" ▶ "1Seg settings" ▶

Perform the following operations

[Subtitles]

Show/hide subtitles.

[Backlight]

Set the backlight level of the Display.

[Set image display]

Set the display of the data broadcasting site.

[Set eﬀect sound]

This option is not available.

[Close setting]

Set whether to continue sound output even when the FOMA terminal

is closed.

[Main/Sub sound]

Set Main/Sub sound.

[Reset permission display]

Set to display the hidden conﬁrmation.

[Reset 1Seg settings]

Restore the settings in "Subtitles", "Backlight", "Set image display",

"Set eﬀect sound" and "Main/Sub sound" to their defaults.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Erase storage area]

Delete the storage area.

▶ Move the cursor to a broadcast station to delete the storage

area ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Delete"/"Delete all"

• The Terminal security code is required to delete all.

[1Seg settings status]

You can check 1Seg settings.

253

Music

Precautions for Music Data

• In this manual, Chaku-Uta Full

songs, WMA (Windows Media Audio)

ﬁles, and SD-Audio data (music data compatible with SD-Audio

standard) are collectively referred to as "music data".

• This FOMA terminal can play WMA ﬁles, protected by copyright

protection technology, Chaku-Uta Full

songs, and SD-Audio data.

• Before downloading music data from web sites, read the license

agreement (license and prohibited activities, etc.) carefully.

• Information unique to your FOMA terminal is used to play WMA

ﬁles, protected by copyright protection technology. If the

information unique to your FOMA terminal is changed due to failure,

repair, or changing model, WMA ﬁles saved before the change was

made may not play.

• Music data saved in the FOMA terminal or on a microSD card can

be played for personal use only. When playing music, do not violate

a third party's intellectual property rights such as copyright, and

other rights. Do not copy or move music data saved in the FOMA

terminal or on a microSD card to other media, such as a PC.

• DOCOMO assumes no responsibility for handling CCCD (copy

controlled CD) materials, or cases you cannot convert music data

to SD-Audio data.

• Precautions for Using or Handling a microSD Card→P317

Music&Video Channel

Music&Video Channel ･･･････････････････････････････ 254

Setting Programs ･･･････････････････････････････････ 254

Playing Programs ･･･････････････････････････････････ 256

Operating the Music&Video Channel from Data Box

･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 259

Music Player

Playing Music ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 260

Music Player ････････････････････････････････････････ 261

Saving Music Data ･･････････････････････････････････ 261

Playing Music Data ･･････････････････ MUSIC player 263

Using Playlist ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 267

Managing Music Data ･･･････････････････････････････ 270

Using Other Functions while Listening to Music

･･････････････････････････････････Play in background 272

254

Music

Music&Video Channel

Music&Video Channel is a service that automatically

downloads set music programs of up to approximately 1 hour

at night. Also, you can enjoy high-deﬁnition moving picture

programs of up to 30 minutes. The programs are updated

regularly. You can enjoy the programs at any time, such as

while commuting.

Before Using Music&Video Channel

• Music&Video Channel is a fee-based service requiring a separate

subscription. (The i-mode and Pake-hodai, Pake-hodai full, or Pake-

hodai double contracts are required for the subscription. The usage

fee may reach the upper limit if using Pake-hodai double, even if you

use the service only several times.)

• In addition to the usage fee for the Music&Video Channel, some

programs may require additional information fees.

• After subscribing to the Music&Video Channel, if you insert the

UIM into a FOMA terminal that does not support the Music&Video

Channel, the service becomes unavailable. However, service

charges still apply unless you cancel the Music&Video Channel

subscription.

• You cannot set or download programs while using the international

roaming service

. If you go overseas, deactivate the program

download before leaving Japan. When you come back to Japan,

activate the program download.

* Packet communication charges apply if setting or downloading

programs during international roaming.

• You can use mail or access an i-mode site while listening to a

Music&Video Channel program (Background playback).

Multitask Combinations→P445

• For details about Music&Video Channel, see "Mobile Phone User's

Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

Setting Programs

Set programs are automatically downloaded at night.

• Up to 2 programs can be set.

• You need to register a site to My Menu that provides Music&Video

Channel programs.→P187

M

▶ "MUSIC" ▶ "Music&Video Ch"

Music&Video

Channel screen



"Set program"

• No programs are set by default.

After programs are set, the program titles appear.



Follow on-screen instructions to set programs

• For details, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA

version".

255

Music

Continue on the next page

Note

• In order to set programs with another UIM inserted, start with

conﬁrming the program setting information from Program setting. If

checking the program setting information the programs that have

not been moved from "Distributed program" folder may be deleted.

• This is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription. If you

have not subscribed to the service, a message indicating that you

have not subscribed to the Music&Video Channel appears.

• Selecting "Program list" on the Music&Video Channel screen

displays the list of all programs oﬀered for the Music&Video

Channel.

Selecting "About this service" displays how to use the service and

any special cautions. Also, you can subscribe to the service from

here.

Viewing or Canceling Program Setting



Music&Video Channel screen (P254) ▶

"Set program"



Follow on-screen instructions

• For details, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA

version".

Note

• Canceling programs does not remove the My Menu registration.

After Specifying Programs

• appears on the Stand-by display 12 hours prior to the program

download.

• Programs are automatically downloaded at the designated

download time.

• Programs are downloaded automatically at night. appears on

the Stand-by display if the download has been successful, and

appears on the Stand-by display if the download has failed. Once

the Music&Video Channel screen is displayed, the icon disappears.

Note

• If the download is interrupted because the FOMA terminal is

out of service area or the communication is disconnected, the

download resumes automatically after 3 minutes. The attempts

will be made up to 5 times.

• If the programs are not downloaded at the download time

because the FOMA terminal is not turned on, the FOMA terminal

is out of service area, or the signal is weak, the programs will be

downloaded again at the same time on the following night.

• You cannot download the program except when the battery

is indicated as (When you attempt to download the

program, a message will appear to notify that you cannot start

downloading because of lower battery level).

• It may take a while to download programs. Make sure that the

battery level is suﬃcient and signal reception is strong when

downloading.

• Programs cannot be automatically downloaded in the

following cases. In each case, set the programs again on the

Music&Video Channel screen.

- If a diﬀerent UIM is inserted after programs were set

- If the UIM that programs were set with is inserted in another

Music&Video Channel compatible FOMA terminal

- If the memory in the FOMA terminal is cleared

• If the download is interrupted because the signal is weak etc.,

the programs will not be automatically downloaded again until

next time. Download programs manually.

• Downloaded programs are temporarily stored in the "Distributed

program" folder in "Music&Video Ch" of "Data Box". If the channel

to which the downloaded programs belong is updated, the

programs stored in the "Distributed program" folder are deleted

and the programs can no longer be playable. The programs you

want to keep should be moved to another folder.→P259

However, some programs may not be moved.

• If you set new programs, cancel a program, or cancel the

subscription to My Menu, Music&Video Channel, or i-mode, the

programs that have not been moved from "Distributed program"

folder are deleted.

• The ring tone does not sound and the terminal does not

vibrate when the program download starts or completes. The

illumination does not light/blink either.

256

Music

Downloading Programs Manually

If the download fails, download remaining programs manually.



Music&Video Channel screen (P254) ▶ Select

a program ▶ "Yes"

• appears to a program that was failed in downloading.

Note

• If you operate on the Music&Video Channel program list in Data

Box, move the cursor to a program that failed in downloading ▶

[Play] ▶ select "Yes".

• Even if the download was interrupted, the program can be

played up to the chapter downloaded before the interruption.

• Programs exceeding the playback count, playback period, or

playback limit cannot be resumed downloading.

• Depending on the time, manual download may not be possible.

Playing Programs



Music&Video Channel screen (P254) ▶ Select

a program

Music&Video

Channel player

screen

Chapter title/artist name

DOLBY setting

Not displayed for moving picture programs.

Program title

Playback progress bar/elapsed time/total time

Display the playback elapsed time using a bar.

Currently-playing chapter number/Total chapter numbers

Repeat setting

OFF

Chapter image/moving picture or program image

Volume

Control key

Display available navigation keys.

Key operations on the Music&Video Channel player screen

Operation Description

[Pause/Play] Pause/play

(1+ seconds) Go to the beginning of the current program

and pause

Adjust the volume

Play from the beginning of the current chapter

or play previous/next chapter

(Hold down) Rewind/fast forward while being held down

Switch the Repeat setting

Switch the DOLBY setting*

If multiple images are saved, display the

previous/next image*

Show/hide the chapter/program image* (If

both chapter image and program image are

saved, those images can be switched.)

[List] Display the Chapter list

[Web to] Access sites

257

Music

Continue on the next page

Operation Description

Quit the Music&Video Channel player

* Not available for moving picture programs.

Note

• Playback is paused in the following cases. The playback will

resume automatically after the operation completes.

- When a voice or videophone call arrives

- When i-mode mail or SMS is received (If "Receiving display" is

set to "Alarm mode")

- When an alarm sounds

• A program with playback restrictions cannot be played after the

playback count, playback limit, or playback period is exceeded.

You can check the playback count, playback limit, or playback

period in the Program information.

•

Some programs cannot be played other than in a set period time.

Broadcasting time follows the FOMA terminal time set with auto

time adjustment.

• When you attempt to play a partially downloaded program, a

conﬁrmation asking whether to download the remaining data

appears. Select "Yes" to start downloading. Select "Play" to play

up to the downloaded chapters.

•

When you play the program data overseas, the actual playback

limit expiration date may be earlier or later than the displayed date.

Music&Video Channel Screen Sub Menu



Music&Video Channel screen (P254) ▶ Move

to the cursor to a program ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Move program]

Move the selected program from the "Distributed program" folder.

→P259

[Delete]

Delete the selected program.

[Program info.]

Display information about the selected program.

[Chapter list]

Display chapter list of the selected program.→P258

[Connect to URL]

Access a site if the selected program contains a URL.

Note

• Deleting programs does not cancel the program setting.

Programs are automatically updated until you access the

Music&Video Channel site and cancel the setting.

Music&Video Channel Player Screen Sub Menu



Music&Video Channel screen (P256) ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[BGM]*

Play in background.→P272

[Expand]*

Display an enlarged moving picture.

[Chapter list]

Display a chapter list.

[Chapter info.]

Display information about the chapter in playback.

[Program info.]

Display information about the program in playback.

Continued on next page

258

Music

[Set repeat]

ON : Play program in playback repeatedly.

OFF : The program will not be repeated.

[DOLBY PRESETS]*

Set sound quality for program playback. (Dolby Mobile support)

• If "Original" is selected, you can set ON/OFF for every 3 items.

However, settings on "Sound Space for Headphones" only functions

with stereo earphone output but not function with the FOMA

terminal speaker.

[Chapter Image]*

Display the chapter image/program image. →P267

[Connect to URL]

Access a site if the program in playback contains a URL.

*1 Appear only for music programs.

*2 Appear only for moving picture programs.

Displaying Chapter List of Program

Select and play a chapter, or display the information.



Music&Video Channel player screen (P256) ▶

[List]

• appears for the chapter in playback.

•

[Play]: Play the selected chapter.

•

[Info.]: Display information about the selected chapter.

Program icons on the Music&Video Channel screen

The following icons which indicate a state of program download

or the category are displayed at the Music&Video Channel screen

or a Program list screen.

Icon Description

/ Downloaded program/Partially downloaded program

• " " is added for a played program.

• " " is added for a program than can be played only

at the set playback start time.

• "" is added for a program with playback

count/playback limit/playback period or operation

restriction at playback.

/Downloaded chapter/Chapter which failed to

download

Program which failed to update

Program to be downloaded (Not downloaded)

Downloading a program

259

Music

Continue on the next page

Moving to Save Program Folder

Downloaded programs can be moved from "Distributed

program" folder to another folder so that they will not

be overwritten. Moved programs can be played from

"Music&Video Ch" of "Data Box".

• To move a program, create a destination folder in the "Music&Video

Ch" folder beforehand.→P260

• Some programs cannot be moved.



Music&Video Channel screen (P254) ▶ Move

to the cursor to a program ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Move program"



Select a folder ▶

[Move]

• Select a folder other than the "Distributed program" folder.

Note

• Downloaded programs cannot be copied.

• Partially downloaded programs cannot be moved.

• Programs can be moved only within the FOMA terminal. They

cannot be moved to a microSD card.

Operating the Music&Video

Channel from Data Box

You can play or move the distributed programs from

"Music&Video Ch" of "Data Box", or edit the program titles.

Playing a Program from Data Box

M

▶ "Data Box" ▶ "Music&Video Ch"

•

[New]: Create a new folder.

Folder list screen



Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open]

Program list

screen



Move the cursor to a program ▶

[Play]

260

Music

Folder List Screen Sub Menu



Folder list screen (P259) ▶ Move the cursor to

a folder ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following

operations

[New folder]

Create a new folder.

• You cannot create a sub folder in a user-deﬁned folder.

[Rename]

Change the selected folder name.

[Delete]

Delete the selected folder.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in

"Data Box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the

microSD card.

Note

• The "Distributed program" folder cannot be renamed or deleted.

Program List Screen Sub Menu



Program list screen (P259) ▶ Move the cursor

to a program ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected program.

[Play]

Play the selected program.

[Move program]

Move the selected program from the "Distributed program" folder.

[Rename]

Change the title of the selected program.

[Delete]

This item : Delete a selected ﬁle.

Selected item : Select and delete ﬁles.

▶ Mark ﬁles to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All items : Delete all ﬁles in a folder.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

[Program info.]

Display information about the selected program.

[Chapter list]

Open the chapter list.→P258

[New folder]

This option is not available.

Playing Music

You can play music with the FOMA terminal in one of the

following 2 ways:

• Playing music with MUSIC player

Play Chaku-Uta Full

songs downloaded from a site, WMA ﬁles or

SD-Audio data saved to a microSD card using a PC.

• Playing as i-motion

Play audio-only i-motion downloaded using i-mode and saved in Data

Box.→P307

You can use mail or access an i-mode site while listening to

music (Play in background).→P272

261

Music

Continue on the next page

Music Player

Available Chaku-Uta Full

ﬁle format

File Format MP4

Bit rate 8 to 128kbps

Savable capacity (FOMA

terminal) Up to approx. 150MB

The number of playlists that

can be created Up to 10 songs

Available SD-Audio ﬁle format

File Format MPEG-2 AAC

Bit rate (stereo) 16 to 72kbps

The number of savable songs Up to 999 songs

The number of playlists that

can be created Up to 99 songs

Available WMA ﬁle format

File format WMA (Windows Media Audio 9

Standard, Windows Media Audio 10

Professional)

Bit rate 8 to 192kbps

The number of savable songs Up to 1,000 songs

Saving Music Data

Downloading a Chaku-Uta Full

Song

• Up to approximately 150MB of Chaku-Uta Full

songs of up to 5MB

each can be saved.

• Downloaded Chaku-Uta Full

song is saved in the "i-mode" folder in

"Music" of "Data Box" or a microSD card.



Access a site that provides Chaku-Uta Full

songs ▶ Select a Chaku-Uta Full

song to

download

After the download completes, a conﬁrmation appears.



"Save" ▶ Select save location

Play : Play the downloaded Chaku-Uta Full

song.

File property : Display information about the downloaded

Chaku-Uta Full

song.

Back : Return to the web site without saving the

Chaku-Uta Full

song.

• In addition, select the destination when a microSD card is

inserted on the terminal.

262

Music

Saving WMA Files in microSD Card

The following items are required to play WMA ﬁles with the

FOMA terminal:

• L-03B terminal

• FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional)

• PC (Windows Vista, Windows XP Service Pack 2 and later

(Japanese versions))

• Windows Media Player 10/11

• microSD card

* For Windows Vista, use Windows Media Player 11.



Insert microSD card into the FOMA terminal

• How to insert a microSD card→P316

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "USB mode

setting" ▶ "MTP mode"



Connect to a PC

• For details, refer to Step 2 and 3 in "Using the FOMA Terminal

as a microSD Card Reader/Writer" (P326).



Start Windows Media Player 10/11 and save

music data into a microSD card

• For operations of Windows Media Player 10/11, see Help for

Windows Media Player 10/11.

• After music data is saved, remove FOMA USB Cable with

Charge Function 01/02 from the FOMA terminal and PC.

Napster󰙽application

You can use Napster

application to save music data.

• Napster

application is available for download from the following

web site (in Japanese only).

http://www.napster.jp/

• If you have any question on Napster

application, visit the

following web site (in Japanese only).

http://www.napster.jp/support/

Note

• L-03B may not display or play some WMA ﬁles saved by

another FOMA terminal into a microSD card.

• If a microSD card that WMA ﬁles are transferred to using

another FOMA terminal, a PC may not recognize it even in MTP

mode. In that case, it is recommended to delete "WM" folder

and "WM_SYSTEM" folder on a microSD card using PC, etc., or

format the microSD card with L-03B. Note that if you format

microSD card, all data including music data is deleted.

Saving SD-Audio Data in microSD Card

The following items are required to play SD-Audio data with

the FOMA terminal:

• L-03B terminal

• FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional)

• PC (Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows 2000 (Japanese

versions))

• SD-Jukebox

• An audio CD that contains music you want to save

• microSD card

263

Music

Continue on the next page

SD-Jukebox

SD-Jukebox can be purchased from the following URL:

http://club.panasonic.co.jp/mall/sense/open/

(Japanese only)

SD-Jukebox works under Windows Vista, Windows XP, and

Windows 2000 (Japanese versions).

For details about the operating environment, visit the

following URL:

http://panasonic.jp/support/software/sdjb/

(Japanese only)



Insert L-03B CD-ROM (bundled with your FOMA

terminal) to a PC



Click "エンターテイメントツール (Entertainment

tools)"

Follow on-screen instructions to purchase "SD-Jukebox".



Install SD-Jukebox to a PC

For installing SD-Jukebox, see the instruction manual for

SD-Jukebox.



Insert microSD card into your FOMA terminal,

then connect to the PC

• How to insert a microSD card→P318

• Connecting to your PC→P326



Start SD-Jukebox to save music data to

microSD card

• On how to operate SD-Jukebox, see Help for SD-Jukebox.

• After music data is saved, remove the FOMA USB Cable with

Charge Function 01/02 from the FOMA terminal and PC.

MUSIC player

Playing Music Data

You can continuously play all songs saved in the FOMA

terminal and the microSD card, or only play songs speciﬁed

by artist name, genre, or album title.

Example: To play music in "All songs"

M

▶ "MUSIC" ▶ "MUSIC player"

Music screen



"All songs"

Playlists : Display, create, or play a

playlist.→P267

Artist : Sort and display music data

by artist.

Genre : Sort and display music data

by genre.

Album : Sort and display music data

by album.

Resume play : Play last played song/

playlist. (if a song is currently

played, "Now playing" is

displayed and select to

display the play screen.)

• Music data saved in the FOMA terminal

Music data list

screen (song list)

Continued on next page

264

Music

• : Music data saved in a microSD card



Move the cursor to a music data ▶

[Play]

Play the selected music data in the displayed order in the music

data list.

MUSIC player

screen

Song title, artist name

DOLBY setting

Album name

Elapsed time/playback progress bar/total time

Display the playback elapsed time using a bar.

Repeat setting

None

Current song

Play all

Jacket image/lyrics

Volume

Control key

Display available navigation keys.

Shuﬄe

Shuﬄe Oﬀ

Shuﬄe On

Key operations on the MUSIC player screen

Operation Description

[Pause/Play] Pause/play

(1+ seconds) Go to the beginning of the current song and

pause

Adjust the volume

Play from the beginning of the current song or

play the previous/next song

(Hold down) Rewind/fast forward while being held down

Switch the Shuﬄe setting

Switch the Repeat setting

Switch the DOLBY setting

Display the previous/next image

Show/hide jacket image/lyrics

[List] Display the Music data list screen

While the list screen is displayed, appears to

the right of the song title in playback.

Quit MUSIC player

Note

• Playback is paused in the following cases. The playback will

resume automatically after the operation completes.

- When a voice or videophone call arrives

- When i-mode mail or SMS is received (If "Receiving display" is

set to "Alarm mode")

- When an alarm sounds

• Sound eﬀects such as the key tone do not sound during music

data playback.

• Sorting conditions for artists, genre, and album is in accordance

with the detailed information about the music data. "Unknown" is

displayed, however, in the "Genre" ﬁeld because SD-Audio does

not support "Genre" information.

• When you play the music data overseas, the actual playback limit

expiration date may be earlier or later than the displayed date.

265

Music

Continue on the next page

Music Data List Screen Sub Menu



Music data list screen (P263) ▶ Move the

cursor to a music data ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform

the following operations

•

[Play]: Play the selected music data.

•

[Playlist]: Add the selected music data to a playlist.→P270

[Play]

Play the selected music data.

[Add to playlist]

Add the selected music data to a playlist.→P270

[Multiple choice]

Select and play multiple music data. Operations during playback are

the same with for a playlist.→P268

▶ Mark music data to play ▶

[Play]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Play", "Add to playlist", "Sort", "Select all"

or "Clear all".

You can add marked music data to a playlist by selecting "Add to

playlist".

[Search]

Specify "Title", "Artist", "Album", "Genre", or "Year"

to search music

data.

▶ Select an item ▶ Enter the item ▶

[Search]

• All music data that match all speciﬁed conditions are displayed.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort music data.

[File property]

View or edit information about the selected music data.

▶ Move the cursor to an item ▶

[Edit] ▶ Edit the item

• Some items are not editable.

• WMA ﬁle/SD-Audio data information is not editable.

*1 Music data in Artist/Genre/Album will not be displayed in the

Music data list screen.

*2 Cannot search in SD-Audio data by "Year".

MUSIC Player Screen Sub Menu



Music/SD-Audio player screen ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

[Go to MUSIC]

Display the Music screen while playing music data.→P263

[BGM]

Play music data in background.→P272

[List]

Display the Music data list screen.→P263

[File property]

View or edit information about the music data in playback.

▶ Move the cursor to an item ▶ I[Edit] ▶ Edit the item

• Some items are not editable.

• The properties of WMA ﬁles/SD-Audio data are not editable.

[Shuﬄe On/Shuﬄe Oﬀ]

Enable or disable shuﬄe play.

Continued on next page

266

Music

[Set repeat]

None : The program will not be repeated.

Current song : Play music data in playback repeatedly.

Play all : Play all music data on the Music data list screen

repeatedly.

[DOLBY PRESETS]

Set sound quality for program playback. (Dolby Mobile support)

• If "DOLBY CUSTOM" is selected, you can set ON/OFF for every 3

items. However, settings on "Sound Space for Headphones" only

functions with stereo earphone output but not function with the

FOMA terminal speaker.

[Jacket image]

Display the jacket image or save it to Data Box.→P267

[Lyric]

Display the lyrics or save it to Data Box.→P267

[Set as tone]

Set the music data in playback as a ring tone.→P266

[Connect to URL]

Access a site if the music data in playback contains a URL.

* Not available for WMA ﬁles/SD-Audio data.

Setting a Chaku-Uta Full

Song as a Ring

Tone



MUSIC player screen (P264) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Set as tone"



Select a ring tone type



Select a range to set as the ring tone

• Depending on a Chaku-Uta Full

song, some items cannot be

selected.

[Full song ring tone]

Set the entire Chaku-Uta Full

song in playback as a ring tone.

[Point ring tone]

If the Chaku-Uta Full

song in playback has already a range speciﬁed,

this option is available.

[Free point ring tone]

Specify and set start and end points as a range for the ring tone.

▶ Use

to ﬁnd a starting point ▶

[Start] ▶ Use

to ﬁnd an

ending point ▶

[End]

Note

• If selecting "Alarm tone", further select an alarm to set. (Only

alarms set to "ON" in advance can be selected.)

• Some Chaku-Uta Full

songs cannot be set as a ring tone.

• Music data on a microSD card cannot be set as a ring tone.

267

Music

Continue on the next page

Viewing Images or Lyrics Contained in a

Music Data

You can view and save jacket images, lyrics, chapter image

etc. contained in music data.



MUSIC player screen (P264) ▶

[Menu]

▶ "Jacket image"/"Lyric"/"Chapter image" ▶

Perform the following operations

[Next image]

View the next image/lyrics.

[Prev. image]

View the previous image/lyrics.

[Full view]

View an image/lyrics in full screen.

[Display On/Oﬀ]

Show/hide jacket image/chapter image or lyrics.

[Save in Databox]

Save the displayed image/lyrics to "i-mode" folder in "My picture" of

"Data Box".

• Not available for WMA ﬁles/SD-Audio data.

* Do not appear for "Chapter image".

Using Playlist

You can specify the order of music data to play in a playlist.

You can play any songs in the order of your choice from all

songs saved in the FOMA terminal and on the microSD card.

Creating a Playlist

Up to 10 of All songs playlist and up to 99 of SD-Audio

playlist can be saved. Up to 99 music data for each playlist

can be saved.

M

▶ "MUSIC" ▶ "MUSIC player" ▶ "Playlists"

▶ Select an item

All songs playlist : Display playlists created

on the FOMA terminal.

WMA playlist : Display WMA ﬁles

playlists.

• Playlist transferred from

PC. This playlist cannot

be created or edited on

the FOMA terminal.

SD-Audio playlist : Display SD-Audio data

playlists. Playlist list

screen

I

[New] ▶ Enter a playlist name

• Up to 30 full-pitch or half-pitch characters can be entered.



Select a playlist ▶

[Add] ▶ Select a folder

Continued on next page

268

Music



Mark music data to save to the playlist ▶

[Done]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Sort", "File property", "Select all", or

"Clear all".

Playing a Playlist



Playlist list screen (P267) ▶ Select a playlist

Playlist music

data list screen



Move the cursor to a music data ▶

[Play]

Play the selected music data in the order of displayed in the

music data list.

Playlist List Screen Sub Menu



Playlist list screen (P267) ▶ Move the cursor

to a playlist ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Play]

Play the selected playlist.

[New playlist]

Create a playlist.→P267

[Rename]

Change the playlist name.

[Copy playlist]

Copy the selected playlist and create a new playlist.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the name of a new playlist

[Delete playlist]

Delete the selected playlist.

[Multiple choice]

Select and delete playlists.

▶ Mark a playlist to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Delete", "Select all", or "Clear all".

* Not available for SD-Audio playlist.

Note

• WMA playlist list screen contains no sub menu items.

• These options are unavailable for "Quick playlist".

269

Music

Continue on the next page

Playlist Music Data List Screen Sub Menu



Playlist music data list screen (P268) ▶ Move

the cursor to a music data ▶

[Menu] ▶

Perform the following operations

•

[Add]: Add the music data to the displayed playlist.

[Play]

Play the selected music data.

[Add songs]

Add music data to the displayed playlist.

Select a folder ▶ Mark music data to add ▶

[Done]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Sort", "File property", "Select all", or "Clear

all".

[Multiple choice]

Select and play multiple music data. Operations during playback are

the same with for a playlist.

▶ Mark music data to play ▶

[Play]

• Press

[Menu] to select "Play", "Delete from list"

, "Sort", "Select

all" or "Clear all".

[Move]

Change the order of the selected music data.

[Delete from list]

Delete the selected music data from the playlist.

[Search]

Specify "Title", "Artist", "Album", "Genre", or "Year"

to search music

data.

▶ Move the cursor to an item ▶ Enter the item ▶

[Search]

• Music data that match all speciﬁed conditions are displayed.

• On Search result screen, press

[Menu] to select "Play", "Add

to playlist"

, "Multiple choice", "Save"

, "Sort" or "File property".

Selecting "Save" deletes music data that were not found from the

playlist.

[Sort]

Sort music data by the saved information.

[File property]

View or edit information about the selected music data.

▶ Move the cursor to an item ▶

[Edit] ▶ Edit the item

• Some items are not editable.

• The properties of WMA ﬁles/SD-Audio data are not editable.

*1 Not available for WMA playlist.

*2 Cannot search in SD-Audio data by "Year".

*3 Do not appear for WMA playlist/SD-Audio playlist.

270

Music

Adding Music Data to a Playlist

M

▶ "MUSIC" ▶ "MUSIC player" ▶ "All songs"



Move the cursor to a music data to save ▶

[Playlist] ▶ Select a playlist

The music data is added to the selected playlist.

•

[New]: Create a new playlist with the selected music data.

To save multiple music data

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Multiple choice" ▶ mark music

data to save ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Add to playlist" ▶ select

a playlist.

Saving Music Data to Quick Playlist

For the music data you often listen to, you can save them to

"Quick playlist" by easy steps.

• To play the saved music data, select "Quick playlist" on the Playlist

list screen.



Music data list screen (P263) ▶ Move the

cursor to a music data to save ▶ A(for 1+

seconds)

• In Turn View Style mode, touch a music data to save for 1+

seconds.

Managing Music Data

Music data are saved in the "Music" of "Data Box".

Delete or move a Chaku-Uta Full

songs from Data Box.

• WMA ﬁles cannot be deleted or edited on the FOMA terminal. Use

PC for the operations.

• SD-Audio data cannot be deleted using the FOMA terminal. Use

SD-Jukebox to delete it.

M

▶ "Data Box" ▶ "Music"



Move the cursor to "i-mode"/"Movablecontents"/

a user-deﬁned folder ▶ C[Open] ▶ Move the

cursor to a Chaku-Uta Full

song ▶ M[Menu]

▶ Perform the following operations

•

[Switch]: Switch between List view and Grid view.

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected Chaku-Uta Full

song.

• If "WMA" or "SD-Audio" folder is selected, the operation is the

same as for music data playback.→P263

[Files]

Play : Play the selected Chaku-Uta Full

song.

Rename : Change the selected Chaku-Uta Full

song name.

Reset name : Reset the display name of the selected ﬁle to

"Title" - "Artist".

File property : View or edit information about the selected

Chaku-Uta Full

song.

▶ Move the cursor to an item ▶

[Edit] ▶ Edit

the item

• Some items are not editable.

• Move the cursor to the edited item and press

[Init.] ▶ "Yes" to undo the edit.

Jacket image : Save images contained in a Chaku-Uta Full

song.

→P267

Lyric : Save lyrics contained in a Chaku-Uta Full

song.

→P267

271

Music

Continue on the next page

[Delete]

One : Delete a selected Chaku-Uta Full

song.

Selected : Select and delete Chaku-Uta Full

songs.

▶ Mark Chaku-Uta Full

songs to delete ▶

[Done]

▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Delete all Chaku-Uta Full

songs in a folder.

▶ I[Done] ▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security

code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Move]

One : Move a selected Chaku-Uta Full

song.

▶ Select a destination folder

Selected : Select and move Chaku-Uta Full

songs.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶ Mark Chaku-Uta Full

songs to move ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Move all Chaku-Uta Full

songs in a folder.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the

Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Copy]

This option is not available.

[Set as tone]

Set the selected Chaku-Uta Full

song as a ring tone.→P266

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort Chaku-Uta Full

songs.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in

"Data Box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the

microSD card.

[New folder]

Create a new folder.

[List view/Grid view]

Switch between List view and Grid view.

Note

• If the music data saved in a playlist is deleted or moved

between the FOMA terminal and a microSD card, the music

data is deleted from the playlist.

• Sub menu available when a folder is selected is the same as

"My Picture Screen Sub Menu" (P297).

• You cannot create a sub folder in a user-deﬁned folder. (Up

to 2 levels of folder hierarchy can be created only in "Movable

contents" folder.)

Icons for Chaku-Uta Full

songs in "Data Box"

Icon Description

/ Playback count is limited (Playable)/reached

the playback count limit (Not playable)

/ Not expired (Playable)/expired (Not playable)

Files on the microSD card

272

Music

Play in background

Using Other Functions while

Listening to Music



During a music playback,

[Menu] ▶ "BGM"

Display the Stand-by

display during music

playback.

or appears at the

top of the screen and

music information such as

song/artist names appears

on the Stand-by display.

Icon indicating

BGM playback

Information such

as song title,

artist name

Note

• During the background playback, press

to adjust the

volume.

• To return to the MUSIC player screen during background

playback, press

▶ (MUSIC player).

• To stop the background playback, press

▶ "Yes".

• During background playback, i-motion set for the Stand-by

display will not be played. The default Stand-by display is

displayed instead.

• While music data on the microSD card is played in background,

the other functions may not be able to access the microSD

card. In this case, stop the background playback.

273

i-αppli

i-αppli ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 274

Downloading i-αppli from Sites ･････････････････････ 274

Starting i-αppli ･･････････････････････････････････････ 275

Starting i-αppli Automatically ･･････････････････････ 284

Starting i-αppli from a Site or Mail ･･･ Set i-αppli To 285

Setting i-αppli Stand-by Display

･････････････････････････････ i-αppli Stand-by display 285

Viewing Various Information ･････････････i-αppli info 286

Deleting i-αppli ･････････････････････････････････････ 287

Using Various i-αppli Functions ･････････････････････ 287

274

i-αppli

"i-αppli" is software for i-mode compatible mobile phones.

Downloading various software from i-mode sites allows

updating stock price or weather information automatically,

playing games without connecting to a network, or using the

FOMA terminal more conveniently.

• Packet communication charges apply.

• When using overseas, packet communication charges diﬀer from

domestic charges.→P408

• For details about i-αppli, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]

FOMA version".

Downloading i-αppli from Sites

You can download software from a site and save it to the

FOMA terminal.

• Up to 1MB of software can be downloaded.

• Up to100 downloaded software can be saved. However, the savable

number may be reduced by the software data size.

• i-αppli does not support touch operation.



While viewing a site ▶ Select a software ▶ "Yes"

•

[Cancel]: Cancel downloading.

When "Display SW info" is set to "Display"

Software information is displayed. Press

[OK] ▶

"Yes" to download the software.



Download complete ▶ "Yes"

The downloaded software starts.

• Depending on the software, after the software is downloaded,

a screen to set operating condition may be displayed. The

settings can be changed later from "Software set".→P277

Note

• During download, a conﬁrmation may appear notifying you

that the software will use the terminal data (stored data

and serial number of the terminal/UIM). Select "Yes" to start

downloading. Press

[Detail] to check the details of the

terminal data to be used. In this case, the terminal data is sent

to the IP (Information provider) via the Internet, and it could

be intercepted by a third party. However, this action does not

reveal your phone number, postal address, age, or gender to the

IP or others.

• If you attempt to re-download software that has already been

downloaded with a diﬀerent UIM, a conﬁrmation asking whether

to overwrite the downloaded software appears. Select "Yes" to

overwrite.

• If the maximum number of software which can be saved is

reached or if there is not enough memory space, a conﬁrmation

for deletion of other i-αppli appears.

If there is not enough memory space, you can select i-αppli

to delete, checking the required memory space to store a new

application.

To delete i-αppli, select "Yes" ▶ mark software to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes" to delete the marked software and to start

downloading.

• For Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli, some i-αppli may not be

downloaded depending on the IC card data capacity even if

software storage space is available. Follow the conﬁrmation

screen and delete the software displayed on the screen to start

download again. (Some software may not be the deletion target

depending on the type of software to download.) Some software

deletes the software itself after you start the software and

delete data in the IC card.

275

i-αppli

Continue on the next page

• If the software download fails due to weak signal reception, the

software may be saved partly. If you download again or select

the partly saved i-αppli on the Software list, the rest of the ﬁle

will be downloaded together.

• Even if the software download fails due to weak signal reception

after old software was deleted to increase the available space

on the FOMA terminal, the old software cannot be restored.

• Some software that starts immediately after being downloaded

cannot be saved.

Downloading a Mail-Connected i-αppli

Note the followings if you download a mail-connected i-αppli.

• If you download a mail-connected i-αppli, a folder for the mail-

connected i-αppli is automatically created in Inbox and Outbox.

A 0created folder takes the downloaded mail-connected i-αppli

name and it cannot be changed.

• Up to 17 (100 including all other i-αppli) mail-connected i-αppli

can be saved.

• If you attempt to download a mail-connected i-αppli, which will use

an existing folder for a mail-connected i-αppli saved in the FOMA

terminal, the attempt will be denied.

• If only a folder for a mail-connected i-αppli is left in the FOMA

terminal, and you attempt to download a mail-connected i-αppli

again which uses the same folder, the folder can be used. If the

folder is not used, you can delete it and create a new folder. A

mail-connected i-αppli cannot be downloaded if you do not create

a folder for it.

• The folder for the compatible mail-connected i-αppli cannot be

deleted with the mail-connected i-αppli left in the FOMA terminal.

The folder can be deleted when a mail-connected i-αppli is not in

the folder. In this case, folders created in both Inbox and Outbox are

deleted at a time.

• When you delete an mail-connected i-αppli, you can select whether

to delete the automatically created folder at once. However, if

protected mails are in the folder, the folder cannot be deleted.

Display SW info

Viewing i-αppli Information at Download Time

Set whether to display software information when

downloading the software.

M

▶ "i-αppli" ▶ "i-αppli settings" ▶ "Display

SW info" ▶ "Display"/"Not display"

Starting i-αppli



Stand-by display ▶

(for 1+ seconds)

•

[Switch]: Switch the view of the

Software list screen.

•

[

▲

[

▼

]: Scroll to the screen to

previous/next page.

Software list

screen

Icons on the Software list screen

Icon Description

Standard i-αppli

i-α ppliDX

Auto start set i-αppli

i-αppli downloaded via SSL communication

i-αppli set to Stand-by display

Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli

Continued on next page

276

i-αppli

Icon Description

The iC transfer service is used yet i-αppli is

not downloaded→P290

Partly saved i-αppli



Select a software

• If "Network set" of "Software set" is set to "Conﬁrm every

session", a conﬁrmation whether to allow the communication

appears. Select "Yes"/"No".

To exit an i-αppli

Press

▶ "Yes".

Starting software from other software

Some software can start a speciﬁed i-αppli without returning to

the Software list screen.

• If the software to be started is not saved in the FOMA terminal,

you need to download it.

• If the software to be started is not speciﬁed, follow on-screen

instructions to select a software.

If a security error occurs

If you attempt to perform operations that are not permitted for

the software, a security error is indicated and the error content is

logged in "Security error history".→P286

If a problem occurs with software

If a problem occurs with the software, you can check the

contents using the Trace info.→P286

To i-αppli creators

If software does not work as expected at creation process, you

may use the Trace info for your reference.

Note

• Some software performs communication while running. You can

change the settings in "Network set" of "Software set" not to

automatically perform communication.→P277

• If an incoming voice or videophone call arrives when the

software is running, you can answer the call pausing the

software. After the call is terminated, the previous screen

returns.

• Even when the software is running, you can receive mail or

MessageR/F. The software keeps running, and , , or ,

etc. appears at the top of the screen. To view the received mail

or MessageR/F, terminate the software.

• Images used by an i-αppli* or data you entered may be

automatically sent to the server via the Internet.

* Images used by the i-αppli include: images captured with

Camera that is started from a Camera-linked (connected)

application, images obtained using infrared communication

function of the i-αppli, images downloaded from a site or web

site, and images the i-αppli obtained from Data Box.

• You cannot start software downloaded using a diﬀerent UIM.

• Depending on i-αppli, the tone may not sound.

• Depending on the software, the IP (Information provider) can

access programs saved on your FOMA terminal and directly

disable their use. In this case, the software cannot be run or

updated, however, it can still be deleted, and the software

information can still be viewed. To use the software again, the

software needs to perform communication for the software

suspend cancelation. Contact your IP.

• Depending on the software, the IP may send data to a software

saved on your FOMA terminal.

• In the event that the IP disables/re-enables the software or

sends data, your terminal performs communication and

blinks. No packet communication charges apply in this case.

277

i-αppli

Continue on the next page

Software List Screen Sub Menu



Software list screen (P275) ▶ Move the cursor

to a software ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Set i-αppli To]

Set conditions to start the selected software.→P285

[Auto start time]

Set whether to start the selected software automatically, and set

the date and time to start if the auto start is speciﬁed.→P284

[Software set]

Set the selected software settings.→P277

[Software info]

Display the selected software information such as a name and

version of the i-αppli. The displayed items diﬀer depending on the

software.

[Upgrade]

Upgrade the selected software.

[Delete]

Delete a software.→P287

Note

• During an update, a conﬁrmation may appear notifying you

that the upgrading will use terminal data (stored data or

serial number of the terminal/UIM). Select "Yes" to start

downloading. Press

[Detail] to check the details of the

terminal data to be used. In this case, the terminal data is sent

to the IP (Information provider) via the Internet, and it could

be intercepted by a third party. However, this action does not

reveal your phone number, postal address, age, or gender to the

IP or others.

Setting i-αppli Operating Conditions

Set operating conditions for each software program. You can

set a software to automatically perform communication while

it is running or set separately whether to allow to browse

icon information, Phonebook, etc.

• Some items may not be changed depending on the software.

Software list screen (P275) ▶ Move cursor

to the software ▶ M[Menu] ▶ "Software

set" ▶ Perform the following operations

[Stand-by display]

Set the selected software as the Stand-by display.→P285

[Network set]

Set whether to allow communications while software is running.

[Stand-by network set]

Set whether to allow communications while i-αppli is set as the

Stand-by display.

Continued on next page

278

i-αppli

[Icon info]

Set whether to allow software to use the icons of mail, MessageR/F,

in/out of service area, battery level, or Manner mode.

[View P. book/call records]

Set whether to allow software to browse the Phonebook, redial, and

call history when the software is started.

[Change ring tone/image]

Set whether to allow software to automatically change an image or

melody set for a ring tone or the Stand-by display when the software

is started.

[Program guide key setting]

Set whether to set as i-αppli Program guide that activates from

1Seg.

• Only 1 i-αppli can be set.

Note

• Depending on the settings, the software may not connect

to the network, or Icon info (unread mail or battery level, etc.)

becomes unavailable.

• When set to "No", the software may not start, or real-time

information may not be provided.

• When set to "Yes", the software automatically connects to

the network. While connected, packet communication charges

apply.

• When set to "Yes", information about the status of the

terminal as indicated by the presence of icons for unread mail,

messages, battery level, Manner mode, within the service area,

and out of service area may be sent to IP (Information provider)

via the Internet in the same manner as the "Phone/Terminal and

UIM ID" is sent. The icon information could be intercepted by a

third party. Software that needs icon data may not function if

set to "No".

Pre-installed i-αppli

To use the deleted pre-installed i-αppli, visit site, "WOW LG"

in iMenu for download.→P133

• i-αppli does not support touch operation.

Mingle Mangle

This is a game you set out 3 mingles (characters) of the

same type in crosswise or lengthwise direction swapping

adjacent mingles.



Software list screen (P275) ▶ "Mingle Mangle"



Press any key (Dial keys,

, or

)

▶ Perform the following

operations

[オリジナル (Original)]

Play game by selecting a square of "7×7" or "8×8".

[探検 (Exploration)]

Save out mingles by clearing instructions set to each exploration

course. If you clear, the information is automatically saved.

[ランキング (Ranking)]

Display the ranking.

[セットアップ (Setup)]

Set sound on/oﬀ or vibrator on/oﬀ.

[ヘルプ (Help)]

Display the description of the game and how to play.

[終了 (Exit)]

Terminate the i-αppli.

279

i-αppli

Continue on the next page

Sudoku Cafe

Enter a number from 1 to 9 in an empty cell. However, the

same number cannot be entered more than once for each

vertical or horizontal row, or for a block of 3×3 cells framed

with a thick line.



Software list screen (P275) ▶ "Sudoku Cafe"

The title screen of the game appears.



Press any key (Dial keys,

)

The menu screen appears.



Perform the following operations

[チュートリアル (Tutorial)]

Learn how to play the game through practice.

[レコードモード (Record mode)]

Compete how fast you can solve a puzzle.

[カスタムモード (Custom mode)]

Create a new puzzle and play it.

[環境設定 (Environment settings)]

Choose which function to use, スキャン機能 (Scanning function) or ラ

イン機能 (Line function), サウンド (Sound) オン (ON)/ オフ (OFF), 振動

(Vibration) オン (ON)/ オフ (OFF), or set 背景設定 (Background).

[ランキング確認 (Ranking)]

Display the ranking.

[ヘルプ (Help)]

Display the description of the game and how to play.

[ゲーム終了 (Exit)]

Terminate the i-αppli.

マクドナルドトクするアプリ (McDonald's TOKUSURU

KEITAI Application)

* Screenshot is an example and may diﬀer from

actual screen.

You can download the discount coupon "かざすクーポン" to be

used at McDonald's.

To use "かざすクーポン", subscribe to "トクするケータイサイ

ト", then select and set a coupon of your choice from the

application and hold the terminal up to a scanning device

placed at McDonald's.

•

For information about "McDonald's TOKUSURU KEITAI application",

visit the McDonald's oﬃcial site, "マクドナルドトクするケータイサイト".

i-mode site: "iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト" ▶ "グルメ/レシピ" ▶ "マクドナ

ルドトクする"

• "かざすクーポン" may not be used at some McDonald's restaurants.

Use "見せるクーポン" in an area where " かざすクーポン" cannot be

used.

• Functions or service contents for "McDonald's TOKUSURU KEITAI

application" may be changed.

• Packet communication charges apply.

Continued on next page

280

i-αppli

To use "かざすクーポン"

Activate this application

▼

Select a coupon and number to use

▼

Press "決定" to complete setting for the coupon information

▼

Order by holding the terminal on a scanning

function in a restaurants.

楽オク出品アプリ2 (Rakuoku Exhibition Application 2)

* Screenshot is an example and may diﬀer from

actual screen.

"楽オク出品アプリ2 (Rakuoku Exhibition Application 2)" is a

convenient application to enable you to easily exhibit your

goods on Rakuoku at anytime and from anywhere.

With the instruction guide, even a ﬁrst-time exhibitor can

use it easily. Using convenient functions such as capturing/

editing pictures, saving records, you can exhibit your goods

in shorter time than you do on a site.

• When using for the ﬁrst time, you need to agree to "利用規約 (terms

of service)".

• Packet communication charges apply to use this service.

• For details about Rakuoku, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]

FOMA version".

• To exhibit your goods on Rakuoku, you need to subscribe to

Rakuten membership and exhibitor membership.

• For information about Rakuoku, visit the i-mode site.

i-mode site: "iMenu" ▶ "オークション"

QR code to access the site

ｉアプリバンキング (i-αppli Banking)

* Screenshot is an example and may diﬀer from

actual screen.

ｉアプリバンキング (i-αppli banking) is an i-αppli for

conveniently using mobile banking (check the balance or

activity statement of your account, deposit or transfer

money, etc.) on the FOMA terminal. By entering password

you set when activating the i-αppli, mobile banking of up to

2 ﬁnancial institutions can be used. Making a payment for

invoice or payment notice by the Pay-easy service is also

possible.

• To use mobile banking by i-αppli banking, you need to have an

account of the ﬁnancial institution and subscribe to the Internet

banking service of the ﬁnancial institution.

• Packet communication charges apply to use this service.

• For details about i-αppli banking, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version".

• For information about i-αppli banking, visit the i-mode site.

i-mode site: "iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト" ▶ "モバイルバンキング" ▶

"ｉアプリバンキング"

281

i-αppli

Continue on the next page

QR code to access the site

モバイルSuica登録用ｉアプリ (Mobile Suica Setup i-αppli)

* Screenshot is an example and may diﬀer from

actual screen.

"モバイルSuica登録用ｉアプリ (Mobile Suica Setup i-αppli)"

is an i-αppli provided by NTT DOCOMO. This application

enables you to make necessary initial settings before using

Osaifu-Keitai compatible service "Mobile Suica" provided by

East Japan Railway Company. After making initial settings

by this application, follow on-screen instructions to download

the Mobile Suica application from the East Japan Railway

Company site and sign up as a member.

• When using for the ﬁrst time, you need to agree to "ご注意事項(必読)".

• Packet communication charges apply to use this service.

• This application can be deleted after initial settings are complete,

but the set area in the IC card remains occupied. Reset all data in

the IC card (hereafter referred to as the full format) to use the area.

• To perform the full format, visit the docomo Shop.

• If the full format is performed, all data in the IC card are deleted.

• To use the Mobile Suica service after performing the full format,

make initial settings again by this application.

• For information about Mobile Suica, visit the i-mode site.

i-mode site: "iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト" ▶ "おサイフケータイ" ▶ "モバイ

ルSuica"

• "Mobile Suica" is a registered trademark of East Japan Railway

Company.

モバイルGoogleマップ (Mobile Google Map)

Display a map and easily search area information, shop

information, or user-created contents. In addition, switch

to the aerial photo mode or see Street View images. Also,

search transportations to the destination by searching the

route and navigate to the destination.

Map screen

Key operations on the Map screen

Operation Description

Display the menu

Search (shop or service information in the area,

search location and display on the map)

Continued on next page

282

i-αppli

Operation Description

Move a cursor

Context menu (address of the present location,

route to/from the location, Street View, save to

favorites, search surrounding area)

Zoom out

Switch to map/aerial photo mode

Zoom in

Display the present location

Save to favorites/display favorites

• When using for the ﬁrst time, agree to the terms of service.

• Packet communication charges apply to use this service.

Subscription to Pake-hodai/Pake-hodai full/Pake-hodai double is

recommended.

• For details, refer to "ヘルプ (Help)" of the menu.

DCMXクレジットアプリ (DCMX Credit Appli)

* Screenshot is an example and may diﬀer from

actual screen.

"DCMX" is a credit service supporting "iD", provided by NTT

DOCOMO. DCMX includes DCMX mini that provides up to

10,000 yen/month credit and DCMX/DCMX GOLD services

that provide more credit and DOCOMO points than DCMX

mini.

You can use mobile phone credit of DCMX mini right now by

simply sign-up from this application.

Application functions

Membership registration/Screening*1

▼

Card information settings

▼

Use

No need to charge.

Enjoy shopping

without signature*2

only by holding the

terminal with card

information settings

on the scanning

device at stores with

the following iD mark.

Check

Check DCMX service

contents, available

balance*3, and usage

from application.

Change

Make the model

change setting or

update the valid period

from application.

*1 The online screening is conducted at the time of subscription

for DCMX mini. For subscriptions other than DCMX mini, the

terminal is connected to the i-mode subscription page.

*2 Under certain conditions, a security code may be required.

*3 Available only for DCMX mini.

• For details on service contents or subscription procedures, visit the

i-mode site for DCMX.

i-mode site: "iMenu" ▶ "DCMX iD"

QR code to access the site

283

i-αppli

Continue on the next page

Note

• When activating this application for the ﬁrst time, agree to "ご利

用上の注意 (precautions for use)" before use.

• Packet communication charges apply for settings/operations.

iD 設定アプリ (iD Appli)

iD appli

* Screenshot is an example and may diﬀer from

actual screen.

"iD" is convenient electronic money using credit settlement

system. Simply by holding Osaifu-Keitai with the credit card

information set or iD compatible card on the scanning device

at stores, you can easily and conveniently do shopping.

You can register up to 2 types of credit card information on

Osaifu-Keitai, so use them according to privileges or stores.

Depending on the card issuer, cashing is also supported.

• To use iD on Osaifu-Keitai, besides subscribing to the iD compatible

card issuer, it is necessary to make the settings on iD appli or Card

application provided by a card issuer. Depending on the card, it

is necessary to ﬁnish the settings on iD appli and then make the

settings on Card application.

• The cost for iD service (annual fee, etc.) varies depending on the

card issuer.

• For information about iD, visit the i-mode site for iD.

i-mode site: "iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト" ▶ "iD"

QR code to access the site

Cautions on Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli

DOCOMO assumes no responsibility for information set on

the IC card.

Gガイド番組表リモコン (G-GUIDE Program List Remote

Controller)

* Screenshot is an example and may diﬀer from

actual screen. An applicable channel to your

location appears.

This is a convenient application which combines a TV program

list and a Audio/Video remote controller, and is free of

monthly usage charges.

You can easily obtain the program information on the digital or

analogue terrestrial broadcasting, or BS digital broadcasting

whenever, anywhere you want. You can check the titles,

contents, as well as start/end time of the desired program.

You can activate 1Seg from the program list, and vice versa.

Programming your DVD hard disc recorder to record your

favorite program via the Internet is available. (The recorder

must support remote programming. And the initial setting has

to be made to enable this application function.)

You can search your desired programs by keyword such

as genre or your favorite actor/actress names or pick-up-

keyword on top of the main screen.

Continued on next page

284

i-αppli

You can use this application as remote controllers for

televisions, video players, or DVD players. (Not all devices

are supported.)

• For the ﬁrst time use, you need to conﬁgure the settings and agree

to the license agreement.

• Packet communication charges apply.

• For overseas use, set "Set Date&Time" of the FOMA terminal to

Japan time.

•

For details about G-GUIDE Program List Remote Controller, see

"Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

Setting a timer for watching 1Seg program

You can select a program to watch from the program list of

this application and set a timer for watching the program.

Setting a timer for watching a program:

Activate this application, select a program to set a timer for,

and select "予約実行 (Set)" from "視聴予約 (Set timer)" of the

menu. After the timer setting screen appears, follow on-screen

instructions to set a timer.

Setting recording schedule function remotely

If your DVD recorder supports remote programming, you can

use this application via the Internet to set the recorder timer

remotely to record a TV program from the TV program time

table of this application.

The initial setting is required to enable the remote

programming function.

Making the initial setting:

Setup your DVD recorder for the Internet connection (Refer to the

instruction manual of your DVD recorder for the setting procedure).

Activate this application, select "リモート録画予約 (Remote record

schedule)" from the menu. Follow the displayed guidance to

complete the initial setting.

Setting TV program recording schedule:

Select a program to be recorded from the TV program

schedule, and select "リモート録画予約 (Remote record

schedule)" from the menu. Your DVD recorder designated

by the initial setting can be programmed via the Internet to

schedule recording the selected program.

• Packet communication charges apply.

Starting i-αppli Automatically

• Date and Time have to be set in advance to start an i-αppli

automatically.→P53

Auto start set

Setting Software Auto-start

You can set whether to start a software automatically.

M

▶ "i-αppli" ▶ "i-αppli settings" ▶

"Auto start set" ▶ "ON"/"OFF"

Auto start time

Setting Start Date/Time

Set the date and time when the software starts

automatically. This option can be set for up to 3 software.



Software list screen (P275) ▶ Move the cursor

to a software ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Auto start time"

▶ Perform the following operations

[Time interval set]

Start a software automatically with set intervals.

[Start time set]

Mark this if you set the time when an i-αppli automatically start.

[Time]*

Set the time and date for auto start.

285

i-αppli

Continue on the next page

[Repeat]*

Select a repeating pattern for auto start.

1 Time : The software starts automatically only once at the set

date and time.

Daily : The software starts automatically at the set time every

day.

Weekly : The software starts automatically at the set time on the

speciﬁed days of the week every week.

▶ Mark days to start automatically every week ▶

[Done]

* Available when "Start time set" is marked.

I

[Done]

Note

• The software will not automatically start in the following:

- The FOMA terminal power is oﬀ

- A call or communication is in progress

- Other functions are running

- Lock all (even while Terminal security code entry screen

is displayed) is set

- Omakase Lock is set

- "i-αppli" in "Data access lock" is "ON" (even while

Terminal security code entry screen is displayed)

- The Auto start time is the same as the scheduled time

for software update, an alarm, Schedule event, or To do alarm

- The i-αppli was downloaded using another UIM

- The i-αppli has "Network set" to "Conﬁrm every session"

- The same i-αppli has a set time interval to start within

10 minutes

• Software will not start at the set time if other software is

running at that time. Also, the software may not start while

other functions are running.

• If auto start fails, appears on the Stand-by display. Selecting

the icon displays the Auto start info (P286). disappears

after the Auto start info is viewed.

Set i-αppli To

Starting i-αppli from a Site or Mail

Set whether to start a software from a site, mail, infrared

communication, bar code reader, or 1Seg data broadcasting

sites. Also, you can make settings for when holding the

FOMA terminal on the scanning device supporting the IC card

functions.



Software list screen (P275) ▶ Move the cursor

to a software ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Set i-αppli To"

▶ Mark items to allow to start a software ▶

[Done]

i-αppli Stand-by display

Setting i-αppli Stand-by Display

Set a software of the selected i-αppli as the Stand-by

display.



Software list screen (P275) ▶ Move the cursor

to a software ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Software set" ▶

"Stand-by display" ▶ "ON"

Continued on next page

286

i-αppli

Note

• Only 1 i-αppli can be set as Stand-by display.

• Some i-αppli cannot be set as Stand-by display.

• While on i-αppli Stand-by display, / appears on top of the

display

• Turning the FOMA terminal's power on while i-αppli Stand-by

display is set, a conﬁrmation whether to start the i-αppli Stand-

by display appears. Selecting "No" releases the i-αppli Stand-by

display.

• If an i-αppli that performs communication is set as Stand-by

display, the i-αppli may not work correctly due to weak signal

reception.

• While Lock all is activated or i-αppli is restricted its use in Data

access lock, i-αppli Stand-by display is not displayed.

• When Stand-by i-αppli is set, the Receive results screen for

SMS does not appear, and the ring tone and vibrator for SMS

do not work.

Operating i-αppli Set as Stand-by Display

as a Regular i-αppli

Q

on i-αppli Stand-by display

i-αppli starts and becomes available to perform.

i-αppli Stand-by display release

Releasing i-αppli Stand-by Display



i-αppli running ▶

▶ "Cancel" ▶ "Yes"

Selecting "End" returns to the i-αppli Stand-by display.

Note

• You can also release the i-αppli Stand-by display by following:

Press

in Stand-by ▶ "i-αppli" ▶ "i-αppli settings" ▶ "End

stand-by display" ▶ "Cancel" ▶ "Yes"

i-αppli info

Viewing Various Information

M

▶ "i-αppli" ▶ "i-αppli info" ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Security error history]

Display the error history of the software that were terminated due to

security errors.

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected error history entry.

[Auto start info]

Check if software succeeded in auto start. You can view the

information and the latest date and time when the software started

for up to 3 software set for auto start.

Start ○ : The software automatically started successfully

Start × : The software failed to start automatically

Start ─ : The software has not started because the set time has

not come

[Trace info]

Display trace information on a software.

•

[Delete]: Delete trace information on a software.

[Standby error info]

Display error information of an i-αppli Stand-by display that did not

terminate properly.

•

[Delete]: Delete error information.

Note

• Untraced history or information will not be displayed.

287

i-αppli

Continue on the next page

Deleting i-αppli



Software list screen (P275) ▶ Move the cursor

to a software ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Delete]

This item : Delete the selected software.

Selected items : Select and delete software.

▶ Mark software to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

All items : Delete all software.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

Note

• When the i-αppli to delete is set for auto start or Stand-by

display, a conﬁrmation whether to delete the software appears.

Select "Yes" to delete.

• Some Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli delete data on the IC

card or require to delete data on IC card starting i-αppli before

the deletion, etc.

• Some Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli cannot be deleted.

Using Various i-αppli Functions

You can connect to a site or use the FOMA terminal functions

while an i-αppli is running.

• You need to download the supported i-αppli in advance.

• Some i-αppli may operate the functions diﬀerently, or may be

unavailable to use some functions.

Using Camera

• When the camera is activated by i-αppli, captured images will not

be saved in "My picture" of "Data Box", however, they are saved and

used as a component of the i-αppli.



Use i-αppli to capture an image with the

camera

Using Bar Code Reader

• The camera can be used via an i-αppli to read a QR code and Japan

Article Number code.

• The read result can be used and saved by the software.



Use i-αppli to read a code

Using Infrared Communication



Use i-αppli to

perform infrared communication

Note

• You may not be able to exchange data with some devices even

if they have the infrared communication capability.

• You can also start an i-αppli by receiving i-αppli activation data

via infrared communication.

• When performing infrared communication, any connection with

sites or mail transfer will be canceled.

289

Osaifu-Keitai

Osaifu-Keitai ････････････････････････････････････････ 290

Starting Osaifu-Keitai Compatible i-αppli ･･･････････ 291

Locking IC Card Function ･･････････････ IC card lock 292

290

Osaifu-Keitai

Osaifu-Keitai is equipped with the IC card and enables you to

pay by holding the FOMA terminal on the scanning device at

shops, etc.

In addition, with this function, you can deposit electronic

money and check your balance or view usage history using

transmission. In order to use safely, security*1 is fully secure.

For details about Osaifu-Keitai, see "Mobile Phone User's

Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

• To use Osaifu-Keitai compatible services, you need to download

Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli from Osaifu-Keitai compatible

sites*2 and make the setting.

*1 Omakase Lock (P122) and the IC card lock (P292) can be

used.

*2 "iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト (Menu List)" ▶ "おサイフケータイ

(Osaifu-Keitai)"

• Data (including electronic money, points, etc.) saved in the IC card

may be lost or altered due to the FOMA terminal malfunction (Note

that you will be asked to delete data if you leave the FOMA terminal

for repairs, etc.). For the service such as reissue, restoration,

temporary storage, or transfer of data except for the transfer by iC

transfer service, contact the provider of Osaifu-Keitai compatible

service. Make sure to use a service that provides a backup service

for important data.

• DOCOMO shall not be liable for any loss or alteration of data saved

in the IC card, or damage related to Osaifu-Keitai service caused by

any reason such as malfunction or model change.

• If the FOMA terminal is stolen or lost, immediately contact your

provider of Osaifu-Keitai compatible service about handling the

trouble.

iC Transfer Service

iC transfer service*1 enables you to transfer*2 data on the IC

card of Osaifu-Keitai to new Osaifu-Keitai collectively*3 when

replacing Osaifu-Keitai such as model change or repairing.

After transferring data on the IC card, you can easily use

Osaifu-Keitai compatible services again just by downloading*4

Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli. Use the iC transfer service

at your nearby docomo Shop, etc.

For details about the iC transfer service, see "Mobile Phone

User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

*1 Both the transfer source and destination mobile phone must be

the iC transfer service compatible FOMA terminals. Go to your

nearby docomo Shop, etc. for using this service.

*2 This service does not "copy" but "transfer" data. Therefore, data

on the IC card does not remain in the FOMA terminal of the

replacing source. In some cases, the iC transfer service cannot

be used. Use the backup service for Osaifu-Keitai compatible

service.

*3 Some Osaifu-Keitai compatible services are not supported by the

iC transfer service. Only the data on the IC card of the Osaifu-

Keitai compatible service that is supported by the iC transfer

service can be transferred.

*4 Packet communication charges apply for downloading i-αppli or

various settings.

291

Osaifu-Keitai

Continue on the next page

Starting Osaifu-Keitai

Compatible i-αppli

• When starting or downloading Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli for

the ﬁrst time, the UIM in use is registered as a owner of the IC card.

After the second time, the IC card function cannot be used without

inserting the UIM registered as the IC owner.

If you use the IC card function with another UIM, insert the UIM

that is compatible with the IC card and delete all Osaifu-Keitai

compatible i-αppli to use the IC card function.

M

▶ "Osaifu-Keitai" ▶ "IC card content"

List of Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli appears. Select i-αppli

to start.

• Software list screen→P273

Note

• You can connect to i-mode and search for Osaifu-Keitai

compatible i-αppli by performing

▶ "Osaifu-Keitai" ▶

"Search by i-mode" ▶ "Yes".

• You can activate the DCMX credit appli by performing

▶

"Osaifu-Keitai" ▶ "DCMX".

Using Osaifu-Keitai

Hold the mark of the FOMA terminal on the scanning

device to use as electronic money for payment or traﬃc

ticket. This function can be used without starting the

software.

• The sticker is attached at the back side of the Back cover to keep

the performance of FeliCa function. Do not remove the sticker.

• Hold the mark on the center of the scanning part.

mark

Scanning part of

the scanning device

Continued on next page

292

Osaifu-Keitai

Note

• Do not subject the FOMA terminal to severe shocks when

holding the mark on the scanning device.

• If the mark held on the scanning device is not recognized, try

moving the FOMA terminal around.

• You can use Osaifu-Keitai functions by holding the mark on

the scanning device even during a call or i-mode connection, or

when the FOMA terminal is turned oﬀ (Osaifu-Keitai compatible

i-αppli cannot be activated). However, when the battery pack is

not inserted or the battery pack is not used for a long time even

if it is inserted, or the FOMA terminal is left without charging

after sounding the battery alarm, this function may be disabled.

Charge the battery pack.

• When the mark is held on the scanning device, Osaifu-Keitai

compatible i-αppli may be activated.

• You can set the FOMA terminal to light or blink the illumination

when the scanning device recognizes the FOMA terminal.

→P110

IC card lock

Locking IC Card Function

This function allows you to prevent the IC card functions

from being used by others.



Stand-by display ▶

(for 1+ seconds)

When the IC card lock is set, appears on the Stand-by display.

Canceling the lock

Stand-by display ▶

(for 1+ seconds) ▶ enter the Terminal

security code.

IC card lock set

Locking IC Card Functions when Turning

Power On/Oﬀ

M

▶ "Osaifu-Keitai" ▶ "IC card lock set" ▶

Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Perform the

following operations

[IC card lock(Power ON)]

Set whether to lock the IC card functions when the FOMA terminal is

turned on.

[IC card lock(Power OFF)]

Set whether to lock the IC card functions when the FOMA terminal is

turned oﬀ.

Note

• When removing the battery pack, the IC card function is

disabled regardless of the IC card lock setting.

• While the IC card lock is activated, downloading, upgrading, or

deleting operation may be unavailable depending on Osaifu-

Keitai compatible i-αppli.

293

Data Management

Data Box ････････････････････････････････････････････ 294

Making Full Use of Images

Displaying Images ･･･････････････････Picture viewer 296

Editing Still Images ･･････････････････････Edit image 302

Creating Slideshows ････････････････････ Slide show 305

Making Full Use of Moving Pictures

Playing Moving Pictures/i-motion

･･････････････････････Moving picture/i-motion player 307

Editing Moving Pictures/i-motion

･･･････････････････････ Edit moving pictures/i-motion 312

Using a Playlist ･････････････････････････････････････ 313

Making Full Use of Melody

Playing a Melody ･････････････････････ Melody player 314

Making Full Use of Memory Card

microSD Cards ･･････････････････････････････････････ 317

Using a microSD Card ･･････････････････････････････ 321

Exchanging Personal Information between the

FOMA Terminal and a microSD Card ････････････････ 322

Managing a microSD Card ･･････････････････････････ 325

Using the FOMA Terminal as a microSD Card

Reader/Writer ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 326

Exchanging Data via Infrared

Communication

Using Infrared Communication

･････････････････････････････ Infrared communication 327

Sending and Receiving Data One by One

･･････････ Send/Receive via infrared communication 328

Sending and Receiving All Data

･･･････ Send/Receive all via infrared communication 329

Using Infrared Remote Control Function ････････････ 330

Making Full Use of Document Viewer

Viewing a Document ････････････････････････････････ 330

294

Data Management

Data Box

Data Box contains the items and folders shown in the

following tables. Data obtained from sites or i-mode mail are

saved to folders by category.

• Up to 18 folders each can be added to My picture, Music, i-motion,

Melody, and Kisekae Tool. Up to 10 folders can be added to

Music&Video Channel.

• Data saved in My picture, Music, i-motion, and Melody (except for

data in the "Decomail picto" folder) can be moved to other folders

within the category. Data saved in the Music&Video Channel can

be moved from the "Distributed program" folder to another folder

within the category, or can be moved among the folders other than

"Distributed program".

• Deco-mail pictograms obtained from sites or mail are directly saved

to the "Decomail picto" folder.

• Only Deco-mail pictograms can be saved in the "Deco-mail picto"

folder.

My picture

i-mode Still images, etc. obtained from sites or mails

Camera Still images captured by the Camera

Decomail picture Pre-installed pictures for Deco-mail, etc

Decomail picto Deco-mail pictograms pre-installed or

downloaded from sites or mail

Preinstalled Pre-installed still images

Item Still images that can be used for frames or

stamps

Data transfer Still images, etc. obtained via infrared

communication

Slide show User-deﬁned slideshows, etc.

My picture

microSD Still images saved on the microSD card

Camera images Still images captured

by the Camera

Other images Still images, etc.

Decomail picto Deco-mail pictograms

that are copied from

the FOMA terminal

Search by i-mode Connect to i-mode

Music

i-mode Chaku-Uta Full

songs downloaded from sites

Playlists Playlists created with the FOMA terminal

or created with Windows Media Player and

forwarded from a PC

Movablecontents Chaku-Uta Full

saved on the microSD card

Resume play Playback of the last played music/playlist

WMA WMA ﬁles saved on the microSD card

SD-Audio SD-Audio data saved on the microSD card

Searcy by i-mode Connect to i-mode

Music&Video Ch

Distributed

program Music programs distributed from Music&Video

Channel

i-motion

i-mode Moving pictures/i-motion downloaded from

sites or mails

Camera Moving pictures captured by the Video Camera

Preinstalled Pre-installed moving pictures

Playlists Playlists created with the FOMA terminal

295

Data Management

Continue on the next page

i-motion

Data transfer Moving pictures, etc. obtained via infrared

communication

microSD Moving pictures or i-motion saved on the

microSD card

Movablecontents Copyright protected

moving pictures or

i-motion moved from

the FOMA terminal

Audio Sound-only i-motion

Video Moving pictures

captured by the Video

Camera

Searcy by i-mode Connect to i-mode

Melody

i-mode Melodies, etc. downloaded from sites or mails

Preinstalled Pre-installed melodies

Data transfer Melodies, etc. obtained via infrared

communication

microSD Melody Melodies saved on the

microSD card

Searcy by i-mode Connect to i-mode

Kisekae Tool

i-mode Kisekae Tool acquired from sites

Preinstalled Pre-installed Kisekae Tool

Searcy by i-mode Connect to i-mode

Motion Oekaki

Diﬀerences on display name, ﬁle name, and title

Still images, Flash movies, moving pictures/i-motion, and

melodies saved in the FOMA terminal have multiple names.

Display name Names that appear on list screens in Data Box

or on the Display/playback screens

File name Names that appear on a PC or other mobile

phones

Title*Names for management of L-03B (cannot be

edited)

* Still images and Flash movies do not have titles.

Icons displayed on the ﬁle list screen

Icon Description

/ Files that can be sent, or moved/cannot be

moved to a microSD card

File restricted

Files with the UIM security function activated

Files on the microSD card

Files banned from being redistributed

/ / /

// / / File types (JPEG/GIF/Flash/MP4 (extension:

mp4)/MP4 (extension: 3gp)/SMF/MFi/Others

(unsupported ﬁles))

* Icons that appear on the screen vary depending on the list

screen type.

296

Data Management

Picture viewer

Displaying Images

You can display still images you captured, or obtained from

sites or i-mode mails.

Available ﬁle formats

File format*JPEG, GIF

Pixels JPEG, Progressive JPEG: Up to 2592×1944

dots

GIF: Up to 800×600 dots

File size Up to 5MB

File extension jpg, gif

* Some ﬁles in a compatible format may not be displayed.

M

▶ "Data Box" ▶ "My picture"

•

[New]: Create a folder.

My picture

screen



Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open]

•

[Mail]: Display the Compose

message screen with the selected ﬁle

attached.

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected ﬁle.

•

[Switch]: Switch between List view

and Grid view.

• Icons displayed on the list screen

→P295

Still image ﬁle list

screen

Display name of the selected ﬁle

Type of the selected ﬁle



Move the cursor to a ﬁle ▶

[View]

Still image

display screen

Sequential number/number of saved ﬁles

Display the sequential number of the current ﬁle and the total

number of saved ﬁles in the folder.

Display name of the ﬁle

297

Data Management

Continue on the next page

Key operations on the Still image display screen

Operation Description

Display the previous/next ﬁle

[Full] Hide the soft keys and display a full image/

restore to the original display size

[Mail] Send the displayed image via mail→P138

Enlarge the image/restore to the previous ratio

[Zoom] Use

[＋] to enlarge the image and

[−] to

restore to the previous ratio

Move the display position when the image is

enlarged

• The entire image and the displayed area appear

at the edge of the screen.

[Delete] Delete the selected ﬁle

Note

• Some images that are not captured with L-03B may not be

displayed on the Still image ﬁle list screen.

My Picture Screen Sub Menu



My picture screen (P296) ▶ Move the cursor

to a folder ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Rename]

Change the name of the selected folder. Up to 30 full-pitch or half-

pitch characters can be entered.

[New folder]

Create a new folder.

• You cannot create a sub folder in the created folder.

[Delete]

One : Delete the selected folder.

▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

Selected : Select and delete folders.

▶ Mark folders to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter

the Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Delete all user-deﬁned folders

▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Grid view]

This option is not available.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort ﬁles in a folder.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in

"Data Box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the

microSD card.

[Folder property]

Display the size of the selected folder and the number of ﬁles in the

folder.

298

Data Management

Still Image File List Screen Sub Menu



Still image ﬁle list screen (P296) ▶ Move the

cursor to a ﬁle ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Files]

View : Display the selected ﬁle.

Edit : Edit the selected ﬁle.→P302

Rename : Change the display name of the selected ﬁle.

File property : Display the ﬁle name, size, and type, etc. of the

selected ﬁle.→P301

[Delete]

One : Delete the selected ﬁle.

Selected : Select and delete ﬁles.

▶ Mark ﬁles to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Delete all ﬁles in the folder.

▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Move]

One : Move the selected ﬁle.

▶ Select a destination folder

Selected : Select and move ﬁles.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶ Mark ﬁles to move ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Move all ﬁles in the folder.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the

Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Copy]

One : Copy the selected ﬁle.

▶ Select a destination folder

Selected : Select and copy ﬁles.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶ Mark ﬁles to copy ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Copy all ﬁles in the folder

▶ Select a destination folder ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the

Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Send via]*

Mail : Create i-mode mail with the selected ﬁle attached. Go to

Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

IrDA : Send a ﬁle via infrared communication.

Picasa : Upload the selected ﬁle to Picasa.

[Set as]

Set the selected ﬁle as the Stand-by display or incoming call screen.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort ﬁles.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in

"Data Box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the

microSD card.

[New folder]

This option is not available.

[List view/Grid view]

Switch the ﬁle display format.

299

Data Management

Continue on the next page

[Store in center]

Save ﬁles at the Data Center.→P132

* Not available for Flash movies.

Still Image Display Screen Sub Menu



Still image display screen (P296) ▶

[Menu]

▶ Perform the following operations

[Edit image]*

Edit the displayed ﬁle.→P302

[Delete]

Delete the displayed ﬁle.

[Edit title]

Edit the display name of the displayed ﬁle.

[File property]

Display the ﬁle name, size, and type, etc. of the selected ﬁle.→P301

[Send via]*

Mail : Create i-mode mail with the selected ﬁle attached. Go to

Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

IrDA : Send a ﬁle via infrared communication.

Picasa : Upload the selected ﬁle to Picasa.

[Full screen]

View the image in Full screen. In Full screen view, the following

operations are available.

•

: Return the full screen view to the original view.

•

: Display the previous/next image.

[Zoom]*

Display an enlarged image. While zooming in, the following operations

are available.

•

[＋]: Enlarge the image

•

[−]: Return to the previous zoom ratio

•

: Move the display position

•

: Return the enlarged display to the original display

• The entire image and the displayed area appear at the edge of the

screen.

[Set as]

Set the displayed ﬁle as the Stand-by display or incoming call screen.

[Store in center]

Save the displayed ﬁle at the Data Center.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

[Motion Oekaki]

Edit the displayed ﬁle with Motion Oekaki

.→P341

[View settings]

Set the image display format, zoom ratio, or interval between

slideshow frames.→P301

* Not available for Flash movies.

Note

• The FOMA terminal connects to the Picasa site. Log in the site

and upload ﬁles by mail attachment. The captured image is

retained up to the compose message screen for uploading so

make sure the receiver's address.

• A ﬁle of more than 2MB cannot be uploaded.

• For details, visit Picasa site (http://picasa.google.co.jp/) via

PC, etc.

300

Data Management

Viewing Flash Movies

You can view Flash movies downloaded from sites, etc.

Available ﬁle formats

File format*Flash

File size Up to 100KB

File extension swf

* Some ﬁles in a compatible ﬁle format may not be played.

M

▶ "Data Box" ▶ "My picture"



Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open]



Move the cursor to a ﬁle ▶

[View]

Flash movie

playback screen

Sequential number/number of saved ﬁles

Display the sequential number of the current ﬁle and the total

number of saved ﬁles in the folder.

Display name of the ﬁle

Key operations on the Flash movie playback screen

Operation Description

Display the previous/next ﬁle

[Full] Hide the soft keys and display a full image/

restore to the original display size

[Mail] Send the displayed image by mail→P138

[Retry] Play the Flash movie from the beginning

Enlarge the image/restore to the previous ratio

Move the display position when the image is

enlarged

• The entire image and the displayed area appear

at the edge of the screen.

[Delete] Delete the selected ﬁle

Flash Movie Playback Screen Sub Menu



Flash movie playback screen (P300) ▶

[Menu]

• The Flash movie playback screen sub menu is the same as

"Still Image Display Screen Sub Menu" (P299). However, "Edit

image", "Send via", and "Zoom" are not available.

301

Data Management

Continue on the next page

Viewing Image Properties



Still image display screen (P296)/Flash movie

playback screen (P300) ▶

[Menu] ▶ "File

property"

•

[Edit]: Edit properties.

Properties displayed on the File property screen

Item Description

File name Display the ﬁle name

File size Display the ﬁle size

File type

Display the ﬁle format

Date & Time (Saved) Display the saved date and time

Display size

Display the resolution

File restriction Display whether the ﬁle is restricted

Source Display the source

Move to the microSD

Display whether the ﬁle can be moved to a

microSD card

*1 Not displayed for Flash movies.

*2 Data in a microSD card will be moved to the phone; display

whether data can be moved to the phone.

Setting View of a Still Image

Set the image display format, zoom ratio, or interval between

slideshow frames.



Still image display screen (P296)/Flash movie

playback screen (P300)/Slideshow list screen

(P305) ▶

[Menu] ▶ "View settings" ▶

Perform the following operations

[View type]

Normal : Display the image in its original size.

Fit to screen : Display the image enlarged to ﬁt the screen.

[Zoom type]

Normal : Zoom in the image enlarged to ﬁt the screen.

Same magniﬁcation : Zoom in the image displayed in its original

size.

[SlideShow interval]

Set the interval between slideshow frames.

[Auto rotating]

Set whether to display the image in a direction when you captured it

with this FOMA terminal.

I

[Done]

302

Data Management

Setting File Restriction

You can set the ﬁle restriction. The restricted ﬁle attached to

mail cannot be sent or forwarded from the recipient's FOMA

terminal.



Display a ﬁle to restrict ▶

[Menu] ▶

"File property"

The File property screen appears.



Move the cursor to the "File restriction" ﬁeld ▶

[Edit] ▶ "File restricted"

Note

• This option cannot be changed for a ﬁle downloaded from a site.

Edit image

Editing Still Images

You can edit still images. The edited still image is saved to

the same folder as the source ﬁle.

• Only JPEG ﬁles can be edited. However, some ﬁles may not be

edited.

• Editing a still image repeatedly may reduce the image quality or

increase the ﬁle size.



Still image display screen (P294) ▶

[Menu]

▶ "Edit image"

Still image

edit screen

M

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Save]

Save the edited still image. Go to Step 5.

[Rotate]

Left : Rotate the image 90 degrees counterclockwise.

Right : Rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise.

180 : Rotate the image 180 degrees.

[Mirror]

Left/Right : Flip the image horizontally.

Up/Down : Flip the image vertically.

[Resize]

Change the image size.→P301

[Crop]

Cut out a part of the image.→P302

303

Data Management

Continue on the next page

[Sketch]

Draw lines or characters.

• Press M[Menu] to change "Pen/Eraser height" or "Pen color".

Select "Eraser height" from "Pen/Eraser height" to erase a drawing

where traced with a ﬁnger, etc.

[Insert]

Add a frame, stamp, or text.

Frame : Add a frame to an image.

▶ Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open] ▶ Select a

frame

• After selecting a frame, press

[Menu] to select

"Change frame" or "Rotate".

Stamp : Add a stamp to an image.→P304

Text : Add text to an image.→P305

[Retouch]

Change the brightness, contrast, or color tone of an image.

▶ Use

to switch to the item to retouch ▶

[Select]

• Adjust the item with

• If selecting "Auto level" or "Auto enhance", the image is adjusted

automatically.

• If selecting "Color adjust" or "Level adjust", adjust each color with

• Pressing

[List] also enables you to select the item to retouch.

[Eﬀect]

Set special eﬀects to an image.

▶ Use

to switch to the item to retouch ▶

[Select]

• Depending on items, adjust with

• If selecting "Rotation" or "Spotlight", adjust each item with

• Pressing

[List] also enables you to select the item to set.

[Send via mail]

Create i-mode mail with the edited image attached.

[Undo]

Cancel the performed edit operation and restore the previous state.

C

[OK]

• Press

[Cancel] to cancel editing.

C

[Save]

• Press

[Undo] to return to the state before editing.



"New ﬁle"/"Original ﬁle"

New ﬁle : Save the edited image as a new image.

Original ﬁle : Save the edited image over the source image.

Note

<Frame>

• Available frame size: CIF (352×288), Wallpaper (800×480),

Wallpaper (400×240), QVGA (320×240), QCIF (176×144),

and Sub-QCIF (128×96).

• Only the frame size that is same as the source image size can

be set.

Changing Image Size



Still image edit screen (P302) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Resize"



Select an image size

C

[OK]

Go to Step 4 in "Editing Still Images" (P303).

Continued on next page

304

Data Management

Note

• The size of a source image with vertical or horizontal side

smaller than 8 dots cannot be changed.

• If a size with diﬀerent proportions than the source is selected,

the original proportions will be retained for the resized image.

Cropping an Image



Still image edit screen (P302) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Crop"



Select a cropping size ▶ Use

to move the

frame to the area to be cropped ▶

[Select]

When "User deﬁne" is selected

Use

to move the cursor to start point ▶

[Select] ▶ use

to move the cursor to end

point ▶

[Select] to set the area to crop.

C

[OK]

Go to Step 4 in "Editing Still Images" (P303).

Note

• The size of a source image with vertical or horizontal side

smaller than 8 dots cannot be changed.

Adding a Stamp



Still image edit screen (P302) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Insert" ▶ "Stamp"



Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open] ▶

Select a stamp ▶ Use

to move the stamp

to the position ▶

[OK]

To add another stamp

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Change stamp" ▶ move the cursor

to a folder ▶

[Open] ▶ select a stamp ▶ use

move the stamp to the position ▶

[OK].

To rotate the stamp

Press

[Menu] ▶ "Rotate" ▶ select from "Left"/

"Right"/"180".

I

[Done]

Go to Step 4 in "Editing Still Images" (P303).

Note

• A stamp cannot be added to a source image with vertical or

horizontal side smaller than 24 dots or larger than 640×480

dots.

305

Data Management

Continue on the next page

Adding Text

Add text to an image. You can also change the font size or

color, rotate the text, or add speech bubbles.



Still image edit screen (P302) ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Insert" ▶ "Text"



Enter the text to add

M

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

[Edit text]

Edit the pasted text.

[Font size]

Set the font size.

[Font color]

Change the added text color.

[Rotate]

Rotate the added text.

[Comic]

Add a speech bubble.

• Some speech bubbles cannot be set depending on the image size.



Use

to move the cursor to the position ▶

[OK]

I

[Done]

Go to Step 4 in "Editing Still Images" (P303).

Note

• Text cannot be added to a source image with vertical or

horizontal side smaller than 24 dots or larger than 640×480

dots.

Slide show

Creating Slideshows

You can create slideshows with up to 20 frames using saved

still images.

• Up to 30 slideshows can be created.

• Up to 480×800 dots of still images can be used for creating the

slideshows.

M

▶ "Data Box" ▶ "My picture" ▶ Move the

cursor to "Slide show" ▶

[Open]

Slideshow list

screen

I

[New] ▶ Enter the display name of the ﬁle

Continued on next page

306

Data Management

C

[Add] ▶ Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open] ▶ Move the cursor to an image ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following operations

•

[View]: The selected image is displayed.

•

[Switch]: Switch between List view and Grid view.

[Select]

Add the selected ﬁle to the slideshow.

[View]

Display the selected ﬁle.

[File property]

Display the ﬁle name, size, and type, etc. of the selected ﬁle.

→P301

[List view/Grid view]

Switch the ﬁle display format.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort ﬁles.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in

"Data Box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of

the microSD card.

[New folder]

This option is not available.



Repeat Step 3 to save images ▶

[Done]

To delete the saved image

Move the cursor to an image to delete and press

[Delete] ▶ "Yes".

Displaying Slideshow



Slideshow list screen (P305) ▶ Move the

cursor to a slideshow ▶

[View]

Slideshow display

screen

Key operations while viewing a slideshow

Operation Description

Play the previous/next slideshow

[Full] Hide the soft keys and display a full slideshow/

restore to the original display size

307

Data Management

Continue on the next page

Slideshow List Screen Sub Menu



Slideshow list screen (P305) ▶ Move the

cursor to a slideshow ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform

the following operations

[Add images]

Add images to the selected slideshow.

[Delete]

Delete the selected slideshow.

[Edit title]

Change the display name of the selected slideshow. Up to 30 full-

pitch or half-pitch characters can be entered.

[Set as stand-by]

Set the selected slideshow as the Stand-by display.

[View settings]

Set the image display format, zoom ratio, or interval between

slideshow frames.→P299

Slideshow Display Screen Sub Menu



Slideshow display screen (P306) ▶

[Menu]

▶ Perform the following operations

[Delete]

Delete the displayed slideshow.

[Edit title]

Change the display name of the displayed slideshow. Up to 30 full-

pitch or half-pitch characters can be entered.

[Full screen]

View the slideshow in Full screen. (In Full screen view, the following

operations are available.)

•

: Return the full screen view to the original view.

•

: Display the previous/next slideshow.

[Set as stand-by]

Set the displayed slideshow as the Stand-by display.

[View settings]

Set the image display format, zoom ratio, or interval between

slideshow frames.→P299

Moving picture/i-motion player

Playing Moving Pictures/i-motion

You can play moving pictures you captured, or i-motion

obtained from sites or i-mode mails.

Available ﬁle formats

File format*MP4 (Mobile MP4)

Encoding method MP4 ﬁle

Video: MPEG-4, H.263, and H.264

Audio: AMR, AAC, HE-AAC, and Enhanced

aacPlus

File extension mp4, 3gp

* Some ﬁles in a compatible ﬁle format may not be played.

Continued on next page

308

Data Management

M

▶ "Data Box" ▶ "i-motion"

•

[New]: Create a folder.

i-motion screen



Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open]

•

[Mail]: Display the Compose message

screen with the selected ﬁle attached.

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected ﬁle.

•

[Switch]: Switch between List view and

Grid view.

• Icons displayed on the list screen.→P295

i-motion ﬁle list

screen



Move the cursor to a ﬁle ▶

[Play]

•

[Mail]: Display the Compose

message screen with the ﬁle in

playback attached.

i-motion playback

screen

Display name of the ﬁle

Volume

Playback progress bar

Display the playback elapsed time.

Elapsed time/total time

Control keys

Display available navigation keys.

Key operations on the i-motion playback screen

Operation Description

[Pause/Play] Pause/Play

[Stop] Stop

Play the previous/next ﬁle

(Hold down) While being pressed, rewind the video/sound

(Hold down) While being pressed, fast forward the video/

sound

Adjust the volume

309

Data Management

Continue on the next page

When Link is set in ticker

After i-motion playback ends, a conﬁrmation appears asking

whether to use Phone To/AV Phone To/Web To/Mail To. To use

the function, select an item and operate.

Note

• Some ﬁles may not be fast forwarded and rewound during

playback.

• When you fast forward or rewind i-motion during playback,

i-motion is paused.

i-motion Screen Sub Menu



i-motion screen (P308) ▶ Move the cursor to a

folder ▶

[Menu]

• The i-motion screen sub menu is the same as "My Picture

Screen Sub Menu" (P297).

i-motion File List Screen Sub Menu



i-motion ﬁle list screen (P308) ▶ Move the

cursor to a ﬁle ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Files]

Play : Play the selected ﬁle.

Rename : Change the display name of the selected ﬁle.

Reset name : Reset the display name of the selected ﬁle to its

default title. If no title is set, "No title" is displayed.

File property : Display the ﬁle name, size, and type, etc. of the

selected ﬁle.→P311

[Delete]

One : Delete the selected ﬁle.

Selected : Select and delete ﬁles.

▶ Mark ﬁles to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Delete all ﬁles in the folder.

▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Move]

One : Move the selected ﬁle.

▶ Select a destination folder

Selected : Select and move ﬁles.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶ Mark ﬁles to move ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Move all ﬁles in the folder.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the

Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Copy]

One : Copy the selected ﬁle.

▶ Select a destination folder

Selected : Select and copy ﬁles.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶ Mark ﬁles to copy ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Copy all ﬁles in the folder

▶ Select a destination folder ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the

Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

Continued on next page

310

Data Management

[Send via]

Mail : Create i-mode mail with the selected ﬁle attached. Go to

Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

IrDA : Send a ﬁle via infrared communication.

YouTube : Upload the selected ﬁle to YouTube

[Set as tone]

Set the selected ﬁle as a ring tone, etc.

[Set as display]

Set the selected ﬁle as the Stand-by display or incoming call screen.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort ﬁles.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in

"Data Box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the

microSD card.

[New folder]

This option is not available.

[List view/Grid view]

Switch the ﬁle display format.

Note

• The FOMA terminal connects to the YouTube site. Upload ﬁles

by mail attachment. The captured moving picture is retained up

to the compose message screen for uploading so make sure

the receiver's address.

• A ﬁle of more than 2MB cannot be uploaded.

• For details, visit YouTube site (http://www.youtube.com/) via

PC, etc.

i-motion Playback Screen Sub Menu



i-motion playback screen (P308) ▶

[Menu]

▶ Perform the following operations

[Send via mail]

Create i-mode mail with the selected ﬁle attached. Go to Step 2 in

"Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

[Set as tone]

Set the ﬁle in playback as a ring tone, etc.

[Set as display]

Set the selected ﬁle as the Stand-by display or incoming call screen.

[Expand]*

Enlarge moving pictures/i-motion in the horizontal view.

• Press

to restore to the original display size.

[Screen setting]*

Normal Play : Set to play a ﬁle in the vertical view.

Full screen play (hor.) : Set to enlarge and play a ﬁle in the

horizontal view.

[Chapter list]

Display the chapter list.

[Edit]

Edit the moving picture/i-motion in playback.→P312

[File property]

Display the ﬁle name, size, and type, etc. of the ﬁle in playback.

→P311

* Cannot select after playback ends.

311

Data Management

Continue on the next page

Note

• During the sub menu operation, the moving picture/i-motion is

paused.

• The following moving pictures/i-motion cannot be set as a

Chaku-motion or incoming call screen:

- Files that were transferred to a PC or another FOMA terminal

via infrared communication or DOCOMO keitai datalink and

transferred back to the FOMA terminal

- Files that were copied or moved from the microSD card to

the FOMA terminal, including those copied or moved from the

terminal to the microSD card and copied or moved back to

the FOMA terminal (Except i-motion that supports contents

migration)

Viewing Moving Pictures/i-motion Properties



i-motion playback screen (P308) ▶

[Menu]

▶ "File property"

•

[Edit]: Edit properties.

Properties displayed on the File detail screen

Item Description

File name Display the ﬁle name

File size Display the ﬁle size

File type Display the ﬁle format

Date & Time (Saved)*1 Display the saved date and time

Play time Display the ﬁle playback time

Display size Display the resolution

Video Display the video format

Audio Display the sound format

• HE-AAC and Enhanced aacPlus are

displayed as AAC.

File restriction

Display whether the ﬁle is restricted→P302

Ringtone Display whether the ﬁle can be set as a

ring tone

Receive display Display whether the ﬁle can be set as the

Stand-by display or incoming call screen

Title Display the default title of the ﬁle

Creator Display creator information

Description Display the ﬁle description

Source Display the source

Move to the microSD

Display whether the ﬁle can be moved to a

microSD card

*1 Appear only for data in the FOMA terminal memory.

*2 Data in a microSD card will be moved to the phone; display

whether data can be moved to the phone.

312

Data Management

Edit moving pictures/i-motion

Editing Moving Pictures/i-motion

You can edit moving pictures/i-motion.

• The pre-installed ﬁles cannot be edited.

• Some ﬁles may not be edited.

• The ticker displayed on i-motion cannot be edited.

Clipping a Frame of a Moving Picture as a

Still Image

You can clip a still image from a moving picture/i-motion.

The clipped image is saved to the "Camera" folder in "My

picture" of "Data Box".



i-motion playback screen (P308) ▶ Display the

image to be clipped as a still image

• Operations during i-motion playback→P306

M

[Menu] ▶ "Edit" ▶ "Capture"

Clipping a Frame of a Moving Picture

You can clip a part of a moving picture/i-motion.

The clipped moving picture/i-motion is saved to the same

folder as the source ﬁle.



i-motion playback screen (P308) ▶

[Menu]

▶ "Edit" ▶ "Clipping" ▶ Perform the following

operations

[For mail short]

Clip the video from the selected start point to 500KB or smaller and

save it. This option can be selected when the video size exceeds

500KB.

[For mail long]

Clip the video from the selected start point to 2MB or smaller and

save it. This option can be selected when the video size exceeds

2MB.

[Bound]

Clip the video from the selected start point to the selected end point

and save it.

▶ Press

[Play] to play a moving picture/i-motion ▶ At start

point to clip,

[Start] ▶ At end point to clip,

[End]

313

Data Management

Continue on the next page

Using a Playlist

The playback order of moving pictures/i-motion can be

speciﬁed in a playlist. Select your favorite moving pictures/

i-motion saved on the FOMA terminal and microSD card and

play them in your favorite order.

Creating a Playlist

Up to 10 playlists can be saved. Up to 99 moving pictures/

i-motion can be saved per playlist.

M

▶ "Data Box" ▶ "i-motion" ▶ Move the

cursor to "Playlists" ▶

[Open]

Playlist list screen

I

[New] ▶ Enter a playlist name

• Up to 255 full-pitch/half-pitch characters can be entered.

C

[Add] ▶ Mark moving pictures/i-motion to

save to a playlist ▶

[Done]

Saved moving

picture/i-motion

list screen

I

[Done]

Playing a Playlist



Playlist list screen (P313) ▶ Move the cursor

to a playlist to play ▶

[Play]

Playlist List Screen Sub Menu



Playlist list screen (P313) ▶ Move the cursor

to a playlist ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Add i-motion to playlist]

Add moving pictures/i-motion to the selected playlist.

▶ Mark moving pictures/i-motion to add to the playlist ▶

[Done]

▶

[Done]

Continued on next page

314

Data Management

[Delete]

One : Delete the selected playlist.

Select : Select and delete playlists.

▶ Mark playlists to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Mark all" or "Unmark all".

All : Delete all playlists.

[Edit title]

Edit the selected playlist name.

Saved Moving Picture/i-motion List Screen Sub Menu



Playlist list screen (P313) ▶ Move the cursor

to a playlist ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Add i-motion to

playlist" ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the following

operations

[Play]

Play from the selected moving picture/i-motion.

[Change order]

Change the order of the selected moving picture/i-motion.

▶ Select a moving picture/i-motion to move ▶ Select a destination

▶ "Yes"

[Delete]

One : Delete the selected moving picture/i-motion.

Select : Select and delete moving pictures/i-motion.

▶ Mark moving pictures/i-motion to delete ▶

[Delete]

▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Mark all" or "Unmark all".

All : Delete all moving pictures/i-motion.

Melody player

Playing a Melody

You can play pre-installed melodies or melodies downloaded

from sites.

Available ﬁle formats

File Format*SMF, MFi

File extension mid, mld

* Some ﬁles in a compatible ﬁle format may not be played.

M

▶ "Data Box" ▶ "Melody"

•

[New]: Create a folder.

Melody screen

315

Data Management

Continue on the next page



Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open]

•

[Mail]: Display the Compose message

screen with the selected ﬁle attached.

•

[Delete]: Delete the selected ﬁle.

• Icons displayed on the list screen→P295

Melody ﬁle

list screen



Move the cursor to a ﬁle ▶

[Play]

• T[Mail]: Display the Compose

message screen with the ﬁle in

playback attached.

Melody playback

screen

Display name of the ﬁle

Volume

Playback progress bar

Display the playback elapsed time.

Elapsed time/total time

Control keys

Display available navigation keys.

Key operations on the Melody playback screen

Operation Description

[Pause/Play] Pause/Play

[Stop] Stop

Play the previous/next ﬁle

Adjust the volume

Melody Screen Sub Menu



Melody screen (P314) ▶ Move the cursor to a

folder ▶

[Menu]

• The Melody screen sub menu is the same as the "My Picture

Screen Sub Menu" (P297). However, "Grid view" is not available.

Melody File List Screen Sub Menu

Melody ﬁle list screen (P315) ▶ Move the

cursor to a ﬁle ▶ M[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Files]

Play : Play the selected ﬁle.

Rename : Change the display name of the selected ﬁle.

Reset name : Reset the display name of the selected ﬁle to its

default name.

File property : Display the name, size, and type, etc. of the selected

melody.→P317

Continued on next page

316

Data Management

[Delete]

One : Delete the selected ﬁle.

Selected : Select and delete ﬁles.

▶ Mark ﬁles to delete ▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Delete all ﬁles in the folder.

▶

[Done] ▶ "Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Move]

One : Move the selected ﬁle.

▶ Select a destination folder

Selected : Select and move ﬁles.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶ Mark ﬁles to move ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Move all ﬁles in the folder.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the

Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Copy]

One : Copy the selected ﬁle.

▶ Select a destination folder

Selected : Select and copy ﬁles.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶ Mark ﬁles to copy ▶

[Done]

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

All : Copy all ﬁles in the folder.

▶ Select a destination folder ▶

[Done] ▶ Enter the

Terminal security code

• Press

[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.

[Send via]

Mail : Create i-mode mail with the selected melody attached. Go to

Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

IrDA : Send a ﬁle via infrared communication.

[Set as]

Set the selected melody as a ring tone, etc.

[Sort]

Set conditions and sort ﬁles.

[Memory info.]

Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in

"Data Box".

External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the

microSD card.

[New folder]

This option is not available.

Melody Playback Screen Sub Menu



Melody playback screen (P315) ▶

[Menu]

▶ Perform the following operations

[Send via mail]

Create i-mode mail with the melody in playback attached. Go to Step

2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).

[Set as tone]

Set the melody in playback as a ring tone, etc.

[File property]

Display the ﬁle name, size, and type, etc. of the melody in playback.

→P317

317

Data Management

Continue on the next page

Note

• During the sub menu operation, the melody playback is paused.

Viewing Melody Properties



Melody playback screen (P315) ▶

[Menu]

▶ "File property"

•

[Edit]: Edit properties.

Properties displayed on the File detail screen

Item Description

File name Display the ﬁle name

File size Display the ﬁle size

File type Display the ﬁle format

Date & Time (Saved)*1 Display the saved date and time

Play time Display the ﬁle playback duration

File restriction

Display whether the ﬁle is restricted→P302

Ringtone Display whether the ﬁle can be set as a

ring tone

Title Display the default title of the ﬁle

Source Display the source

Move to the microSD*2 Display whether the ﬁle can be moved to a

microSD card

*1 Appear only for data in the FOMA terminal memory.

*2 Data in a microSD card will be moved to the phone; display

whether data can be moved to the phone.

microSD Cards

You can save data on the FOMA terminal such as Phonebook

entries, mail, or Bookmarks to a microSD card, or can load

data on a microSD card to the FOMA terminal. Also, you can

browse data on a microSD card from the FOMA terminal.

• L-03B supports a microSD card of up to 2GB and a microSDHC

card of up to 8GB (commercially available) (as of June, 2009). For

the latest information on operations of microSD cards, including

manufacturers and capacity of cards, visit the following site

(in Japanese only). A microSD card not listed at the site may not

function.

- From i-mode "iMenu" ▶ "メニューリスト (Menu list)" ▶ "ケータイ電話

メーカー (Mobile Phone Manufacturers)" ▶ "WOW LG"

- From a PC http://jp.lgmobile.com/

Note that the information on the site shows

results of compatibility checks and the results

are not guaranteed.

• You can purchase microSD memory cards and

microSD card adapters from electric appliance

stores, etc.

QR code to

access the site

318

Data Management

Precautions on Using microSD Cards

• microSD cards formatted by another device such as a PC may not

be usable on the FOMA terminal. Use microSD cards formatted by

L-03B. Note that when formatting a microSD card, all data on the

card is deleted.→P323

• microSD cards may lose data or deform due to an accident or

failure. It is recommended that you make a copy of important data

and keep it in a separate place. DOCOMO is not responsible for loss

or alteration of any data.

• It may take a while to communicate depending on the amount of

data to transfer. Also, data may not be copied.

• Do not turn the FOMA terminal power oﬀ while data is being read or

written.

• Do not unplug the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02

(optional) while data is being read or written, or a microSD is being

formatted. This may result in data loss.

• Never remove the microSD card while the card is being accessed

such as when data on the card is being displayed or the storage

capacity of the card is being checked.

• Do not attach labels or stickers on microSD cards. Even the

thickness of labels may cause contact failure or data corruption.

• Do not touch the contacts with your hand or metal objects.

• Do not apply strong force, do not bend or drop, and do not let the

card wet.

• Do not leave a removed microSD card within the reach of infants.

Accidental swallowing or injury may result.

• When inserting/removing a microSD card, do not place your face

close to the card because the card may eject when you suddenly

release your ﬁngers oﬀ. Also, do not let small children touch the

card. Injury may result.

Inserting/Removing a microSD Card

Before inserting/removing a microSD card, make sure to turn

the FOMA terminal power oﬀ.

Inserting



Open the microSD card slot cover (

) and

rotate in the direction of the allow



Slowly insert a microSD card with the metal

contacts side up until it clicks

319

Data Management

Continue on the next page



Close the microSD card slot cover

Note

• Insert a microSD card properly. If the card is not inserted

properly, the card cannot be used.

Removing



Follow Step 1 in "Inserting" to open the cover

and softly push the microSD card in the

direction of the allow

The microSD card pops out slightly.



Remove the microSD card

Folder Structure on a microSD Card

When you move or copy ﬁles from the FOMA terminal to the

microSD card, or save still images or moving pictures captured

with Camera directly to the microSD card, a folder compatible

with the ﬁle type is automatically created on the microSD card.

• When you write data to the microSD card from a PC, a folder

structure and ﬁle name like the following are required:

L-03B

DCIM (Captured image, DCF-compliant JPEG, GIF other

than animation)

△△△

LGDCF

L03Baaaa.JPG/.GIF

LGeDB (Song (WMA ﬁle) management information)

PRIVATE

DOCOMO

TABLE (Management information)*1

STILL (non-DCF-compliant JPEG, GIF animation)

STILaaaa.JPG/.GIF

SUDaaa

STILaaaa.JPG/.GIF

RINGER(Melody)

RINGaaaa.MLD/.MID

RUDaaa

RINGaaaa.MLD/.MID

MMFILE (Sound-only moving picture/i-motion)

ＭＭFaaaa.3GP

MUDaaa

ＭＭFaaaa.3GP

WM (WMA ﬁle)*2

Continued on next page

320

Data Management

WM_SYSTEM (WMA ﬁle management information

and license information)*2

DECOIMG (Deco-mail pictogram)

DIMGaaaa.JPG/.GIF

DUDaaa

DIMGaaaa.JPG/.GIF

OTHER (Others)

OTHERaaa.xxxx

OUDaaa

OTHERaaa.xxxx

SD_VIDEO (Moving picture/i-motion)

PRLaaa

MOLaaa.3GP

SD_BIND (Data supporting content migration)*2

SVC00001 (Moving picture/i-motion)

SVC00002 (Chaku-Uta Full

song)

SD_PIM (Personal data)

SD_AUDIO (SD-Audio-compliant music data)*2

xxxx : Extension (3- to 4-digit, half-pitch alphanumeric characters)

△△△

: 3-digit, half-pitch numeric characters between 100 and 999

(Use the same number for a folder name and ﬁle name saved

in the folder.)

aaa : 3-digit, half-pitch numeric characters between 001 and 999

aaaa : 4-digit, half-pitch numeric characters between 0001 and

0999

*1 The "TABLE" folder has sub folders that store additional

information for "DCIM", "STILL", "RINGER", "MMFILE", "DECOIMG",

"SD_VIDEO", and "OTHER".

*2 Data is encrypted and may not be viewed directly on a PC, etc.

If you delete, edit, or add ﬁles under these folders, ﬁles may not

work properly on L-03B.

Number of savable ﬁles on a microSD card

• The number of savable ﬁles on the microSD card varies

depending on the capacity of the microSD card.

• You can check available space on the microSD card by

accessing "Memory info." or "Memory status".→P325, P374

File Folder Number of savable items

Still image (DCF-

compliant JPEG, GIF

other than animation)

DCIM Up to 900 folders/Up to

999 ﬁles per folder

Still image (non-DCF-

compliant JPEG, GIF

animation)

STILL Up to 999 folders/Up to

999 ﬁles per folder

Melody RINGER Up to 999 folders/Up to

999 ﬁles per folder

Sound-only moving

picture/i-motion MMFILE Up to 999 folders/Up to

999 ﬁles per folder

WMA ﬁle WM Up to 1,000 ﬁles

Deco-mail pictogram DECOIMG Up to 999 folders/Up to

999 ﬁles per folder

Moving picture/i-motion SD_VIDEO Up to 999 folders/Up to

999 ﬁles per folder

Personal data SD_PIM 1 folder/65,535 ﬁles

Others OTHER Up to 999 folders/Up to

999 ﬁles per folder

Note

• In some cases, a microSD card used with this FOMA terminal

cannot be used with other microSD-compatible FOMA terminals

because the folder structure is diﬀerent.

• Mails that contain Korean texts in a microSD card are not

displayed correctly on the Korean-incompatible terminal.

321

Data Management

Continue on the next page

• Depending on the PC in use, folder/ﬁle names may appear

in lower case. Also, ﬁle extensions or certain folders (hidden

folders), etc. may not appear.

• Do not delete or move folders on the microSD card using a PC.

If you do so, the folders may no longer be readable by L-03B.

Using a microSD Card

You can move or copy ﬁles saved in Data Box on the FOMA

terminal, such as still images, moving pictures or i-motion, to

the microSD card, and you can view ﬁles saved from a PC to

the microSD card on the FOMA terminal.

Viewing/Playing Files on a microSD Card

You can view/play ﬁles on the microSD card in the same way

as ones on the FOMA terminal from "Data Box".

M

▶ "Data Box" ▶ "My picture"/"Music"/

"i-motion"/"Melody" ▶ Move the cursor to

"microSD" ▶

[Open]

• "Displaying Images"→P296

• "Managing Music Data"→P270

• "Playing Moving Pictures/i-motion"→P307

• "Playing a Melody"→P314

Note

• Some ﬁles may not be viewed/played.

• The folder/ﬁle list screen sub menu for a microSD card is the

same as one for the FOMA terminal. However, the ﬁles cannot

be set to the Stand-by display or ring tone, sent via infrared

communication, and saved at the Data Center.

Copying/Moving Files between the FOMA

Terminal and a microSD Card

You can copy or move ﬁles between the FOMA terminal

and a microSD card by copying or moving ﬁles between the

"microSD" folder and other folders in Data Box.

Example: To move a camera image saved on the FOMA

terminal to a microSD card

M

▶ "Data Box" ▶ "My picture"



Move the cursor to a folder ▶

[Open]

• Select a folder other than "microSD".



Move the cursor to a ﬁle ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Move" ▶ "One"



"External memory"



Move the cursor to the destination folder ▶

[Open] ▶

[Select]

Continued on next page

322

Data Management

Note

• Files which can be copied/moved are JPEG/GIF image ﬁles

excluding pre-installed data, and moving pictures whose size is

QCIF or smaller, and melodies.

• Chaku-Uta Full

songs, or i-motion downloaded from sites

cannot be copied to a microSD card.

• Some ﬁles may not be copied/moved depending on ﬁle type or

size.

• Flash movies saved on this FOMA terminal cannot be copied/

moved to a microSD card.

• You can move transferable copyright protected i-motion or

music data saved in the FOMA terminal to a "Movablecontents"

folder in each "microSD" folder.

Exchanging Personal

Information between the FOMA

Terminal and a microSD Card

You can copy personal information between the FOMA

terminal and a microSD card, and you can back up your data

in the FOMA terminal to a microSD card.

Personal information includes the following:

- Phonebook

- Schedule

- Text memo

- To do list

- Inbox

- Outbox

- Unsent message

- Bookmark

Copying Personal Information on the FOMA

Terminal to a microSD Card

You can copy personal information saved on the FOMA

terminal to a microSD card.

Copying Data One Piece at a Time

Example: To copy a Phonebook entry



Stand-by display ▶

▶ Select a Phonebook

entry to copy ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Copy" ▶

"to microSD"

Selecting Data Type to Make Copy at a Time (Backup)

M

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "microSD" ▶ "PIM"

I

[Backup] ▶ Select a data type to copy



Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

For Phonebook

A conﬁrmation asking whether to copy data in "Own

Number" appears.

323

Data Management

Continue on the next page

Copying/Overwriting Personal Information

on a microSD Card to the FOMA Terminal

You can copy/overwrite personal information saved on a

microSD card to the FOMA terminal.

Copying Data One by One

M

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "microSD" ▶ "PIM"



Select a data type

Data saved on the microSD card is displayed.

Personal data list

screen

(Ex.: Phonebook)

Icons displayed on the Personal data list screen

Icon Description

/ / / /

/ / /

Individual data (one piece of data)

Phonebook/Schedule/Memo/To do list/

Inbox/Outbox/Unsent message/Bookmark

/ / / /

/ / /

Backup data (multiple data)

Phonebook/Schedule/Memo/To do list/

Inbox/Outbox/Unsent message/Bookmark



Move the cursor to data ▶

[Menu]

•

[Select]: Display details about data.



"Copy to phone" ▶ "Yes"

For backup data

Select "Copy to phone" ▶ enter the Terminal security

code ▶ "Yes".

Note

• In Step 3, you can select backup data ▶ move the cursor to

data ▶ press

[Menu] to select "Copy to phone" or "Overwrite

to phone".

If you select "Copy to phone", you can further select "Selected

data" or "All data".

• The maximum number of data that can be saved on the FOMA

terminal can be displayed for individual data in backup data.

324

Data Management

Personal Data List Screen Sub Menu



Personal data list screen (P323) ▶ Move the

cursor to data ▶

[Menu] ▶ Perform the

following operations

[Rename]*

Change the display name of the selected ﬁle.

[Copy to microSD]

Copy (backup) all data of the displayed data type from the FOMA

terminal to a microSD card at a time.

▶ Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

• For Phonebook entries, a conﬁrmation asking whether to copy

saved data in "Own Number" appears.

[Copy to phone]*

Copy the selected data to the FOMA terminal.

• For backup data, select "Copy to phone" ▶ enter the Terminal

security code ▶ "Yes".

[Overwrite to phone]*

Overwrite the data on the FOMA terminal with the selected data.

→P324

[Multiple choice]*

Select and delete data.

▶ Mark data to delete ▶

[Delete] ▶ "Yes"

• Press

[Menu] to select "Delete", "Copy to phone", or "Select all"

or "Clear all" from "Select/Clear".

[Delete]*

Delete the selected data.

[Memory info.]

Display the status of storage space, etc. of the microSD card.

* Not displayed if there is no data on the microSD card.

Overwriting with Backup Data

You can overwrite the data on the FOMA terminal with data

backed up in advance.

• Note that selecting "Overwrite to phone" deletes all saved data on

the FOMA terminal and replaces it with the selected data from the

microSD card.

Make sure important data is not saved before selecting "Overwrite

to phone".



Personal data list screen (P323) ▶ Move

the cursor to backup data ▶

[Menu] ▶

"Overwrite to phone"



Enter the Terminal security code ▶ "Yes"

For Phonebook

A conﬁrmation asking whether to copy data in "Own

Number" appears.

325

Data Management

Continue on the next page

Managing a microSD Card

Formatting a microSD Card

Format (initialize) a microSD card so that it can be used on

the FOMA terminal.

M

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "microSD" ▶ "Reset microSD"

A message indicating all data will be deleted appears. Select

whether you want to continue to format.



"Yes" ▶ Enter the Terminal security code

Note

• Use this FOMA terminal to format the card.

• Note that when formatting a microSD card, all data on the card

is deleted.

Updating Data on a microSD Card

Update data on the microSD card if data cannot be displayed

correctly on the FOMA terminal after changing, adding, or

deleting data on the microSD card using another device.

M

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "microSD" ▶ "Data update"



Mark data types to update ▶

[Done]

Note

• Updating data may take a while if a large amount of data is

saved on the microSD card.

• If you use another device to save data on the microSD card, the

data saved on the card may not be displayed correctly on the

FOMA terminal due to insuﬃcient available memory space for

creating management information on the FOMA terminal.

Checking Usage Status on a microSD

Card

M

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "microSD" ▶ "Memory info."

Note

• If the used space is not shown as "0KB" when no data is saved

on the microSD card, format the card.

• The actual available space on a microSD card is smaller than

the space printed on the card.

• Data may not be saved if there is not suﬃcient memory space

on the microSD card. Delete unnecessary data or insert a

microSD card with suﬃcient memory space to save data.

326

Data Management

Using the FOMA Terminal as a

microSD Card Reader/Writer

Connect this FOMA terminal with a microSD card inserted to

a PC and read/write data on a microSD card.

• To use a microSD card, you need a microSD card separately.

• Only a PC with Windows Vista, XP, or Windows 2000 (Japanese

versions) can be used to read/write data on a microSD card.

Operation with other OS is not guaranteed.

• To use the FOMA terminal as a microSD card reader/writer, set up

the USB mode. Before setting the USB mode, disconnect the FOMA

USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional).

M

▶ "Settings" ▶ "Others" ▶ "USB mode

setting" ▶ "microSD mode"



Open the External Connector Terminal cover of

the FOMA terminal (

) and insert the external

connector of the FOMA USB Cable with Charge

Function 01/02 with the front side (indicated

by a mark, label, etc.) up until it clicks (

)



Connect the USB connector of the FOMA USB

Cable with Charge Function 01/02 to a USB

port on a PC (

)

USB connector

Release button

External connector

(label side up)

Release button

Note

• When removing a microSD card or the FOMA USB Cable with

Charge Function 01/02 from a PC, be sure to perform the

procedure on safe removal for hardware from the task tray of

the PC. Removing the memory card or FOMA USB Cable with

Charge Function 01/02 without performing the proper steps

may result in data loss.

• When switching USB mode setting, disconnect the FOMA USB

Cable with Charge Function 01/02 ﬁrst. When the FOMA USB

Cable with Charge Function 01/02 is connected, the USB

mode cannot be switched.

• If the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 is

disconnected, the USB mode setting automatically returns to

"Communication mode".

Important

Make sure that the FOMA terminal is correctly connected to a

PC. If it is not connected correctly, data may not only fail to be

exchanged but also be lost.

327

Data Management

Continue on the next page

Infrared communication

Using Infrared Communication

You can exchange Phonebook entries, schedule events or

bookmarks with a device supporting infrared communication.

Available data for transfer

Data type

Receiving

capability Sending

capability Number of

savable items

One All

items One All

items

Phonebook (Personal

information)

〇〇〇〇

Refer to P84

Schedule

〇〇〇〇

Up to 200

To Do*1

〇〇〇〇

Up to 50

Received mail

〇〇〇〇

Up to 1,000

Sent mail

〇〇〇〇

Up to 500

Unsent mail

〇〇〇〇

Image ﬁle*2

〇×〇×

Up to 2,000

Moving picture ﬁle*3

〇×〇×

Up to 1,000

Melody*4

〇×〇×

Up to 1,000

Bookmark*5

〇〇〇〇

Up to 200*6

Memo

〇〇〇〇

Up to 50

*1 If To Do tasks with alarm set are received prior to the set time,

they may not be correctly saved.

*2 Up to 5MB of data per ﬁle can be sent/received.

*3 Up to 10MB of data per ﬁle can be sent/received.

*4 Up to 100KB of data per ﬁle can be sent/received.

*5 Sent/received bookmarks may not be ﬁltered depending on the

other party's terminal model.

*6 Up to 100 for i-mode and 100 for Full browser can be saved.

Save location of data received via infrared communication

Data type Save location

Phonebook Phonebook

Schedule Schedule

To Do To do list

Received mail Inbox

Sent mail Outbox

Unsent mail Unsent message

Still image "Data transfer" folder in "My picture" of "Data Box"

Moving picture "Data transfer" folder in "i-motion" of "Data Box"

Melody "Data transfer" folder in "Melody" of "Data Box"

Bookmark "Bookmark" folder in "i-mode"

"Bookmark" folder in "Full browser"

Memo Text memo

328

Data Management

Performing Infrared Communication

• Use infrared devices within a distance of approximately 20cm.

• Do not move the FOMA terminal until the data exchange completes.

• If you hold the FOMA terminal in your hand at infrared

communication, be sure to hold it securely so that it is not shaken.

Infrared port

Within approx. 20cm

15 degrees

Cautions on Data Transfer

• Calls, i-mode, and data communication are not available during

infrared communication because the FOMA terminal turns in the

same status as out of service area.

• Data may not be transferred depending on the other party's FOMA

terminal conditions. Depending on the other party's mobile phone

model, the ﬁlter setting of received mail or bookmarks, or group

setting of Phonebook entries may not be reﬂected, or the content

of Deco-mail may not be saved correctly.

• Infrared communication with infrared devices other than L-03B may

result in data not being received or displayed correctly.

• Communication may take a while depending on the amount of data

to be transferred. Also, data may not be received.

• Infrared communication may not be performed successfully under

direct sunlight or ﬂuorescent light, or near another infrared device,

due to the possible interference.

• Attachments to i-mode mail are also forwarded. However, some

types of attachments may not be forwarded.

• If a message text contains pictographs or symbols, they may not

be displayed correctly on a recipient mobile phone or PC which is

incompatible with pictographs.

• Depending on the recipient terminal, mail subject may be received

partially.

• Infrared communication is not available when Lock all, Data access

lock is set, or when Self mode is activated.

• Mails in large size may not be sent correctly.

• When mail is forwarded, only downloaded attachments are

forwarded.

Send/Receive via infrared communication

Sending and Receiving Data One

by One

Sending a Piece of Data

• Set the receiving device to the infrared receiving mode before

sending data.

Example: To send a Phonebook entry



Stand-by display ▶

▶ Move the cursor to a

Phonebook entry ▶

[Menu] ▶ "Send Ir data"

▶ "Focused data" ▶ "Yes"

Note

• A message appears if the destination device cannot be found.

Check the distance and angle with the other party again.

329

Data Management

Continue on the next page

Receiving a Piece of Data

M

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Receive Ir data" ▶ "Receive"

▶ "Yes"



Perform infrared transmission operations on

the sending device

Infrared communication starts.



"Yes"

Send/Receive all via infrared communication

Sending and Receiving All Data

You can exchange all data with a PC or another FOMA

terminal at a time.

• To exchange all data, an authentication password is used to

identify the FOMA terminals of both sender and receiver correctly.

An authentication password is any 4-digit number that you selected

before infrared communication and should be entered both on the

sending and receiving devices.

Sending All Data

• Set the receiving device to the infrared receiving mode before

sending data.

Example: To send all Phonebook entries on the FOMA terminal



Stand-by display ▶

▶

[Menu] ▶ "Send Ir

data" ▶ "all in phone"

• If an image is set to a Phonebook entry, a warning indicating

that it may take a while to send appears. Select "Yes" to send.



Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Enter the

authentication password ▶ "Yes"

Infrared communication starts.

Note

• A message appears if the destination device cannot be found.

Check the distance and angle with the other party again.

• Files in "My picture" cannot be sent at a time (one ﬁle can be

sent at a time).

Receiving All Data

•

Receiving all data overwrites over the data on the FOMA terminal

and deletes all saved data including protected mails. Make sure that

important data is not saved before sending or receiving all data.

M

▶ "LifeKit" ▶ "Receive Ir data" ▶

"Receive all" ▶ "Yes"



Enter the Terminal security code ▶ Enter the

authentication password



Perform infrared transmission operations on

the sending device

Infrared communication starts.



"Yes"

330

Data Management

Using Infrared Remote Control

Function

You can use the FOMA terminal as a remote controller of an

infrared remote controlled device. An i-αppli can send remote

control signals using infrared rays.

• To use the remote controller function, download software that supports the

device. Key operations for remote control vary depending on the software.

• Some devices may not be controlled.

• Depending on the controlled device or ambient brightness, communication

may not be possible.

• While Self mode is activated, the infrared remote controller cannot be used.

Infrared Remote Control Operations

Point the Infrared port of the FOMA terminal at the remote

control sensor on a TV, etc. and operate the FOMA terminal

within approximately 4m away from the device. Depending on

the controlled device and ambient brightness, remote control

may not be possible.

Within the range of

±15 degrees

Within approx. 4m

Infrared port

Viewing a Document

Display a document ﬁle saved on microSD card.

• Save document ﬁles in "OTHER" folder or "OUDxxx (xxx are half-pitch

numbers from 0 to 9)" folder of a microSD card.→ P319

Available ﬁle formats

File type*Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, Microsoft

PowerPoint, PDF

Extension doc, xls, ppt, pdf

* Files for Word 2007, Excel 2007, and PowerPoint 2007 cannot

be displayed. Also, some ﬁles in a compatible ﬁle format may not

be displayed.

M

▶ "Media" ▶ "Document viewer" ▶ Select a

document

During zoom display,

the entire document

and the display area

are shown.

Page number/total number of pages

Display magniﬁcation

331

Data Management

Continue on the next page

Operation while viewing a document

Operation Description

/ / Zoom/restore the previous zoom ratio

J*1

, / Display previous/next page

K*2

, Slide an image Move the display position

*1 Available only in normal view.

*2 Available only in enlarged view.

Note

• Tilting the FOMA terminal to the left automatically switches

display to the horizontal view.

LG Electronics USA L03B PCS GSM Phone User Manual L 06A Sake Cover Press E

LG Electronics USA PCS GSM Phone L 06A Sake Cover Press E

Users Manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation